1. Materials:
a. Adapter and Cap: Glass-reinforced polypropylene
b. Gaskets and O-rings: Viton
c. Handles, Rings, and Pins: Stainless Steel
2. Temperature Rating: 0 to 150 deg F
3. Pressure Rating:
a. 0 deg F: 100 psi
b. 70 deg F: 125 psi
c. 150 deg F: 70 psi
4. Adapter:
a. 2î FNPT x Male quick connect adapter
5. Cap
a. 2î Lockable Type
B. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Banjo
a. Adapter: 200A with Viton gasket
b. Cap: 200CAP with Viton gasket
2. Or equal
2.9 NON-METALLIC CORPORATION STOP WITH INJECTION QUILL
A. Type: Complete assembly of corporation stop, injection quill, and safety chain, designed for use on process pipes 4î or larger. Construction shall be fully compatible with service conditions.
B. Corporation Stop:
1. Process Connection: 3/4î Male NPT.
2. Rated 150 psi at 195 degrees F.
Packet Pg. 849 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15120-6
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3. ASTM D1784, Type I, Grade 1 chlorinated polyvinyl chloride body, ball, and stem, end entry.
4. Threaded ends.
5. Viton or Teflon seat.
6. Viton O-rings and stem seals.
C. Injection Quill:
1. Process Connection: 1/2î female NPT.
2. Dimensions:
a. Minimum 1/4î inside diameter.
b. Tapered injector tip, oriented to maximize chemical dispersion. c. Select injection quill length such that tip of quill extends into process pipe between one-third and one-half of process pipe diameter. Minimum distance from pipe wall to injector tip shall be 2-inches.
3. Materials:
a. Solution Tube Assembly: CPVC.
b. Ring, Sleeve and Capture Nut: PVDF.
4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psi.
D. Safety Chain:
1. Designed to prevent injection quill withdrawal before corporation stop is closed.
E. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Hydro Instruments, CS-075-CPVC.
2. Neptune, CS2-75-PVC.
3. Or Equal
2.10 STRAINERS
A. CPVC Y-STRAINER, 4î diameter and smaller
1. Materials:
a. Body: CPVC
b. Hex Cleanout Cap: CPVC
c. Screen: CPVC
d. O-rings and gaskets: Viton
2. 1/32î perforated screen
3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psi
4. Size and connection as shown on the Drawings
5. Manufacturer:
a. Hayward Flow Control Systems
b. Or Equal
2.11 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Type: Direct mounted, dial type pressure gage.
1. Construction: Weatherproof,
a. Case:
1) 4-inch diameter
2) Material: cast aluminum with black finish or 304 stainless steel 3) Flangeless
4) Bottom 1/4-inch N.P.T. connection.
Packet Pg. 850 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15120-7
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
b. Ring: Chrome plated or stainless steel, close type.
c. Dial: White face, black numbers and graduations.
d. Window: Laminated safety glass or clear acrylic plastic. e. Pointer: Micrometer type, black finish, red tip.
f. Movement: Stainless steel, rotary type, delrin sector and bushings. g. Bourdon Tube: Seamless phosphor bronze, Grade A over-pressured and stressrelieved. h. Socket and Tip: Forged brass, alloy steel and Type 316 stainless steel.
2. Accuracy: 1 percent minimum.
3. Range: Per Schedule in Section C.
4. Gage Cocks: Provide brass tee handle cock before each gage.
5. Diaphragm Seals:
a. Provide diaphragm seals on all installations where called for on the Drawings, Details or Specifications
b. Diaphragm seals shall be thread-attached type with removable cleanout AISI Type 316 stainless steel diaphragm, zinc or cadmium plated carbon steel upper housing and stainless steel lower housing.
c. The diaphragm shall be of continuous design to safely contain the process fluid in the event of gauge breakage or removal with the system under pressure. d. The lower housing shall be provided with a tapped º-inch NPT flushing connection and an M x F stainless steel needle valve.
6. Provide snubber or pulsation dampener to protect gage.
7. Reference ANSI B40.1 for Grade 1A gages.
B. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
1. Weksler Instrument Company, Regal Gauges.
2. H.O. Trerice Company, 700 Series.
3. Or equal.
C. Schedule
ID Gage Name Range
(psi)
Diaphragm
Seal?
05_PI_70 Surface Wash Pump Pressure Indicator 0-200 No
06_PI_10 Backwash Reclaim Pump Pressure Indicator 0-200 No 06_PI_20 Sewer Force Main Pressure Indicator 0-50 Yes
2.12 FLOATING SUPERNATANT COLLECTOR
A. Single Integrated unit including:
1. PVC or stainless steel float chamber containing polyurethane foam.
2. PVC or stainless steel strainer plate with 3/16î holes.
3. 6-inch flexible hose discharge fitting.
4. Freely turning discharge tube design.
5. Manufacturer and Product:
a. Megator; Floating Suction Strainer
b. Or Equal.
Packet Pg. 851 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15120-8
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Provide 6-inch flexible polyethylene suction pipe:
1. Provide 10 to 12 feet of flexible piping.
2. Manufacturer and Product:
a. U.S. Plastic Corp; Ductall Polyethylene Flexible Hose. b. Or Equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Follow all manufacturerís directions
B. Flexible Couplings (FC)
1. Follow all manufacturerís directions
2. No more than 1-inch gap between pipe ends
3. Center flexible coupling in joint
4. Tighten bolts in an alternating pattern to provide even tension around the coupling
5. Tighten bolts to specified torque
6. In buried installations, wrap coupling with plastic fastened to pipe to protect bolts and coupling from backfill material
C. Flanged Coupling Adapters (FCA)
1. Follow all manufacturerís directions
2. No more than 1-inch gap between pipe plain end and flange face
3. Tighten flange bolts prior to tightening coupling bolts
4. Tighten bolts in an alternating pattern to provide even tension around the coupling
5. Tighten bolts to specified torque
6. In buried installations, wrap coupling with plastic fastened to pipe to protect bolts and coupling from backfill material
D. Restrained Mechanical Joint Glands (RMJ)
1. Follow all manufacturerís directions
2. Tighten mechanical joint gland bolts before tightening restraint lugs
3. Tighten restraint lugs until torque head breaks off
4. In buried installations, wrap joint with plastic fastened to pipe to protect bolts and coupling from backfill material
E. Pressure Gages
1. Follow all manufacturerís directions
2. Install diaphragm seals where process liquid would be detrimental to gage life (wastewater, chemical service, etc.)
3. Check gage accuracy
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 852 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15200-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 15200
VALVES AND OPERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Product data sheets for make and model.
2. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction.
3. Certificate of Compliance for: Butterfly valves; full compliance with AWWA C504.
B. Tests and inspection data.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01330, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. In accordance with manufacturerís directions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All valves shall be the same size as the pipe in which they are installed, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings.
B. All valves shall include all appurtenant parts (operators, chainwheels, handwheels, valve stems, floor stands, gear boxes, operating nut, etc.) for a complete operating valve.
1. Valve shall be, as much as practical, fully factory assembled.
C. All valves shall open by turning counter-clockwise. Maximum force required for operation shall be 40 lbs.
D. Where Lead-Free Bronze or Brass is specified, materials shall be in compliance with California Health & Safety Code Section 116875. Not more than a weighted average of
0.25 percent of the wetted surface of the valve shall be lead. Valve shall be provided with a ìhang tagî or other marking that easily identifies the valve as Lead-Free.
E. Coatings and Linings:
1. Provide factory-applied coatings as described herein.
2. Where liquid epoxy coatings are specified, coatings shall conform to AWWA C550.
3. Field coat the exterior of all valve bodies with the same coating as is required for the adjacent pipe in Section 09900, PAINTING and Section 15100, PIPE AND FITTINGS, unless otherwise specified.
Packet Pg. 853 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15200-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
F. Nuts, Bolts and Washers
1. Hex Bolts: ASTM A320/A320M, Type 304 stainless steel, Grade B8, Class 2
2. Nuts: ASTM F594, Type 304 stainless steel, Grade B8, Class 2
3. Washers: Type 304 stainless steel
2.2 BALL VALVES
A. BAV-03: Stainless Steel Ball Valve, 3 Inches and Smaller
1. Service: Water, air.
2. Features:
a. Threaded ends
b. Rated minimum 800 psig WOG (Water-Oil-Gas)
c. Stainless steel body
d. Polished stainless steel ball
e. Teflon seat
f. Stainless steel lever-type handle
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Apollo, Type 76
b. Watts Type S-FBV-1
c. Or Equal
B. BAV-05: PVC Ball Valve 4 Inches and Smaller:
1. Service: Water, Chemical Duty.
2. Features:
a. Rated 150 psi at 73 degrees F
b. ASTM D1784, Type I, Grade 1 polyvinyl chloride body, ball, and stem, end entry c. Double union design,
d. Flanged-end if noted in Valve Schedule, otherwise solvent-weld socket ends e. EPDM or Teflon seat
f. EPDM O-rings and stem seals
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Nibco; Chemtrol Tru-Bloc.
b. ASAHI/America;Type 21/21A.
c. Or Equal.
C. BAV-06: CPVC Ball Valve 4 Inches and Smaller:
1. Service: Water, Chemical Duty.
2. Features:
a. Rated 150 psi at 73 degrees F
b. ASTM D1784, Type I, Grade 1 chlorinated polyvinyl chloride body, ball, and stem, end entry
c. Double union design
d. Flanged-end if noted in Valve Schedule, otherwise solvent-weld socket ends e. Viton or Teflon seat
f. Viton O-rings and stem seals
g. Vented ball
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Nibco; Chemtrol Tru-Bloc.
b. ASAHI/America;Type 21/21A.
c. Or Equal.
Packet Pg. 854 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15200-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.3 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. BFV-10: Butterfly Valve 3 Inches to 72 Inches:
1. Service: Water.
2. Features:
a. Flanged end, short body type.
b. AWWA C504, Class 150B.
c. Features:
1) Body:
a) Cast iron
2) Disc:
a) Cast or ductile iron disc
b) On valves 24-inch and larger, provide non-hollow discs 3) Shaft:
a) Type 304 stainless steel shaft,
b) Self-adjusting V-type or O-ring shaft seals.
4) Seat:
a) Valves 3- to 20- inch:
1. Buna N or NBR rubber seat bonded or molded in body only.
2. Elastomer seats which are bonded or vulcanized to the body shall have adhesive integrity of bond between seat and body assured by testing, with minimum 75-pound pull in accordance with ASTM D429, Method B.
b) Valves 24-inch and larger:
1. Buna N or NBR rubber seat retained within a dovetail groove in the valve body and mechanically locked in place by use of an epoxy filler.
2. Valve to be adjustable from either side
3. Valves using seat fasteners or retaining rings are not allowed c) Provide stainless steel seating surface.
5) Coatings and Linings:
a) Liquid epoxy, 12 mil minimum, for valve interior and exterior. b) For potable water applications, epoxy lining shall be NSF 61 approved. d. Valve shall be suitable for throttling operations and infrequent operation after periods of inactivity.
e. Valve shall be bubble-tight with rated pressure applied from either side. f. Smooth flow stream on valve body interior
1) No travel stops for disc on interior of body.
2) Isolate metal-to-metal thrust bearing surfaces from flowstream.
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. DeZurik Water Controls; Model BAW.
b. Henry Pratt Company
1) 3î to 20î: Model 2FII
2) 24î to 72î: Model Triton XR-70
c. Or Equal.
Packet Pg. 855 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15200-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.4 CHECK VALVES
A. CKV-06: CPVC Ball Check Valve 4î and smaller
1. Service: Water, Chemical Duty.
2. Features:
a. Materials:
1) CPVC body and ball, conforming to ASTM D1784 Cell Classification 23567-A. 2) FPM (FKM) uni-seats and seal
b. Connections: True union or flanged as shown on the Drawings c. 150 psi minimum pressure rating
d. 5 psi minimum shutoff
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Asahi/America Inc.
b. Nibco, Chemtrol True Union Ball Check (3î and smaller) c. Or Equal
B. CKV-10: Swing Check Valve (2î to 24î)
1. Service: Water, Sewage, Sludge and General Service.
2. Style: Swing Check, Outside lever and weight type, Flanged-End Connections
3. General: Valves shall comply with AWWA C508.
4. Body: Valve body and cover shall be fabricated with cast iron conforming to ASTM A 126 with flanged ends conforming to ANSI B16.1.
5. Disc: The valve disc shall be fabricated of cast iron or ductile iron and rubber faced.
6. Seat and Rings: The valve seat and rings shall be fabricated of bronze conforming to ASTM B62 or B148 or of Buna-N.
7. Disc Bolt: A307 Steel
8. Hinge: Ductile Iron
9. Hinge Pin: The hinge pin shall be fabricated of stainless steel.
10. Coatings and Linings:
a. Liquid epoxy, 12 mil minimum, for valve interior and exterior. b. For potable water applications, epoxy lining shall be NSF 61 approved.
11. Manufacturer:
a. M&H; Style 159, Lever and Weight
b. Milliken; Figure 8001, Lever and Weight
c. Or equal.
2.5 DIAPHRAGM VALVES
A. DIA-01: CPVC Diaphragm Valve 3 Inches and Smaller:
1. Service: Water, Chemical Duty.
2. Features:
a. CPVC Type IV, ASTM D1784 body and bonnet
b. Flanged or true union as shown on the Drawings
c. Diaphragms shall be three-piece:
1) PTFE face
2) PVDF gas barrier
3) EPDM backing
d. EPDM o-rings
e. Bubble-tight sealing
f. Travel stop for over-tightening prevention
g. Position indication
h. 150 psi at 70 deg F minimum pressure rating
Packet Pg. 856 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15200-5
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3. Manufacturers:
a. Asahi/America Inc. Type 14
b. Or Equal
2.6 GATE VALVES
A. GAV-10: Resilient-Seated Gate Valve, 3 Inches to 24 Inches:
1. Service: Water.
2. Features:
a. Conforms to AWWA C509 (<12î) or AWWA C515 (14î to 24î) b. Iron body
c. Resilient seat, bronze mounted
d. Full port
e. Valve Ends:
1) Mechanical joint ends for buried service, unless shown otherwise on drawings or valve schedule
2) Flanged ends for exposed service
f. Non-rising stem
g. Actuator for Buried Service:
1) Stem extension, as required, to bring operating nut to within 12î of ground surface.
2) 2-inch operating nut
h. Actuator for Exposed Service:
1) Handwheel
i. Design working water pressure: 250 psig
j. Coatings and Linings:
1) Liquid epoxy, 12 mil minimum, for valve interior and exterior. 2) For potable water applications, epoxy lining shall be NSF 61 approved.
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Mueller 2360 (2î to 12î) or 2361 (14î to 24î)
b. M&H Valve; AWWA C509 (2î to 12î) or AWWA C515 (14î to 24î). c. Or Equal.
2.7 PLUG VALVES
A. PLV-10: Eccentric Plug Valve, 3 Inches to 20 Inches:
1. Service: Water, sewage.
2. Features:
a. Non-lubricated type.
b. Drip-tight shutoff with pressure from either direction. c. Features:
1) Body: Cast iron Type ASTM A126 Class B.
2) Plug:
a) Cast iron or 316 stainless steel.
b) Round or rectangular port of no less than 80 percent of connecting pipe area.
c) Coated with Buna-N, Chloroprene, or Hycar.
3) Seats: Type 316 stainless steel or nickel.
4) Stem:
a) Bearing: Self-lubricating stainless steel or reinforced Teflon. b) Seal:
Packet Pg. 857 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15200-6
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1. Multiple V-rings, U-cups, or O-rings of nitrile rubber.
2. Externally adjustable and re-packable without removing the bonnet or actuator from the valve under pressure.
c) Provide upper and lower grit seals on stem.
5) Ends:
a) Exposed service: Flanged per ANSI B16.1 or grooved, as shown on Drawings or indicated on Valve Schedule.
b) Buried service: Mechanical joint per ANSI A21.11.
6) Actuators:
a) Exposed:
1. Valves 3 Inches through 6 Inches: Wrench lever manual actuator.
2. Valves 8 Inches through 20 Inches: Totally enclosed, geared, manual actuator with handwheel
b) Buried: 2-inch nut per Valve Schedule.
7) Coatings and Linings:
a) Liquid epoxy, 12 mil minimum, for valve interior and exterior. b) For potable water applications, epoxy lining shall be NSF 61 approved. d. Pressure Rating:
1) Valves 3 Inches through 12 Inches: 175 psi.
2) Valves 14 Inches through 20 Inches: 150 psi.
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. DeZurik; Style PEC.
b. Pratt; Ballcentric.
c. Milliken; Millcentric.
d. Or Equal.
2.8 HOSE VALVES
A. HSV-02: 1-1/2î Angle-Pattern Hose Valve
1. Service: Water.
2. Features:
a. Class 125 or 150 angle valve
b. Bronze body, seat and disc
c. Screwed bonnet
d. Rising stem
e. Threaded ends
3. Manufacturers and Products
a. Milwaukee, 504
b. Crane, Figure 17TF
c. Or Equal
B. HSV-03: Non-Freeze Post Hydrant, æî through 2î
1. Features:
a. Bronze Non-Freeze Post Hydrant with valve and drain hole below grade and stem extension to 30-inch high post so that hose connection is 30î above grade b. Provide NPT threaded drain hole where drawings show a piped drain. c. Cast Iron Casing Guard
d. T-handle key
e. Threaded ends, Female NPT inlet and male hose connection outlet f. Atmospheric vacuum breaker conforming to ASSE Standard 1011 and IAPMO code on æî size
Packet Pg. 858 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15200-7
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2. Manufacturers and Products
a. Jay R Smith, Figures 5910, 5911, 5912, 5913, 5914
b. Zurn, Figures Z1385, Z1390
c. Or Equal
2.9 CONTROL VALVES
A. PRV-01: Pressure Regulator, ½î to 1î
1. Service: Non-potable water, air.
2. Where PRV-01 is called out on the drawings and the service is potable water (at any point in the treatment process) than the valve shall be lead free as specified in PRV01LF
3. Type: Type: Adjustable spring-loaded, self-contained pressure regulator
4. Materials:
a. Body: Bronze
b. Trim, Valve Seat and Spring: Stainless Steel
c. Diaphragm: Laminated Metal
5. Pressures:
a. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 300 psig
b. Outlet Pressure Range: 15 to 70 psig.
6. Manufacturer/Model:
a. Watts Model 252A (1/2î and 3/4î only)
b. Cashco Model D (All Sizes)
c. Cash-Acme Model E3 (All Sizes)
d. Or Equal.
B. PRV-01LF: Lead-Free Pressure Regulator, ½î to 1î
1. Service: Potable Water
2. Type: Type: Adjustable spring-loaded, self-contained pressure regulator
3. Materials:
a. Body: Lead-Free Brass & Bronze Materials in compliance with California Health & Safety Code Section 116875. Not more than a weighted average of 0.25 percent of the wetted surface of the valve shall be lead. Valve shall be provided with a ìhang tagî or other marking that easily identifies the valve as Lead-Free. b. Trim, Valve Seat and Spring: Stainless Steel
c. Diaphragm: Reinforced Buna-N
4. Pressures:
a. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 300 psig
b. Outlet Pressure Range: 15 to 70 psig.
5. Manufacturer/Model:
a. Watts Model LF223
b. Or Equal.
C. PRV-20: Pressure Relief Valve, Water Service:
1. Service: Water.
2. Features:
a. Hydraulically-operated, pilot-controlled modulating valve b. Designed to provide pressure relief from high pressure surges c. Angle Pattern
d. ANSI B16.42 150-lb flanged ends
Packet Pg. 859 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15200-8
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
e. Y-strainer on the pilot control line
f. Valve rated pressure: 250 psi
g. Adjustable Pressure Relief Range: 20 to 200 psi
h. Provide sensing line(s) and route per manufacturerís recommendations.
3. Materials:
a. ASTM A536 ductile iron body
b. Stainless steel trim
c. Buna N Rubber Disc
d. Nylon reinforced Buna N Rubber Diaphragm
e. Stainless steel stem
4. Coatings and Linings:
a. Liquid epoxy, 12 mil minimum, for valve interior and exterior. b. For potable water applications, epoxy lining shall be NSF 61 approved.
5. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Cla-Val; Model 50-01
b. No Equal
D.
2.10 AIR RELIEF AND VACUUM VALVES
A. ARV-03: Air Release Valve, ½î to 1î
1. Service: Water.
2. Features:
a. Simple lever type
b. Automatically exhausts small amounts of entrained air that accumulates in a system
c. Once air has been exhausted, uses water pressure to close valve. In CLOSED position, seat against resilient seat to prevent water leakage. d. Rated 150 psi working pressure, orifice size by manufacturer (minimum orifice size 1/16-inch).
e. Cast iron, ductile iron, or semi-steel body, cover with stainless steel float and trim.
f. Coatings and Linings:
1) Liquid epoxy, 12 mil minimum, for valve interior and exterior. 2) For potable water applications, epoxy lining shall be NSF 61 approved.
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. APCO Valve and Primer Corp.; Model 50
b. Val-Matic Valve; Model 15A.
c. Or equal.
B. CARV-02: Combination Air Release and Vacuum Valve, Sewer Service up to 150 psi:
1. Service: Sewage.
2. Features:
a. Combines the operating features of both an air vacuum valve and air release valve, allowing to vent or re-enter system freely in either direction. b. Once air has been exhausted, uses sewer pressure to close valve. In CLOSED position, seat against resilient seat to prevent water leakage. c. Single-body type
d. Rated 150 psi working pressure, orifice size by manufacturer (minimum orifice size 1/8-inch).
Packet Pg. 860 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15200-9
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
e. Cast iron, ductile iron, or semi-steel body, cover with stainless steel float and trim.
f. 2-inch inlet, 1-inch outlet.
g. Suitable for use with sewage.
h. Provide flushing connections for maintenance.
i. Maximum Valve Height: 20-inches
j. Coatings and Linings:
1) Liquid epoxy, 12 mil minimum, for valve interior and exterior.
3. Manufacturers:
a. APCO Valve and Primer Corp.; Model 443
b. Val-Matic Valve; Model VM-801A
c. Or equal.
2.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. BFP-01: Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly:
1. Service: Water.
2. Materials:
a. Body: lead-free bronze materials or epoxy-coated cast/ductile iron. b. Test cocks: lead-free bronze
c. Ball valves: lead-free bronze
d. Valve Seats: stainless steel or Noryl
3. Features:
a. Two check valves with an independent relief valve between the valves, b. Two resilient-seated isolation gate valves or ball valves c. Test cocks, in accordance with AWWA C511
d. Rated 175 psi maximum working pressure,
e. Meets requirements of USC Foundation For Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research.
f. Ends: as required for installation as shown on Drawings g. Coatings and Linings (steel and cast iron):
1) Liquid epoxy, 12 mil minimum, for valve interior and exterior. 2) For potable water applications, epoxy lining shall be NSF 61 approved.
4. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Watts; Model LF909 (3/4î to 10î)
b. FEBCO; Model LF860 (3/4î to 10î)
c. Ames; C400 (2-1/2î to 10î)
d. Or Equal.
2.12 OPERATORS:
A. General:
1. Operator force not to exceed 40 pounds under any operating condition, including initial breakaway. Gear reduction operator when force exceeds 40 pounds.
2. Operator self-locking type or equipped with self-locking device.
3. Provide position indicator on all valves.
4. Worm and gear operators one-piece design worm-gears of gear bronze material.
Worm hardened alloy steel with thread ground and polished. Traveling nut type operators threaded steel reach rods with internally threaded bronze or ductile iron nut.
5. Valve handles, wheels, etc. to be designed to accommodate a padlock.
Packet Pg. 861 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15200-10
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Manual Operator:
1. Galvanized and painted handwheels.
2. Lever operators allowed on quarter-turn valves 8 inches and smaller.
3. Cranks on gear type operators.
4. For all valves above 5í-0î above adjacent working surface (finished floor or finished grade), provide chain wheel operator with tiebacks
5. For all exposed valves below adjacent working surface (finished floor or walkway), provide extension stem, floor stands, and other accessories to permit operation from 2í-6î above adjacent working surface.
6. For all buried valves 3î and larger, provide stem extension, valve bonnet, valve box and 2î AWWA operating nut such that operating nut is within 12î of adjacent finished grade.
a. For small-diameter buried valves, provide cross-shaped handle for operating with forked key.
C. Automatic Operators:
1. General:
a. Where indicated on the drawings and/or in the valve schedule, provide automatic operators.
b. Size operators to 1-1/2 times required operating torque. Motor stall torque not to exceed torque capacity of valve.
c. Provide stem protection for rising stem valves.
d. All automatic operated valves shall have manual override option. Manual override option shall not require any more than 40 lbs of force for valve operation.
e. Coordination of all automatic operators with the valves being operated shall be the responsibility of the valve manufacturer. Automatic operators shall be completely compatible with the valves being controlled. f. Automatic Operators shall be of the following types:
2.13 ACCESSORIES
A. T-Handled Operating Wrench:
1. One each galvanized operating wrench, 4 feet long.
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Mueller; No. A-24610.
b. Clow No.; F-2520.
c. Or Equal.
B. Cast Iron Valve Box: Designed for traffic loads, sliding type, with minimum of 6-inch ID shaft.
1. Box: Cast iron with minimum depth of 9 inches.
2. Lid: Cast iron, minimum depth 3 inches, marked WATER.
3. Extensions: Cast iron.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. A Valve Schedule has been attached to this Specification and is incorporated herein by reference. Provide valves in accordance with Valve Schedule.
Packet Pg. 862 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15200-11
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. For valves that are not referenced in Valve Schedule, provide the valve type called for on the Drawings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning:
1. Clean all mating faces of valve (threads, flange faces, etc.) prior to assembly.
2. Remove all debris from valve body prior to assembly.
3. Take extra care to clean mating faces of existing pipe and fittings which may have corrosion, dirt, debris and mineral build-up which should be removed for a proper fit.
B. Apply joint compound, lubricant, etc. as recommended by valve manufacturer for proper installation prior to installation.
C. Install valves in accordance with the following schedule and as noted on the Drawings:
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves per manufacturerís recommendations.
B. Install valves so handles operate from fully open to fully closed without encountering obstructions.
C. Install valves in location and orientation for easy access for routine operation and maintenance. Access should be such that an operator can operate the valve by reaching a handle, chain, etc. at a height between 2í-6î and 5í-0î above adjacent work surface (for buried valves, this is accomplished with a t-handle wrench and the operating nut being within 12î of finished grade).
D. Install plug valves with the seat side as indicated on the drawings. If manufacturerís recommendations differ from indicated seat direction on the drawings, or if no seat side is indicated, install plug valves with seat side as recommended by the manufacturer after obtaining approval from the ENGINEER.
3.4 TESTS AND INSPECTION
A. Valve may be either tested while testing pipelines, or as a separate step.
B. Test that valves open and close smoothly under operating pressure conditions. Test that two-way valves open and close smoothly under operating pressure conditions from both directions.
C. Inspect air release and vacuum valves as pipe is being filled to verify venting and seating is fully functional.
D. Count and record number of turns to open and close valve; account for any discrepancies with manufacturerís data.
E. Set, verify, and record set pressures for all relief and regulating valves.
Packet Pg. 863 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15200-12
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
F. Automatic valves to be tested in conjunction with control system testing. Set all opening and closing speeds, limit switches, as required or recommended by the ENGINEER.
3.5 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The following supplements are attached to this Specification section and incorporated herein by reference:
1. 15200 VS ñ Valve Schedule
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 864 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15200 VS-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 15200 VS
VALVE SCHEDULE
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. This schedule is provided for the convenience of the CONTRACTOR. Some valves may be shown on the drawings, but not listed here.
2. Valve specifications are given in Section 15200, Valves and Operators.
B. Valve Tag Number:
1. Tag numbers are as noted in the Drawings.
C. Valve Type:
1. Valve types are as described in 15200, Valves and Operators D. Valve Ends:
1. FLG ñ Flanged
2. GRV ñ Grooved End
3. LUG - Lugged
4. MJ ñ Mechanical Joint
a. Where the surrounding piping system is installed with restrained joints, MJ valves shall be installed using RMJ (restrained mechanical joint) glands per 15120, Piping Specialties.
5. SLV ñ Solvent Welded Socket
6. SLD ñ Soldered Socket
7. THR ñ Threaded
8. W ñ Wafer
E. Installation Codes
1. Ex ñ Exposed
2. Un ñ Underground
F. Valve Actuators, as described in 15200, Valves and Operators
1. HW ñ Handwheel
2. L ñ Lever
3. N ñ 2î Nut
4. Type 100 ñ Motor, Heavy-Duty ñ Open/Close
5. N/A ñ Not Applicable
Packet Pg. 865 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15200 VS-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.2 VALVE SCHEDULE
VALVE TAG
NUMBER
VALVE
TYPE ENDS DIAMETER INSTALLATION ACTUATOR NOTES
EW12_GTV_01130 GAV-10 MJ 8î Un N
EW12_GTV_01140 GAV-10 MJ 8î Un N
EW12_GTV_01150 GAV-10 MJ 8î Un N
EW12_GTV_01160 GAV-10 FLG 6î Ex HW
EW12_PRV_01160 PRV-20 FLG 6î Ex N
Angle Pattern
Set to 150 PSI
EW12_BFV_02120 BFV-10 FLG 12î Ex HW
EW12_BFV_02150 BFV-10 FLG 12î Ex HW
EW12_BFV_02170 BFV-10 FLG 4î Ex HW
EW12_CHV_02170 CKV-10 FLG 4î Ex N/A
EW12_BFV_04150 BFV-10 FLG 6î Ex HW
EW12_BFV_04160 BFV-10 FLG 6î Ex HW
EW12_RPP_04160 BFP-01 FLG 6î Ex N/A
EW12_BFV_05120 BFV-10 FLG 12î Ex HW
EW12_BFV_05130 BFV-10 FLG 12î Ex HW
EW12_GTV_06160 GAV-10 MJ 12î Un N
EW12_BFV_06180 BFV-10 FLG 6î Ex HW
EW12_PLV_06180 PLV-10 FLG 4î Ex HW
EW12_PLV_06190 PLV-10 FLG 4î Ex HW
EW12_PLV_06200 PLV-10 FLG 4î Ex HW
EW12_PLV_06210 PLV-10 FLG 4î Ex HW
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 866 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15400-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Catalog information and rough-in dimensions for plumbing fixtures, products, and specialties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Utility Sink (US-01):
1. Fixture: Enameled cast iron with stainless steel rim guard and blank back. Kohler; Model K-6718 Bannon.
2. Faucet: Chicago Faucet Co.; Model 897-CP, with hose threads, integral supply stops, vacuum breaker, pail hook, and wall brace.
3. Accessories: Kohler; Model K-6673, 3-inch trap standard with grid strainer.
B. Instant Hot Water Heater (IHWH-01):
1. Tankless, iInstantaneous electric water heater.
2. Copper heat exchanger.
3. Copper-sheathed heating elements.
4. Plastic housing.
5. Minimum flow capacity for 50-degree farenheit temperature rise: 1.5 gpm.
6. 208V/50A max.
7. Manufacturer and Model:
a. Controlled Energy CorporationBosch; Model AE9.5 PowerStar b. Or Equal.
C. Safety Shower/Eyewash (SSH)
1. Deluge Shower:
a. ABS plastic shower head.
b. Instant action, stay open, self-draining ball valve. c. Pull-rod.
d. Steel stanchion.
e. Floor flange.
f. Interconnecting piping.
2. Eyewash:
a. Aerated eye wash with stainless steel receptor.
b. Stay open, self-draining ball valve.
c. Push handle control.
d. Foot treadle control if available.
e. Plastic anti-surge eyewash heads.
f. Supply line strainer.
Packet Pg. 867 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15400-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3. Accessories:
a. Scald Protection Bleed Valve: Set to open when internal water temperature rises above 110 degrees F and close when internal temperature drops below 95 degrees F.
b. Freeze Protection Bleed Valve: Set to open when the internal water temperature drops below 35 degrees F and close when the internal water temperature rises above 45 degrees F.
c. Corrosion-resistant coating.
d. Provide flow switch alarm. Set alarm with delay timer (initially set to 20 seconds) at Plant PLC prior to sounding alarm.
4. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Haws; Model 8300 with SP157B and SP158B
b. Speakman
c. Or Equal.
2.2 DRAINAGE PRODUCTS
A. Floor Drain (FD-01):
1. Features:
a. Cast Iron body and grate
b. Heavy duty top grate, Designed for use on finished concrete floors with heavy industrial traffic loads.
c. Trap primer connection.
d. Threaded outlet designed for use with PVC drain waste and vent pipe
2. Manufacturers:
a. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Co.; Model 2120 with Speedi-Set outlet b. Or equal.
B. Floor Drain with Funnel (FD-02)
1. Features:
a. Cast Iron body and grate
b. Funnel top, 4 inch diameter and 4-1/4 inch tall, attached to grate with concealed screws
c. Trap primer connection
d. Threaded outlet designed for use with PVC drain waste and vent pipe
2. Manufacturers:
a. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Co.; Model 3510T
b. Or equal.
C. Trench Drain (TD-01)
1. Design Load Class C, Heavy Duty.
2. Width and length as shown on the Drawings.
3. Features:
a. Drain channel shall be constructed of high-density polyethylene composite, polyvinyl chloride, precast polymer concrete, fiberglass reinforced plastic, or equal material.
b. Pre-sloped: 0.6% minimum.
c. Bottom outlet, designed for use with PVC drain waste and vent pipe. d. Flat grated trench cover.
1) Material shall be cast or ductile iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel, resin composite, pultruded fiberglass, or other suitable material.
Packet Pg. 868 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15400-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2) Ferrous metals shall have corrosion resistant coating. e. Closed-end construction
f. Lap joints to connect the sectional units
4. Manufacturer and Product:
a. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Co.
b. Or Equal
D. Floor Cleanout (FCO-01):
1. Material: Tapered thread, bronze plug with round adjustable scoriated secured cast iron top. Designed for use on finished concrete floors with heavy industrial traffic loads.
2. Outlet designed for use with PVC drain waste and vent pipe
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.; Model 4111 with Speedi-Set outlet. b. Zurn; Model Z1400-HD with Neo-Loc outlet
c. Or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DETAILING
A. Contract Drawings and specifications do not detail all requirements for installation of plumbing fixtures. CONTRACTOR shall provide all required materials to provide a complete installation of all plumbing fixtures which is fully functional and compliant with all applicable codes and regulations.
3.2 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install all plumbing fixtures plumb, level and per the manufacturerís instructions.
B. Plumbing Fixtures, Mounting Heights:
1. Standard rough-in catalogued heights, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
2. Caulk fixtures in contact with finished walls with waterproof, white, non-hardening sealant which will not crack, shrink, or change color with age.
C. Fixture Trim: Install fixture trim where applicable on fixtures.
D. Plumbing Specialties:
1. Water Hammer Arresters:
a. Install PDI-certified and rated water hammer arresters, sized and located in accordance with PDI WH-201 and as shown on Drawings.
b. Install adjacent to equipment wherein quick closing valves are installed. c. Install at each emergency safety shower.
d. Concealed water hammer arresters shall have access panels or be otherwise accessible.
E. Drains and Cleanouts:
1. Install top flush with finished floor elevation.
2. Install PVC p-traps at each floor drain.
Packet Pg. 869 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15400-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3. Provide cleanouts where shown and where required by code.
F. Roof Drain Leaders:
1. Slope horizontal leaders º-inch per foot in the downstream direction. + + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 870 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15500-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 15500
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SERVICE CONDITIONS:
A. All units will be designed using the following outdoor design conditions:
Summer
Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature 103 oF
Outdoor Wet-Bulb Temperature 68 oF
Winter
Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature 26 oF
B. All units will be designed using the following indoor design conditions:
Summer
Existing Pump Station Building Indoor Dry-Bulb Temperature 71 oF New Mechanical Building Dry-Bulb Temperature 90 oF
Winter
Existing Pump Station Building Indoor Dry-Bulb Temperature 71 oF New Mechanical Building Dry-Bulb Temperature 60 oF
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. Complete specifications, descriptive drawings, catalog cuts, and descriptive literature that include make, model, dimensions, weight of equipment, horsepower, and electrical schematics for products and control system components specified.
B. Complete performance data that indicates full compliance with the Specifications.
C. Recommended procedures for protection and handling of equipment and materials prior to installation.
D. Manufacturerís standard finish color selection for cabinet finishes.
E. Operation and maintenance manuals.
1. List of recommended spare parts for equipment and materials specified.
1.3 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Furnish 2-year warranty for all equipment.
Packet Pg. 871 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15500-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PACKAGED EVAPORATIVE COOLING UNITS
A. Supply Unit Assembly:
1. Supply fan.
2. Water distribution system.
3. Recirculation pump.
4. Float valve.
5. Pads.
6. Motor and drive.
7. Make-up water metering float valve.
8. Electrical connection box.
B. Enclosure:
1. Heavy gauge galvanized steel cabinet.
2. Flush mount panels into the unit framework.
3. Furnish access panels for maintenance of fan, motor, water distribution system, and filters.
4. Furnish drain pan with drain piping for draining sump.
5. Epoxy coated or polyester resin powder paint finish.
C. Fan:
1. Centrifugal fan.
2. Forward-curved blades.
3. Fan and drive assembly mounted on grommets
4. Protection screen on fan discharge.
5. Single-phase, 3-speed motor, 230-volt.
D. Pump:
1. Single-phase motor, 115-volt
2. Integral self-resetting overload protection.
E. Pads:
1. One back pad and two side pads. Provide spare pads.
2. Rigid media design.
3. Glass fiber construction, bonded with inorganic, noncrystalline fibers.
4. PVC water distributor tubes.
F. Electrical:
1. Factory-installed wiring with single point power panel connection from unit electrical connection box to fan motor and pump motor. Panel shall include magnetic contactors and overloads for motors.
2. Factory-installed wiring from unit electrical connection box to fan motor and pump motor.
3. Factory-installed and wired disconnect switch for the fan and pump motors.
4. Provisions for accepting one 240-volt, single-phase circuit in unit electrical connection box for fan motor and pump motor.
5. Provisions for accepting two 120-volt, single-phase circuits in unit electrical connection box, one, for fan motor and pump motor.
Packet Pg. 872 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15500-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
6. Thermostat control with 6-position switch with COOLER LOW, COOLER MEDIUM, COOLER HIGH, PUMP ONLY, and OFF selections.
G. Manufacturer:
1. Champion Model DD
2. MasterCool Model AS/AD
3. Or Approved Equal
2.2 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS
A. General:
1. Heaters shall be of the draw-through air flow design.
2. Heaters shall be UL listed and meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code.
3. All heaters drawing in excess of 48 amps shall be provided with factory-installed subdivided and fused circuits of 48 amps or less.
B. Cabinet:
1. 22-gauge die formed steel.
2. Individual adjustable louvers with 30 degrees downward stops.
3. Metal surfaces shall be phosphate coated and covered with manufacturerís polyester powder coat finish.
4. Mounting brackets shall be compatible ceiling or wall swivel mounting.
5. Unit shall not project into room more than 8-inches
C. Heating Element:
1. Electric heating bank consisting of 80/20 Nichrome wire and copper clad steel sheath.
2. Aluminum fins.
3. Automatic reset thermal overheat protection shall be of the linear capillary type wired for instantaneous de-energizing in case of thermal overload.
4. Heating bank shall have protective air inlet louvers.
D. Fan:
1. Aluminum, directly connected to fan motor.
E. Motors:
1. Totally enclosed, designed for continuous heavy-duty all-angle operation and equipped with built-in thermal overload protection.
F. Controls:
1. Low voltage (24 volt) transformers.
2. Single Pole Internal Thermostat
a. Temp Range: 45 to 85 deg F
G. Space Heater Information:
SPACE HEATERS: SH-01
Location Mechanical Room
Unit Type Space Heater
Minimum Heating
Capacity
3.0 kW
Air Delivery Rate 350 CFM
Packet Pg. 873 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15500-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
Electrical
Requirements
480V/3PH
Manufacturer/Model 1. Heating Unit:
a. Berko HUHAA348-PRO
b. Or Equal
2. Thermostat:
a. HUHTA-1
b. Or Equal
2.3 FIXED LOUVERS
A. Furnish heavy gauge fixed blade louvers where shown and with the dimensions and shapes shown on Drawings. Louvers shall be designed for intake and exhaust while providing maximum resistance to water penetration due to wind-driven rain.
B. Fixed Louver Construction:
1. Louver shall be constructed from extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T5.
2. Louver shall be 4 inches thick.
3. Frame and blades shall be 0.081" thick.
4. Louver shall be shaped and dimensioned as shown on the drawings.
5. Install aluminum louver screen on interior side of the louver.
6. Finish: Kynar 500 fluorocarbon coating, dark brown color, or equal.
C. Fixed Louver Design:
1. Free Area: Minimum 52% net free area. Provide AMCA test data to show a 4'x 4' unit with a minimum of 8.4-square feet free area.
2. Pressure Loss: AMCA certified rating of no greater than 0.10-inch WC at 750 fpm.
3. Provide louver supports designed to carry 25 psf wind load.
4. Louvers to be designed for air flow in either direction.
5. Louvers to provide protection from water penetration due to wind-driven rain. Provide test results, per AMCA standard 511, which show that the louver being provided has the following performance characteristics:
a. 99% effectiveness at preventing water penetration of 0.01 oz of water per square foot of louver free area at 690 fpm free area velocity.
D. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Greenheck ESJ-401
2. Or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment and systems in accordance with manufacturersí instructions.
B. Evaporative Coolers:
1. Provide clearances in accordance with manufacturerís instructions.
2. Pipe drain pan connection as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Locate units to provide access spaces required for filter changing; motor, drive, and bearing servicing; and fan shaft removal.
4. Lubricate nonsealed bearings prior to startup.
Packet Pg. 874 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15500-5
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Seismic Restraints:
a. Use lateral and vertical motion limiters described in the latest edition of SMACNA ìGuidelines For Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems.î b. Restraint Snubbers: Rubber-faced, securely anchored to the structure, and installed with sufficient clearance so that unit isolators are not restricted for proper free isolation, but do limit movement in all directions.
c. Restrain as described in the latest edition of ASHRAE ìHVAC Applications,î chapter on Seismic Restrain Design.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 875 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15500-
6 City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 876 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15990-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 15990
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - SUBMITTALS
1.1 TESTING PLAN
A. Testing Plan: Submit prior to testing and include at least the information that follows. a. Testing dates.
b. Piping systems and section(s) to be tested.
c. Test type.
d. Method of isolation.
e. Calculation of maximum allowable leakage for piping section(s) to be tested.
2. Certifications of Calibration: Testing equipment.
3. Certified Test Report.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 NOTIFICATION
A. Notify ENGINEER in writing 5 days in advance of testing. Perform testing in presence of ENGINEER.
3.2 PRESSURE TESTING
A. General:
1. Complete installation of piping system, including all thrust restraint, prior to pressure testing.
a. If thrust blocking is specified, wait 5 days minimum after concrete thrust blocking is installed to perform pressure tests. If high-early strength cement is used for thrust blocking, wait may be reduced to 2 days.
2. Prior to test, remove and replace with pipe spools or suitably isolate appurtenant instruments or devices that could be damaged by pressure testing.
3. New Piping Connected to Existing Piping: Isolate new piping with grooved-end pipe caps, spectacle blinds, blind flanges, or as acceptable to ENGINEER.
4. Piping to be Pressure Tested and Test Pressure: as indicated on Piping Schedule.
B. Testing with Water:
1. Fluid: Clean, potable water.
2. Pipeline Protection:
a. Maximum Filling Velocity: 0.25 foot per second, applied over full area of pipe. b. Vent piping during filling. Open vents at high points of piping system or loosen flanges, using at least four bolts, or use equipment vents to purge air pockets.
3. Exposed Piping:
a. Perform testing on insulated piping prior to application of insulation Packet Pg. 877 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15990-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
b. Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 60 minutes, minimum, and for such additional time as necessary to conduct examinations for leakage. c. Examine joints and connections for leakage.
1) Correct visible leakage and retest as specified.
2) Empty pipe of water prior to final cleaning or disinfection.
4. Buried Piping:
a. Test after backfilling has been completed.
b. Expel air from piping system during filling.
c. Apply and maintain specified test pressure with hydraulic force pump. Valve off piping system when test pressure is reached.
d. Maintain hydrostatic test pressure continuously for 2 hours minimum, reopening isolation valve only as necessary to restore test pressure. e. Determine actual leakage by measuring quantity of water necessary to maintain specified test pressure for duration of test.
f. Maximum Allowable Leakage:
where:
L = Allowable leakage, in gallons per hour.
S = Length of pipe tested, in feet.
D= Nominal diameter of pipe, in inches.
P = Test pressure during leakage test, in pounds per square inch. g. Correct leakage greater than allowable, and retest as specified.
3.3 PIPE PRESSURE TESTING LOG
A. All pressure tests shall be witnessed by ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall keep a pipe pressure testing log to document the pressure testing and ENGINEERís approval of such.
1. Specific details of the contents and format pipe pressure testing log shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the ENGINEER.
2. At a minimum, pipe pressure testing log shall record, on a daily basis for any day when pipe pressure testing is performed:
a. Test Report Documentation:
1) Test date.
2) Description and identification of piping tested.
3) Test fluid.
4) Test pressure.
5) Remarks, including:
a) Leaks (type, location).
b) Repair/replacement performed to remedy excessive leakage.
3. Pipe pressure testing log shall be kept on-site. Pipe pressure testing log shall be signed on a daily basis, for any day when pipe pressure testing log work is performed, by the supervisor of the CONTRACTORís field crew and by the ENGINEER.
4. Any piping system which was pressure testing, but which was not recorded in the pipe pressure testing log shall be re-tested at the ENGINEERís discretion. + + END OF SECTION + +
200,133
D(PS )
=L
2/1
Packet Pg. 878 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15995-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 15995
DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Plan describing and illustrating conformance to appropriate AWWA standards and this Specification.
2. Procedure and plan for cleaning system.
3. Procedures and plans for disinfection and testing.
4. Proposed locations within system where Samples will be taken.
5. Type of disinfecting solution and method of preparation.
6. Certification that employees working with concentrated chlorine solutions or gas have received appropriate safety training.
7. Method of disposal for highly chlorinated disinfecting water.
8. Independent Testing Agency: Certification that testing agency is qualified to perform bacteriological testing in accordance with AWWA standards, agency requirements, and this Specification.
9. Certified Bacteriological Test Results:
a. Facility tested is free from coliform bacteria contamination. b. Forward results directly to ENGINEER.
1.2 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Independent Testing Agency: Certified in the State of California with 10 yearsí experience in field of water sampling and testing. Agency shall use calibrated testing instruments and equipment, and documented standard procedures for performing specified testing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER FOR DISINFECTION
A. Clean, uncontaminated, and potable.
B. CONTRACTOR shall make arrangements for water supply and convey water in disinfected pipelines or containers.
2.2 CONTRACTORíS EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish chemicals and equipment, such as pumps and hoses, to accomplish disinfection.
B. Water used to fill pipeline may be supplied using a temporary connection to existing distribution system. Provide protection against cross-connections as required by AWWA C651.
Packet Pg. 879 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15995-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.3 WELL CAPPING PLATE
A. Minimum 1/4-inch thick steel plate with 1-inch threaded plug installed in approximate center of plate
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Conform to AWWA C651 for pipes and pipelines, C652 for tanks and reservoirs, C653 for water treatment plants and filters, and C654 for wells, except as modified in these Specifications.
B. Disinfect the following items installed or modified under this Project, intended to hold, transport, or otherwise contact potable water:
1. Pumps.
2. Tanks.
3. Wells.
4. Filters.
5. Pipelines: Disinfect new pipelines that connect to existing pipelines up to point of connection.
C. Disinfect surfaces of materials that will contact finished water, both during and following construction, using one of the methods described in AWWA C652 and C653.
Disinfect prior to contact with finished water. Take care to avoid recontamination following disinfection.
D. Prior to application of disinfectants, clean pump, tank, filters, and pipelines of loose and suspended material.
E. Allow freshwater and disinfectant solution to flow into pipe or vessel at a measured rate so chlorine-water solution is at specified strength. Do not place concentrated liquid commercial disinfectant in pipeline or other facilities to be disinfected before it is filled with water.
3.2 PIPING
A. Cleaning:
1. Before disinfecting, clean all foreign matter from pipe in accordance with AWWA C651.
B. If the continuous feed method or the slug method of disinfection, as described in AWWA C651 are used, flush pipelines with potable water until clear of suspended solids and color. Provide hoses, temporary pipes, ditches, and other conduits as needed to dispose of flushing water without damage to adjacent properties.
C. Flush service connections and hydrants. Flush distribution lines prior to flushing hydrants and service connections. Operate valves during flushing process at least twice during each flush.
D. Flush pipe through flushing branches and remove branches after flushing is completed.
Packet Pg. 880 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15995-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
E. Disinfecting Procedure: In accordance with AWWA C651, unless herein modified.
3.3 PUMPS
A. Disinfecting Solutions: Minimum free chlorine concentration of 100 ppm.
B. Application:
1. Inject disinfecting solution into pump and associated piping and circulate for a minimum 3-hour period of time. At end of 3-hour period, solution shall have a strength of at least 50 ppm free chlorine.
2. Operate valves and pump appurtenances during disinfection to ensure that disinfecting solution is dispersed into all parts of pump and lines.
3. If disinfecting solution contained in pump has a residual free chlorine concentration less than 50 ppm after the 3-hour retention period, reclean pump, reapply disinfecting solution, and retest until a satisfactory test result is obtained.
4. After chlorination, flush water from pump until water through the unit is chemically and bacteriologically equal to permanent source of supply.
3.4 TANKS
A. Cleaning:
1. Clean interior surfaces using water under pressure before sterilizing. Isolate tanks from system to prevent contaminating materials from entering the distribution system. Cleaning shall:
a. Remove all deposits of foreign nature.
b. Remove all biological growths.
c. Clean the slopes, walls, top, and bottom.
d. Avoid damage to the structure.
e. Avoid pollution or oil deposits by workers and equipment.
2. Dispose of water used in cleaning in accordance with applicable regulations before adding disinfecting solution to tank.
B. Disinfecting Procedure: In accordance with AWWA C652, unless herein modified. Parts of structures, such as ceilings or overflows that cannot be immersed, shall be spray or brush disinfected.
3.5 FILTERS
A. Disinfection Procedure: In accordance with AWWA C653, unless herein modified.
B. Disinfect the following components: Greensand Filter system, including, but not limited to: vessel interior, interior piping, and exterior filter face piping.
C. Clean other new facilities designed to hold or transport process water prior to disinfection of filter system including but not limited to: raw water piping, rapid mixer, backwash waste piping, surface wash piping, and finished water piping.
3.6 WELLS
A. Disinfection Procedures: In accordance with AWWA C654, unless herein modified.
Packet Pg. 881 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15995-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1. After well has been completed and tested, it shall be cleaned of all foreign substances. Swab the inner lining using alkalies, if necessary, to remove oil, grease, or other extraneous matter.
2. Use chlorine solution of a volume and strength so that a concentration of at least 50 ppm of free chlorine is contained in well.
3. Chlorine solution shall be poured into well and well surged for at least 5 minutes.
After 4 hours, well shall be pumped or bailed until chlorine concentration is less than 5 ppm.
4. Tack weld capping plate to casing after well has been disinfected and pumped out.
5. Take care to prevent the entrance into well of dirt or other contamination while installing pump.
6. Before being placed into the well, thoroughly wash pump bowl, column, and air line, first with clear water and then with chlorinated solution in accordance with AWWA C654.
7. Chlorinate well in accordance with AWWA C654 and applicable State standards. In case of a discrepancy between AWWA and State standard, the strictest requirement shall apply.
3.7 DISPOSAL OF HEAVILY CHLORINATED WATER
A. Do not allow flow into a waterway without neutralizing disinfectant residual.
B. See the appendix of AWWA C651, C652, C653, and C654 for acceptable neutralization methods.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 882 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16000-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 16000
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. All work and installation provided under this contract shall comply with the NEC, 2011 edition.
B. Refer to NECA 1, latest edition as a minimum baseline of quality and workmanship for installing electrical products and systems for this contract. The Standard defines what is meant by ìneat and workmanlikeî as required by the NEC Section 110.12. Specified requirements and Owner Standards supersede NECA practices in cases of conflicts.
C. All materials and equipment provided under this contract shall be new and free from any defects.
D. Hazardous areas and classifications shall be as shown on the drawings per definitions in NFPA 820, latest edition.
E. The Contractor shall retain an independent InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA) member Engineering and Testing Firm (Testing Firm) for specified on-site acceptance testing of the project electrical power distribution system and utilization equipment.
F. The Contractor shall test motors, conductors, and dry transformers as specified and shown.
G. Related Sections:
1. Section 16050 - Forms
2. Section 16060 ñ Grounding and Bonding
3. Section 16073 ñ Hangers and Supports
4. Section 16075 ñ Electrical Identification
5. Section 16120 ñ Conductors and Cable
6. Section 16123 ñ Control and Communication Cables
7. Section 16130 ñ Raceways and Boxes
8. Section 16135 ñ Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes
9. Section 16136 ñ Underground Ductbanks
10. Section 16140 ñ Wiring Devices
11. Section 16269 ñ VFD 600V
12. Section 16442 ñ Panelboard
13. Section 16443 ñ Motor Control Center
14. Section 16461 ñ Low Voltage Dry Type Transformer
15. Section 16500 Lighting Fixtures
Packet Pg. 883 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16000-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.2 REFERENCES
A. InterNational Electrical Testing Associationís (NETA):
1. NETA - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (ATS).
2. NETA - Maintenance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (MTS).
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 70 ñ National Electrical Code (NEC).
2. NFPA 820 ñ Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities.
C. National Electrical Contractorís Association (NECA):
1. NECA 1 ñ Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting.
2. SUBMITTALS
D. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
E. Testing Firm Qualifications: The Contractor shall receive approval of the proposed Testing Firm and their project team prior to the Pre-Test Submittals. Submit the following for review.
1. Project Team: Identify lead technical person and testing staff. Provide documentation of training and experience demonstrating compliance with the qualifications specified.
2. Testing Firm: Provide reference names and current phone numbers of the Owner, Contractor, Engineer, or Construction Manager that has knowledge of the Firmís work:
a. Three projects for Owner completed within the past four years, or b. Provide references for five recent projects that were completed within the last four years. Provide a description of the scope of the referenced project.
F. Product Data:
1. Test Firm Pre-Test Submittal:
a. Description or samples of specified test procedures. b. Sample test report forms for the specified tests.
c. List of items to be tested, tests to be performed, and time durations for tests.
2. Contractor Pre-Test Submittal:
a. Pre-Functional test procedures and testing schedule. b. Functional test procedures and testing schedule.
3. Contractor Post-Test Submittal: Completed Specification Test Forms. a. Wire and Cable Resistance.
b. Installed Motor.
c. Dry Transformer.
d. Loop Wiring and Insulation Resistance.
4. Test Firm Post-Test Submittal:
a. Test Reports for each item including:
1) Description.
2) Identification number.
Packet Pg. 884 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16000-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3) Nameplate data.
4) Electrical equipment settings.
5) Time and date of test.
6) Ambient conditions at time of test.
7) Inspection checklist and results.
8) Test results.
9) Test equipment used with manufacturer, model number, and calibration date. 10) Remarks about test procedures, results, and suggestions. 11) Name and signature of testing personnel.
12) Name and signature of test witness.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Testing Firm shall be an independent testing organization providing unbiased testing authority, professionally independent of the manufacturer, suppliers, and installers of equipment or systems to be evaluated by the Testing Firm.
B. Testing Firm shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment, devices, installations, and systems.
C. Testing Firm shall be a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA), a NETA Associate Member company providing testing in accordance with NETA ATS published specifications.
D. Testing Firm's lead technical person shall be currently certified by NETA or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) in electrical power distribution systems testing.
E. Testing Firm's technicians shall be regularly employed, qualified testing staff.
1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Section 01100 - Summary: Requirements for sequencing.
B. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for scheduling.
C. Schedule work to ensure completion of testing prior to energizing equipment.
D. The Contractor shall submit a schedule for the Testing Firm work and notify the Construction Manager 30 days prior to commencement of any witnessed testing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
Packet Pg. 885 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16000-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The manufacturer of the electrical equipment supplied for the project shall complete their onsite factory inspection, testing, and setup prior to the Testing Firmís testing and Protective Device setting work. The power monitors shall be set up by the factory representatives and power monitor readings and settings verified by the Testing Firm.
B. Contractor shall provide the labor, tools, material, including quality power sources required by the Testing Firm equipment, and other services necessary to provide specified tests and retesting.
C. The test equipment, instruments and devices used for testing shall be calibrated to test equipment standards with references traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology. The test equipment, instruments and devices shall have current calibration stickers indicating date of calibration, deviation from standard, name of calibration laboratory and technician, and date of next recalibration
D. The required tests, including correction of defects where found, and subsequent retesting, shall be completed prior to functional testing. The installation of the protective device, breaker, and relay settings shall be completed and verified.
3.2 TESTING FIRM REQUIREMENTS
A. Testing shall not commence until the pre-test submittals are approved.
B. Acceptance testing procedures and test results shall be as specified in NETA ATS. The following types of equipment and systems shall be inspected and tested by the Testing Firm. Refer to the electrical drawings for location and identification of the electrical distribution system equipment, utilization equipment, and electrical conductors, included but not limited to:
1. Switchgear and Switchboard Assemblies.
2. Transformers Dry-Type Air-Cooled.
3. Cables Low-Voltage 600 Volt Maximum.
4. Circuit Breakers Low-Voltage, 100A frame and larger.
5. Protective Relays.
6. Instrument Transformers.
7. Metering, include non-utility power metering equipment.
8. Grounding Systems include installed grounding systems and existing grounding systems that are being utilized.
9. Motors.
10. Motor Starters Low-Voltage.
11. Adjustable Speed Drive Systems.
12. Surge Protection Devices, include lightning arresters, surge capacitors, and TVSS.
13. Engine Generators.
14. Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS).
Packet Pg. 886 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16000-5
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.3 CONTRACTOR TESTING
A. Testing shall not commence until the pre-test submittals are approved.
B. Insulation resistance measurements shall be made on conductors and electrical equipment that will carry current. Where not specified, the minimum acceptable values of insulation resistance shall be in accordance with the applicable NETA-ATS, ICEA, NEMA, or ANSI standards for the equipment or material being tested. A megohmmeter shall be used for insulation resistance measurements.
1. Conductor and cable phase-to-ground insulation resistance shall be measured for circuits 120 volts and above except lighting circuits. Measurements may be made with motors and other load equipment connected. Insulation with resistance of less than 10 megohms is not acceptable.
2. The Installed Motor Test Form shall be completed for each motor after installation. All motors shall have their insulation resistance measured before they are connected. Motors 50 HP and larger shall have their insulation resistance measured at the time of delivery and again when they are connected. Insulation resistance values less than 10 megohms are not acceptable.
3. Transformers, panelboards, and other power distribution equipment shall have their insulation resistance measured phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground. Insulation resistance values less than 10 megohms are not acceptable.
4. Signal conductors and shield drain shall be tested for insulation resistance with the other conductors in the cable grounded. Each shield drain conductor shall be tested for continuity. Instruments used for continuity measurements shall have a resolution of 0.1 ohms and an accuracy of better than 0.1 percent of reading plus 0.3 ohms. A 500-volt or 1000-volt meg-ohmmeter shall be used for insulation resistance measurements as appropriate.
C. Verify that motors are connected to rotate in the correct direction with the load disconnected.
Verification may be accomplished by momentarily energizing the motor, provided the Contractor confirms that neither the motor nor the driven equipment will be damaged by reverse operation.
D. Motor running current shall be measured on each phase with the motor operating under load.
Current imbalance shall be less than 5-percent difference between phases. During the functional test period below, obtain baseline operating data on all equipment with motors greater than 1 horsepower. The baseline data shall be recorded on the test form.
E. Test receptacles and power outlets using a device to verify polarity, grounding, and the correct wiring connections.
F. Prior to energizing equipment, perform a pre-functional checkout of the power and the control circuits.
1. Protective devices shall be installed and available for service and calibrated or adjusted with specified setpoints installed. Contractor selected initial setpoints shall be installed and recorded, when specified setpoints are not required from the manufacturer or the Engineer.
Packet Pg. 887 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16000-6
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2. Pre-functional checkout shall consist of energizing each control circuit and operating each control device, protective device, monitoring or alarm device, and each interlock and verify the specified action or response occurs.
G. Perform a functional checkout of all electrical and instrumentation control equipment.
Individual items of equipment and systems may be started and operated under simulated operating conditions to determine as nearly as possible whether the equipment and systems meet the requirements of these specifications. If available, [plant effluent][potable water] may be employed for the testing of all liquid systems except gaseous, oil, or chemical systems.
Test media for these systems shall either be the intended fluid or a compatible substitute. The equipment shall be operated a sufficient period of time to determine machine operating characteristics, including noise, temperatures and vibration; to observe performance characteristics; and to permit initial adjustment of operating controls. When testing requires the availability of auxiliary systems such as looped piping, electrical power, compressed air, control air, or instrumentation which have not yet been placed in service, the Contractor shall provide acceptable substitute sources, capable of meeting the requirements of the machine, device, or system. Disposal methods for test media shall be subject to review by the Construction Manager.
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 888 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16050-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 16050
REFERENCE FORMS
Form No. Title
16000-A Wire and Cable Resistance Test Data Form
16000-B Installed Motor Test Data Form
16000-C Dry Transformer Test Data Form
17000-A Loop Wiring and Insulation Resistance Test Data Form Packet Pg. 889 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16050-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
16000-A. WIRE AND CABLE RESISTANCE TEST DATA FORM:
Wire or Cable No.: Temperature, oF
Location of Test
Insulation
resistance,
megohms
1. 2.
3. 4.
5. 6.
7 .
CERTIFIED Date
Contractor's Representative
WITNESSED Date
Owner's Representative
Packet Pg. 890 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16050-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
16000-B. INSTALLED MOTOR TEST FORM:
Motor Equipment Number Date of test
Equipment Driven
MCC Location
Ambient
temp
oF
Resistance:
Insulation resistance phase-to-ground megohms:
Phase A Phase B Phase C
Current at Full Load:
Phase Current, amps
Phase Current, amps
Phase Current, amps
Thermal Overload
Device:
Manufacturer/catalo
g #
Amperes
Circuit breaker (MCP) setting:
Motor Nameplate Markings:
Mfr Mfr
Model
Frame HP
Volts Phase RPM Service
factor**
Amps Freq Ambient temp rating ºC
Time rating Design
letter**
(NEMA 1-10.35) (NEMA MG-1.16)
Code letter Insulation
class
**Required for 3-phase squirrel cage induction motors only.
CERTIFIED Date
Contractor's Representative
WITNESSED Date
Owner's Representative
Packet Pg. 891 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16050-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
16000-C. DRY TRANSFORMER TEST DATA FORM:
(Note: Use Data Form for dry type transformers with voltage rating of 600 Vac or less and sizes to 167 kVA single phase and 500 kVA three phase. Use NETA Test Forms and Test Procedures for higher voltages and larger transformers.) Equipment Tag No.: Temperature Rating: __
Description/Location: Feeder size/Source:
Primary Voltage: ______ Secondary Voltage: _____ Winding Connection:
__________________
A. VISUAL INSPECTION
Transformer Inspection Pass Fail Note
1. Nameplate data as specified
2. Mechanical condition
a. Free of dents and scratches
b. Anchored properly
c. Shipping brackets removed
d. Spacing from wall per nameplate
3. Grounding *
a. a. Equipment grounding
b. b. System grounding
B. INSULATION-RESISTANCE TESTS:
Perform tests with calibrated megohmeter. Apply 1000 Vdc test voltage for 60 seconds and record readings in megohms at 30-seconds and 60-seconds intervals.
Test Group Resistance
between
30-second
reading
60-second
reading
Absorption Ratio
Index
60-sec. / 30-sec.
A GRD
B GRD Primary Winding
to ground C GRD
a GRD
b GRD
Secondary Winding
to ground with * N-G
Bond removed c GRD
A a
B b
Primary Winding to
Secondary Winding C c
Submit resistance readings to the Construction Manager immediately after the tests that are less than the manufacturer's recommended value or less than 10-megohms. Record the Absorption Ratio Index values for future reference. Ratio must be 1.0 or greater, with infinity (∞) equal to 1.0.
Packet Pg. 892 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16050-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
Contractor Representative Certified: ____________________________ Date Owner Representative Witnessed: ____________ Date
Packet Pg. 893 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16050-6
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
17000-A. LOOP WIRING AND INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST DATA FORM:
Loop No.:
List all wiring associated with a loop in table below. Make applicable measurements as indicated after disconnecting wiring.
Continuity
Resistance a Insulation Resistanceb
Wire
No.
Panel
Tie
Field
TB
Cond./
Cond.
Cond./
Shield
Shield/
Gnd.
Shield/
Cond.
Cond./
Gnd.
Shield/
Shield
A -- (A/SH)
B (A/B) --
C (A/C) --
D (A/D) --
etc.
NOTES:
a. Continuity Test. Connect ohmmeter leads between wires A and B and jumper opposite ends together. Record resistance in table. Repeat procedure between A and C, A and D, etc. Any deviation of +2 ohms between any reading and the average of a particular run indicates a poor conductor, and corrective action shall be taken before continuing with the loop test. b. Insulation Test. Connect one end of a 500 volt megger to the panel ground bus and the other sequentially to each completely disconnected wire and shield. Test the insulation resistance and record each reading.
CERTIFIED Date
Contractor's Representative
WITNESSED Date
Owner's Representative
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 894 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16060-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 16060
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment plus the following special applications:
1. Overhead-lines grounding.
2. Underground distribution grounding.
3. Common ground bonding with lightning protection system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:
1. Test wells.
2. Ground rods.
3. Ground rings.
4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
Packet Pg. 895 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16060-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
C. Bare Grounding Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles:
1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper.
2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding. If wood, use pressure-treated fir or cypress or cedar.
D. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches in cross section, unless otherwise indicated; with insulators.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts.
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.
2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad 3/4 inch by10 feet in diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG minimum.
1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.
2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as part of duct-bank installation.
C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.
Packet Pg. 896 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16060-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.2 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.
B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor.
If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.
C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.
D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches from the foundation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:
1. Feeders and branch circuits.
2. Lighting circuits.
3. Receptacle circuits.
4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
6. Flexible raceway runs.
7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
Packet Pg. 897 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16060-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
D. Metal and Wood Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.
C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any.
D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole.
1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwise indicated.
Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.
E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
F. Bonding and Grounding for Fencing: For fencing around substations or electrical gear provide listed bonding connectors on each fence post. Connect to area ground grid with minimum #4/0 SDBC grounding conductors. Provide flexible, listed bonding straps across all hinges on all fence gates. Measure resistance to ground using fall-of-potential method and provide Owner with certified test results.
Packet Pg. 898 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16060-5
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
G. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
H. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Exothermically bond ground grid to building steel at locations shown on the drawings.
I. Ground Ring: Install a grounding ring around building or steel structures as shown on the drawings.
1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps to building steel.
2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches from building foundation.
J. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, using a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG.
1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation.
2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. c. Resistance of all grounding conductors must be measured and documented in OHMS.
Grounding electrode resistance must also be measured and documented in OHMS.
Provide this documentation to the Owner after installation. All work must be in accordance with MSHA requirements.
Packet Pg. 899 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16060-6
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
4. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.
5. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.
D. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. ++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 900 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16073-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 16073
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.
2. Division 16 Section ìRaceways and Boxesî
3. Division 16 Section ìCable Trayî
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.
B. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with ìVendor Drawing and Data Requirementsî B. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel slotted support systems.
2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
Packet Pg. 901 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16073-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel and Stainless Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factoryfabricated components for field assembly.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.
b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
g. Wesanco, Inc.
h. Engineer approved equal
2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA4.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.
4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least 1 surface.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.
b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited.
d. Seasafe, Inc.
e. Engineer approved equal.
2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items.
3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles except metal items may be stainless steel.
4. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.
C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
Packet Pg. 902 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16073-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1) Hilti Inc.
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 5) Engineer approved equal.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
6) Engineer approved equal.
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with section requirements for steel shapes and plates.
Packet Pg. 903 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16073-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Provide support material as indicated on Drawings or as follows:
1. Galvanized steel for outdoor or indoor locations not subject to wet or corrosive atmospheres.
2. 316 stainless steel in wet or corrosive locations
3. Fiberglass in corrosive locations where stainless steel is not acceptable.
4. Coordinate with Engineer prior to supply or installation of hangers and supports.
B. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 3/8 inch in diameter.
D. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.
Packet Pg. 904 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16073-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
7. Spring tension style clamps are prohibited for use.
8. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
9. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements for site-fabricated metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified for Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 905 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16073-
6 City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 906 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16075-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Identification for raceway and metal-clad cable.
2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable.
3. Underground-line warning tape.
4. Warning labels and signs.
5. Instruction signs.
6. Equipment identification labels.
7. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.
C. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
Packet Pg. 907 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16075-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAY AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Color for Printed Legend:
1. Power Circuits: Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable.
C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
2.2 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape.
1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.
2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line.
2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.
D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.
Packet Pg. 908 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16075-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES "
2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.
2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting.
White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb minimum.
3. Temperature Range: In accordance with Specification 07517-1000
4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Raceways and Duct Banks More Than 600 V Concealed within Buildings: 4-inch- wide black stripes on 10-inch centers over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- high black letters on 20-inch centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:
1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
Packet Pg. 909 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16075-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables More Than 600 V: Identify with "DANGERHIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters at least 2 inches high, with self-adhesive vinyl labels.
Repeat legend at 10-foot maximum intervals.
C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors No.1/0 AWG and larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use colorcoding conductor tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above.
D. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
E. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install undergroundline warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
F. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.
G. Instruction Signs:
1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
H. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system.
Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.
Packet Pg. 910 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16075-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label 4 inches high. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.
b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Electrical switchboards.
d. Transformers.
e. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
f. Motor starters.
g. Push-button stations.
h. Power transfer equipment.
i. Contactors.
j. Battery inverter units.
k. Battery racks.
l. Power-generating units.
m. Monitoring and control equipment.
n. Uninterruptible power supply equipment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Attach non-adhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate.
F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.
Packet Pg. 911 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16075-6
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
G. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.
1. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
c. Phase C: Blue.
2. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Brown.
b. Phase B: Orange.
c. Phase C: Yellow.
3. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding.
Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade.
Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 912 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16120-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less
2. Power feeder cable rated 600 V.
3. Control cable rated 600 V.
4. Instrumentation cable rated 600V.
5. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
6. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.
B. Related Sections including the following:
1. No related sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. In accordance with ìVendor Data Requirementsî form (attached)
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading
1. All cable and cable reels shall be adequately crated or protected, including export packing where required, to prevent damage in handling, transit, and storage at the site.
2. Reels shall be supplied with continuous lengths as specified on the requisition.
However, reel weights shall be kept at two (2) tons below 250 MCM for ease of handling and five (5) tons for 250 MCM and above.
3. Each reel shall have a securely attached metal tag stamped with the following information:
a. P.O. number.
b. Vendor name and contact information
c. Size, number of conductors, voltage, and length of cable on the reel.
Packet Pg. 913 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16120-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
4. When wound on the reel, cables are to be permanently marked with distance from the end so as to allow the field to ascertain the amount of cable remaining on a reel. Distance markers are to be no more than one meter apart.
5. Transmit to Owner or Ownerís Representative the shipping lists and delivery dates prior to the day the reels leave the shop. Transmittal receipt must be confirmed by Owner or Ownerís Representative prior to shipping equipment.
6. Each shipping piece shall be clearly marked with 2 to 3 inch high contrasting numbers and/or letters, giving tag number as called out on detail drawing. Piece marking shall be with a non-erasable marker.
7. In addition to the piece marking, a standard 3 inch by 5 inch red shipping tag shall be wired to each shipping lot. This tag shall state the range of tag and mark numbers, Vendorís name and address, owner or Ownerís Representativeís name, jobsite address and Purchase Order number.
B. Tagging
1. Each piece of equipment and loose accessory shall be tagged with a 316 stainless steel metal tag as described below and securely affixed to the equipment by pins or non-corroding metal screws.
2. Tagging information shall include the Ownerís Purchase Order Number, P.O. Item Number, Ownerís Equipment Number, Vendorís Name, Vendorís Model Number, Vendorís Shop Order Number, and Voltage stamped on the tag. Letters and numbers must be at least 1/8î (.125 inches) high.
C. Acceptance At Site
1. Inspect for visible and hidden damage and immediately notify Owner and Shipper of damage. Return to manufacturer for repair or replacement without compromising the construction schedule.
D. Storage and Protection
1. Store and protect equipment in accordance with manufacturerís recommendations.
At a minimum, protect equipment from water, excess heat or cold, and construction dirt and debris.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
Packet Pg. 914 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16120-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.
2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
3. General Cable Corporation.
4. Senator Wire & Cable Company.
5. Southwire Company
6. The Okonite Company
7. Engineer approved equal.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF CABLES
A. Conductors shall be Class B, stranded, soft drawn copper. Use of aluminum conductors is prohibited.
B. Conductors shall be stranded copper complying with NEMA WC 70 and ASTM B-3 or B8.
C. Conductors AWG size 8 and smaller shall have THWN insulation.
D. Conductors AWG size 6 and larger shall have XHHW-2 insulation E. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN, XHHW, and SO.
F. The insulation type shall be cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene unless otherwise noted.
G. Cables shall be flame retardant and shall meet the requirements of IEEE 383 for power cables and UL FR-1 for control and building wire.
H. Cable jackets shall be resistant to oils, acids and alkalis and shall be sunlight resistant.
I. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for armored cable (Type AC), metalclad cable (Type MC), power and control tray cable (Type TC), nonmetallic-sheathed cable (Type NM), and Type SO.
2.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Each conductor shall be identified by color coding or by surface printing.
B. Each conductor shall be marked with the voltage, type letters, Vendor's name and size as required by the NEC.
Packet Pg. 915 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16120-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. The outer jacket of multi-conductor cables shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of the NEC Articles 310 and 336.
2.4 600 VOLT POWER AND CONTROL CABLES ñ SINGLE CONDUCTOR A. Cable will be used for feeders to motors, welding receptacles, transformers and other process equipment and for control applications.
B. Cables shall be approved for installation in wet or dry locations, indoors or outdoors, in raceways, underground ducts, cable trays, or lashed to a messenger for aerial installation in accordance with the requirements of the NEC.
C. Each conductor shall be covered with a homogeneous layer of chemically cross-linked polyethylene insulation meeting or exceeding all requirements of ICEA S-95-658, NEMA WC-70, and UL Standards.
D. The insulation shall be suitable for use at normal operating conductor temperature of 90ºC in wet or dry locations, 130ºC emergency overload rating, and 250ºC short circuit rating.
2.5 600 VOLT POWER AND CONTROL CABLES ñ MULTI-CONDUCTOR A. Cable will be used for feeders to motors, welding receptacles, transformers and other process equipment and for control applications.
B. Product: Okonite-FMR Okoseal (70) Type TC-ER Cable or approved equal.
C. Cables shall be Type TC-ER permitted for use on power, lighting, control, and signal circuits; approved for installation in wet or dry locations, indoors or outdoors, in cable trays, raceways, underground ducts, direct burial in the ground, or where supported in outdoor locations by a messenger wire; for Class 1 circuits as permitted in Article 725 of the NEC; and in cable trays in Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations in industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and supervision assure that only qualified persons will service the installation.
D. Conductors: Bare, soft annealed copper per ASTM B-3, Class B stranded per ASTM B8. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller tin coated per ASTM B-33. Sizes #8 AWG and larger bare copper. UL rated VW-1.
E. Conductor Insulation: Enhanced ethylene-propylene rubber suitable for use at normal operating conductor temperature of 90ºC in wet or dry locations, 130ºC emergency overload rating, and 250ºC short circuit rating.
F. Overall Jacket: Mechanically rugged PVC with excellent resistance to most chemicals.
G. Assembly: Cabled in accordance with UL 1277 using fillers, as necessary, with a cable tape overall.
Packet Pg. 916 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16120-5
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.6 INSTRUMENTATION CABLE
A. The cables will be used to transmit low voltage instrumentation signals between field devices and control panels.
B. Single or multi-pair, single or multi-triad, each pair/triad individually shielded, 600 Volts, 90ºC Dry/75ºC Wet rating Type ìTCî for installation in cable tray, conduit, or raceways.
C. Conductors: Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, 7-strand concentric per ASTM B-8.
D. Individual conductor insulation: PVC 15 mils nominal thickness.
E. Overall jacket: PVC and provided with ripcord.
F. Multi-pair/triad cables shall identify individual pairs/triads with color coding or numbering.
2.7 600 VOLT BUILDING WIRE
A. Conductors intended for use within office, warehouse, or residential areas to provide power to lighting, receptacles, and normal building loads.
B. Conductors size AWG #10 and larger shall be stranded, soft drawn copper, type THHN.
C. Conductors size AWG #14 and #12 used for lighting and receptacle wiring may be solid conductor, copper, type THHN.
2.8 600 VOLT TYPE ìMCî POWER, CONTROL, AND INSTRUMENT CABLES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. General Cable TECK 90 ñ Spec 8025 for AWG #14 control cables.
2. General Cable TECK 90 ñ Spec 8050 for AWG #12 control cables.
3. General Cable TECK 90 ñ Spec 8150 for 3-phase power feeder and branch circuit cables.
4. Engineer approved equal.
B. Specifications above apply in addition to the following:
1. Furnished with bare overall grounding conductor.
2. Furnished with an impervious, continuous, welded, corrugated aluminum sheath protecting conductors from moisture, liquids and gasses and possessing excellent mechanical strength.
3. Furnished with low temperature PVC jacket. Jacket color for 600 control and power cables shall be black while instrumentation cable shall be gray.
4. Control cables shall be multi-conductor AWG #14 or AWG #12 as specified in the ìConstruction Documentsî
5. Power cables shall have three phase conductors and a ground sized in accordance with NEC requirements.
Packet Pg. 917 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16120-6
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Connectors
1. Use only connectors specifically designed and listed for use with TECK 90 or type ìMCî cables and properly sized for the cable overall diameter. Connectors to provide ground path continuity by engaging the metallic sheath and are to provide a waterproof seal when installed in accordance with manufacturerís recommendations. Submit connector information to Owner and Engineer prior to start of construction.
D. Suitable for use in wet and dry locations and for installation in conduits, duct banks, cable tray, direct burial in the ground, and aerial support in accordance with the requirements of the NEC.
2.9 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.
5. Tyco Electronics Corp.
6. Engineer approved equal
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.
2.10 SLEEVES FOR CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or
0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders and branch circuits: Copper. Stranded for all sizes.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: in accordance with project drawings.
B. Exposed and concealed feeders and branch circuits: single conductors or multiconductor cable in raceway.
Packet Pg. 918 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16120-7
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."
F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
B. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
C. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.
D. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
F. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
Packet Pg. 919 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16120-8
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
G. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.
Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Compare cable data with drawings and specifications
2. Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage and correct connection in accordance with wiring diagrams.
3. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:
a. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
b. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torquewrench. c. Perform thermographic survey.
C. Electrical Tests:
1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with low-resistance ohmmeter.
2. For all single- and three-conductor cables AWG #6 and larger, perform insulationresistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors.
Applied potential shall be 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable.
3. Perform continuity tests to insure correct cable connection.
D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.
E. Remove and replace faulty cables and retest as specified above. ++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 920 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16123-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 16123
CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. UTP cabling.
2. 62.5/125-micrometer, multimode optical fiber cabling.
3. RS-232 cabling.
4. RS-485 cabling.
5. Low-voltage control cabling.
6. Control-circuit conductors.
7. Identification products.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails.
B. Channel Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a one-piece, ventilated-bottom or solid-bottom channel section.
C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
D. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
E. Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails connected by individual transverse members (rungs).
F. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.
G. Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between the studs of a wall cavity).
H. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
I. Solid-Bottom or Nonventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of integral or separate longitudinal side rails, and a bottom without ventilation openings.
Packet Pg. 921 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16123-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
J. Trough or Ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of integral or separate longitudinal rails and a bottom having openings sufficient for the passage of air and using 75 percent or less of the plan area of the surface to support cables.
K. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following:
1. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.
2. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.
3. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.
4. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's rating for tray and its support elements.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.
D. Source quality-control reports.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Maintenance Data: For wire and cable to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise onsite testing.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.
1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical fiber flashlight or optical loss test set.
Packet Pg. 922 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16123-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2. Test optical fiber cable on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; include the loss value of each.
Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.
3. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP and optical fiber cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PATHWAYS
A. Support of Open Cabling: NRTL labeled for support of Category 5e cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable.
1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.
2. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings.
3. Straps and other devices.
B. Cable Trays:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. Cable Management Solutions, Inc.
b. Cablofil Inc.
c. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
d. Cope - Tyco/Allied Tube & Conduit.
e. GS Metals Corp.
2. Cable Tray Materials: Metal, suitable for indoors and protected against corrosion by electroplated zinc galvanizing, complying with ASTM B 633, Type 1, not less than 0.000472 inch (0.012 mm) thick.
a. Basket Cable Trays: 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 2 inches (50 mm) deep. Wire mesh spacing shall not exceed 2 by 4 inches (50 by 100 mm).
b. Trough or Ventilated Cable Trays: Nominally 6 inches (150 mm) wide. c. Ladder Cable Trays: Nominally 18 inches (455 mm) wide, and a rung spacing of 12 inches (305 mm).
d. Channel Cable Trays: One-piece construction, nominally 4 inches (100 mm) wide. Slot spacing shall not exceed 4-1/2 inches (115 mm) o.c.
e. Solid-Bottom or Nonventilated Cable Trays: One-piece construction, nominally 12 inches (305 mm) wide. Provide with solid covers.
C. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes.î
1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 3 inches (75 mm) high, and 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) deep.
Packet Pg. 923 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16123-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.2 BACKBOARDS
A. Description: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches (19 by 1220 by 2440 mm).
Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
2.3 UTP CABLE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division.
2. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company.
3. CommScope, Inc.
4. Draka USA.
5. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.
6. KRONE Incorporated.
7. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT.
8. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.
9. Superior Essex Inc.
10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand.
11. 3M.
12. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.
B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP.
1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.
2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications.
3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 5e.
4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:
a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or Type CMG. b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP or Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR; complying with UL 1666. d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX.
e. Multipurpose: Type MP or Type MPG.
f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR, complying with UL 1666.
2.4 UTP CABLE HARDWARE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.
2. Dynacom Corporation.
3. Hubbell Premise Wiring.
4. KRONE Incorporated.
5. Leviton Voice & Data Division.
6. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.
7. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies.
8. Panduit Corp.
Packet Pg. 924 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16123-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
9. Siemon Co. (The).
10. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.
B. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher.
C. Connecting Blocks: 110 style for Category 5e. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare; integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.
2.5 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE
A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.
1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.
B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.
C. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.
1. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductors.
2. PVC insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. PVC jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.
D. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.
1. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductors.
2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.
3. Unshielded.
4. Plastic jacket.
5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.
2.6 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, complying with UL 83.
B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, complying with UL 83.
C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or Type TF, complying with UL 83.
Packet Pg. 925 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16123-6
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.7 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Brady Corporation.
2. HellermannTyton.
3. Kroy LLC.
4. Panduit Corp.
B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
C. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." D. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
E. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.
F. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
G. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
H. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.
I. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
J. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS
A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A-7.
B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.
C. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes" for installation of conduits and wireways.
D. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.
E. Pathway Installation in Equipment Rooms:
1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is installed or in the corner of room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room.
2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.
3. Secure conduits to backboard if entering room from overhead.
4. Extend conduits 3 inches (75 mm) above finished floor.
Packet Pg. 926 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16123-7
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system.
F. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch (2440-mm) dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. General Requirements for Cabling:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."
3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels.
4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.
7. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.
8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.
C. UTP Cable Installation:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
2. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.
3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.
D. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors:
1. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."
E. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.
2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches (1525 mm) apart.
3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.
F. Separation from EMI Sources:
Packet Pg. 927 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16123-8
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.
2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (305 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (600 mm).
3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (305 mm).
4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches (75 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger:
A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).
6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).
3.3 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables.
3.4 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:
1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No 14 AWG.
2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG.
3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits, No 12 AWG.
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."
Packet Pg. 928 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16123-9
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
3.6 GROUNDING
A. For data communication wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.
B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.
3. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not after cross connection.
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
4. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:
1) Multimode Link Measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in one direction according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper.
2) Attenuation test results for links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
Packet Pg. 929 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16123-10
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
D. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.
E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 930 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16130-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B. Related Sections including the following:
1. No related sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.
C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
G. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.
H. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
I. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Custom enclosures and cabinets.
2. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following:
a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. b. Frame and cover design.
Packet Pg. 931 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16130-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
c. Grounding details.
d. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons. e. Joint details.
C. Source quality-control test reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Alflex Inc.
3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
5. Electri-Flex Co.
6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
7. Maverick Tube Corporation.
8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.
9. Wheatland Tube Company.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1
C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5
D. IMC: ANSI C80.6
E. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.
1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.
2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.
F. EMT: ANSI C80.3.
G. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
H. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
I. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:
NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed
Packet Pg. 932 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16130-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1. Fittings for EMT: Steel or compression type.
2. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
J. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity
2.2 RIGID METAL CONDUIT ñ PVC COATED
A. Available Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:
1. Robroy Industries, Conduit Division
B. Material Brands: Subject to compliance with requirements, material brands that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:
1. Plasti-Bond RedH2OT
2. Perma Cote (Green)
3. Kor Kap (Grey)
C. UL Listed.
D. Exterior coating: Grey PVC, 40 mils thick.
E. The PVC coating must have been investigated by UL as providing the primary corrosion protection for the rigid metal conduit. Ferrous fittings for general service locations must be UL Listed with PVC as the primary corrosion protection. Hazardous location fittings, prior to PVC coating, must be UL listed. All PVC coated conduit, fittings, and accessories must be new, unused material. Applicable UL standards may include:
1. UL 6 Standard for Safety, Rigid Metal Conduit
2. UL 514B Standard for Safety, fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes F. ETL Verified to the Intertek ETL SEMKO High Temperature H2O PVC Coating Adhesion Test Procedure for 200 hours. Each stick of conduit to be furnished with the ETL Verified PVC-001 label to signify compliance to the adhesion performance standard.
G. The bond between the PVC coating and the conduit surface shall be greater than the tensile strength of the coating. This bond shall be verified by testing described in NEMA Standard RN1, section 3.8 H. Hot dip galvanized inside and out with hot galvanized threads.
I. A PVC sealing sleeve extending one pipe diameter or two inches, whichever is less, shall be formed at every female fitting opening, except unions. The inside sealing sleeve diameter shall be matched to the outside diameter of the conduit.
J. The PVC coating on the outside of conduit couplings shall be 40 mils in thickness and have a series of raised longitudinal ribs to protect the coating from tool damage during installation.
Packet Pg. 933 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16130-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
K. Form 8 condulets, ½î through 2î diameters, shall have a tongue-in-groove, V-Seal gasket to effectively seal against the elements. The design shall be equipped with a positive placement feature to ease and assure proper installation. Certified results confirming seal performance at 15 psig (positive) and 25 inches of mercury (vacuum) for 72 hours shall be available.
L. Form 8 condulets shall be supplied with plastic encapsulated stainless steel cover screws.
M. A urethane coating shall be uniformly and consistently applied to the interior of all conduit and fittings. This internal coating shall be nominal 2-mil thickness. Conduit or fittings having pinholes or areas with thin or no coating shall be unacceptable.
N. The PVC exterior and urethane interior coatings applied ot the conduit shall afford sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking at temperatures above 30 degrees F.
O. All factory cut threads on conduit, elbows, nipples, and fittings shall be protected by application of a urethane coating.
P. Right angle beam clamps and U bolts shall be specially formed and sized to snugly fit the outside diameter of the PVC coated conduit. All U bolts will be supplied with plastic encapsulated nuts that cover the exposed portions of the threads.
Q. Installation of the PVC coated conduit system shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturerís installation manual. To assure correct installation, the installer shall be certified by the PVC coated conduit manufacturer before the installation begins.
R. All PVC coated conduit, fittings, and accessories shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.
2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
3. Arnco Corporation.
4. CANTEX Inc.
5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
6. Condux International, Inc.
7. ElecSYS, Inc.
8. Electri-Flex Co.
9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
11. RACO; a Hubbell Company.
12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
B. ENT: NEMA TC 13.
Packet Pg. 934 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16130-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.
D. LFNC: UL 1660.
E. Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
F. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.
2.4 OPTICAL FIBER/COMMUNICATIONS CABLE RACEWAY AND FITTINGS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Arnco Corporation.
2. Endot Industries Inc.
3. IPEX Inc.
4. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
C. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible type, approved for general-use installation.
2.5 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2. Hoffman.
3. Square D; Schneider Electric.
B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, 12, 3R, 4, or 4X depending upon the location.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
D. Wireway Covers: Flanged-and-gasketed type.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.6 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Hoffman.
2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
Packet Pg. 935 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16130-6
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners..
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
2.7 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
3. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
4. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.
B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Butler Manufacturing Company; Walker Division.
b. Enduro Systems, Inc.; Composite Products Division.
c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division. d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
e. Panduit Corp.
f. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.
2.8 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
2. EGS/Appleton Electric.
3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
4. Hoffman.
5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.
6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.
7. RACO; a Hubbell Company.
8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.
9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.
10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
Packet Pg. 936 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16130-7
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized with gasketed cover.
G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.
H. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
2.9 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.
1. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray.
2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure.
4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC."
6. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.
B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Armorcast Products Company.
3. Carson Industries LLC.
4. CDR Systems Corporation.
5. NewBasis.
Packet Pg. 937 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16130-8
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.10 VAULTS FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND DUCT BANKS
A. Description: Pre-cast concrete structures for underground power, control and communications duct banks.
1. Structure: Reinforced concrete, 6000 psi compressive strength at 28 days.
2. Wheel loading: Based on AASHTO H15 or H20 loadings as indicated.
3. Reinforcing steel: Per ASTM A615 Grade 60 or ASTM A706 Grade 60 and ACI Standards.
4. Frame and cover: Single or dual leaf torsion hinged steel door and frame for vault depth less than 84 inches (2133 mm). Cast iron cover, frame and grade ring for depths 84 inches (2133 mm) and greater.
5. Knockouts: Segmented non-reinforced duct entrance knockouts on all four faces.
6. Sump: 12 inch (305 mm) x 12 inch (305 mm) x 2 inch(51 mm) deep.
7. Cable Racks: Horizontal galvanized steel insert on all walls for vault depths to 84 inches (2133 mm). Vertical galvanized steel insert on 24 inch (609 mm) centers on all walls for vault depths 84 inches (2133 mm) or greater..
8. Cable hooks: galvanized steel.
9. Ground Wells: Two 6 inch (152 mm) wells on diagonal corners in floor slab.
10. Pulling irons: Galvanized cast-in-place pulling iron opposite each segmented knockout.
11. Lifting hooks: Galvanized cast-in-place, minimum two per structural section.
12. Ladders: For vault depths 84 inches (2133 mm) or greater, galvanized cast-in-place ladder rungs conforming to OSHA Standards installed centered on and adjacent to vault entrance.
13. Extensions: Structurally equivalent to vault, height as required to meet site grading conditions and depths detailed.
14. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Oldcastle Precast, Inc.
b. Christy Concrete Products, Inc.
c. Utility Vault Company
d. Concrete Building Supply, Inc.
e. Weiser Concrete, Inc.
2.11 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS
A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138- inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.
2.12 SLEEVES SEALS
A. Not anticipated for this project.
Packet Pg. 938 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16130-9
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES
A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.
1. Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency.
2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.
3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit.
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.
4. Where installed in wet and corrosive environments: PVC coated steel.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
6. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 4.
7. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground in wet and corrosive locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X.
8. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring:
a. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.
b. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer-concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.
c. Handholes and Pull Boxes Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglassreinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf vertical loading.
B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit
3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes raceways in the following locations:
4. Self contained electrical rooms.
5. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
6. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
7. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
8. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers Vertical Shafts: EMT Packet Pg. 939 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16130-10
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel in damp, wet, or corrosive locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: æ - inch trade size
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Support raceways in accordance with requirements of manufacturers and the National Electrical Code."
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. Riser from below ground PVC to above ground is to be rigid steel conduit wrapped to prevent corrosion
F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings
3. Change from Type EPC-40-PVC to rigid steel conduit before rising above the floor.
H. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
Packet Pg. 940 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16130-11
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
K. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:
1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet.
2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.
3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Direct-Buried Conduit ñ Non concrete encased:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit.
2. Install clean, screened, native backfill and compact.
3. After installing conduit, install clean, screened, native backfill and compact. Make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction.
4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed fro this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete
b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation.
Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
5. Install warning tape the entire length of each duct. Install separate warning tape for each duct where differing systems are grouped together.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES, BOXES, AND VAULTS A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.
C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND DUCT BANKS
A. Excavating: Graded and compact the entire length of trench to provide uniform bearing and support. Material not suitable or required for backfilling shall be removed. Any water accumulated in trenches shall be removed by pumping or other approved method before grading or conduit installation.
Packet Pg. 941 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16130-12
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Raceway: RNC installed in concrete encasement.
1. All conduit elbows shall be large sweeps.
2. Conduit risers and stub-ups shall be rigid galvanized steel.
3. Conduit entering vaults shall terminate in end bells.
4. Install conduit with a minimum grade of 6 inches per 100 feet in the direction toward the nearest underground structure or in the direction indicated. The top of the concrete envelope shall the nominal depth indicated and be maintained a minimum of 24 inches below grade or finished pavement
5. Spacing blocks between ducts shall be pre-formed interlocking PVC spacers. Install the bottom layer of conduit on saddle type spacers.
6. Inspect conduits prior to installation for flaws or debris which may damage cable insulation. Ends of conduits shall be plugged during installation to prevent the entrance of water and other debris. After installation and encasement check conduits to insure that no debris has entered or remains.
7. Joints in conduits shall be staggered at least 6 inches.
C. Encasement:
1. Where indicated on drawings, underground conduit shall be encased in steel reinforced concrete. Provide reinforcing bar perpendicular and horizontal to the conduits and securely tie together to form a rigid cage. Bar size and spacing shall prevent cracks or settling in the concrete from shearing the conduits.
2. Provide a minimum of 3 inches of encasement on top, bottom and both sides. Concrete envelopes which go through a concrete wall, slab, etc., shall be poured monolithically with the wall, slab, etc.
3. The top of each duct bank shall be colored with red oxide while the concrete is still wet.
C.K. Williams & Co. RD-3097, red oxide or approved equal shall be used. The top of each duct bank shall be a distinct red color after installation
4. Each duct bank shall contain a #4/0 SDBC ground wire. The ground wire shall be laid in the bottom of the trench and encased with concrete. This ground wire shall be exothermically welded to the ground grid at each end and to the ground rod in each vault.
D. Backfilling
1. The trenches shall not be backfilled before the concrete has set.
2. Blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement and large boulders shall not be used as backfill material.
3. The trenches shall be carefully backfilled with excavated materials approved for backfilling such as earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel or other approved materials free from large clods of earth or stones, thoroughly and carefully compacted to 90 percent compaction per ASTM D1557.
4. Any trenches improperly backfilled or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened by the Contractor to the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled and compacted with the surface restored to the required grade and compaction.
5. Install warning tape the entire length of each duct. Install separate warning tape for each duct where differing systems are grouped together.
3.6 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
Packet Pg. 942 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16130-13
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
C. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:
1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
E. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
F. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
G. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
H. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.7 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.
B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.8 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 943 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16130-14
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 944 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16135-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 16135
OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide boxes, as follows:
1. Provide outlet boxes for mounting wiring devices and lighting fixtures.
2. Provide junction or pull boxes in runs containing more than three 90 degree bends, runs exceeding 200 feet, where shown on the Drawings and where required to conform with the National Electrical Code.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified:
1. NEC Article 370, Outlet, Switch and Junction Boxes, and Fittings.
2. UL Standard No. 50, Electrical Cabinets and Boxes.
3. UL Standard No. 514, Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings.
4. UL Standard No. 886, Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous Locations.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. Product Data: Submit, for approval, product data for all materials covered herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Outlet Boxes: PVC Coated where required per these specifications and Section 16050. Cast gray iron alloy, or cast malleable iron, with zinc electroplate finish in damp, wet or exterior locations and zinc-coated sheet steel in dry locations. Provide boxes of one of the following:
1. Crouse-Hinds Company.
2. Appleton Electric Company.
3. Bowers.
4. Or equal.
B. Pull and Junction Boxes:
1. Material and Construction:
a. Cast gray iron alloy with hot-dip galvanized finish or cast malleable iron bodies and covers.
b. Neoprene gaskets. Gaskets shall be of an approved type designed for the purpose. Improvised gaskets are not acceptable.
c. Stainless steel cover screws.
d. External mounting lugs.
e. Drilled and tapped conduit holes.
Packet Pg. 945 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16135-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
f. Boxes where conduits enter a building below grade shall have 1/4-inch drain hole.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide pull and junction boxes of one of the following:
a. Appleton Electric Company.
b. O-Z/Gedney Company.
c. Hoffman.
d. Or equal.
3. Large boxes not generally available in cast construction may be fabricated of copper-free aluminum alloy or Type 316 stainless steel as required by location.
4. Boxes for installation in areas classified as hazardous locations shall be explosion proof and shall comply with UL 886.
5. For flush-mounted pullboxes in exterior slabs or pavement and where indicated in interior slabs, provide vehicular traffic-bearing covers.
6. Junction boxes and pullboxes embedded in concrete slabs shall be cast iron.
Junction boxes and pullboxes located in wet, or outdoor areas shall be NEMA 3R or NEMA 4. Junction boxes and pullboxes located in corrosive locations shall be NEMA 4X, Type 316 stainless steel. All other areas shall be NEMA 12.
7. PVC Coated where required per these specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount boxes so that sufficient access and working space is provided.
B. Securely fasten boxes to walls, other structural surfaces or slabs on or in which they are mounted. Provide independent galvanized steel supports where no walls or other structural surface exists.
C. For units mounted on masonry or concrete walls, provide suitable 1/2-inch spacers to prevent mounting back of box directly against wall.
D. Where sizes are not indicated, size junction and pull boxes in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code.
E. Provide terminal blocks in junction boxes where cable terminations or splices are required.
F. Leave no open conduit holes in boxes. Close unused openings with capped bushings.
G. Label each circuit in boxes and identify with durable tag. ++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 946 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16136-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 16136
UNDERGROUND DUCT BANKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide underground duct banks where shown and where required. Duct bank routing on the Drawings is diagrammatic. Coordinate installation with piping and other underground systems and structures and locate clear of interferences.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 02300, Earthwork.
2. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement.
3. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
4. Section 16130, Raceways and Boxes.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the National Electrical Code and National Electrical Safety Code.
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval typical cross-sections and Layouts showing the proposed routing of duct banks.
B. Record Drawings: Include the actual routing of underground duct bank runs on Record Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Backfill: Select backfill in accordance with Section 02300, Earthwork.
B. Reinforcement: In accordance with Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement.
C. Concrete: In accordance with Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
D. Duct: Schedule 40 PVC conduit and fittings in accordance with Section 16130, Raceways and Boxes.
Packet Pg. 947 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16136-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Make duct bank installations and penetrations through foundation walls watertight.
B. Top of duct banks shall be a minimum of 24-inches below grade, unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER.
C. Assemble duct banks using non-magnetic saddles, spacers and separators. Position separators to provide 3-inch minimum concrete separation between the outer surfaces of the ducts.
D. Provide a 3-inch minimum concrete covering on both sides, top and bottom of concrete envelopes around conduits. Add red dye to concrete mix for easy identification during subsequent excavation.
E. Firmly fix ducts in place during pouring of concrete. Carefully spade and vibrate the concrete to ensure filling of all spaces between ducts.
F. Make bends with sweeps of not less than 48-inch radius or 5-degree angle couplings.
G. Make a transition from non-metallic to PVC Coated rigid steel conduit where duct banks enter structures or turn upward for continuation above grade. Continue ducts inside buildings with PVC Coated rigid steel conduit where required per the area classification.
H. Reinforce all duct banks. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, reinforce with No. 4 longitudinal steel bars placed at each corner and along each face at a maximum parallel spacing of 18-inches on centers, and No. 3 tie-bars transversely placed at 18-inch maximum longitudinal intervals. Maintain a minimum clearance of 2-inch from bars to the edge of the concrete encasement.
I. Where ducts enter structures such as manholes, handholes, pullboxes, transformer and switchgear compartments, or buildings, terminate the ducts in suitable end bells, insulated bushings or couplings on steel conduits.
J. Do not backfill with material containing large rock, paving materials, cinders, large or sharply angular substances, corrosive material or other materials which can damage or contribute to corrosion of ducts or cables or prevent adequate compaction of fill.
K. Slope duct runs for drainage toward manholes and away from buildings with a slope of approximately 3-inches per 100 feet.
L. Install a 2/0 bare stranded copper duct bank ground in each duct bank envelope. Make ground electrically continuous throughout the entire duct bank system and connect to switchboard ground buses and to steel conduit extensions of the underground duct system.
M. After completion of the duct bank and prior to pulling cable, pull a mandrel, not less than 12-inches long and with a cross section approximately 1/4-inch less than the inside cross section of the duct, through each duct. Then pull a rag swab or sponge through to make certain that no particles of earth, sand or gravel have been left in the duct.
Packet Pg. 948 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16136-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
N. Install a warning ribbon approximately 12-inches below finished grade over all underground duct banks carrying cables of 480 volts and higher. The identifying ribbon shall be a PVC tape, 3-inches wide, yellow color, permanently imprinted with "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW" in black letters.
O.
P. Reused Existing Ducts:
1. Pull rag swab through duct to remove water and to clean duct prior to installing new cable.
2. Repeat swabbing until all foreign material is removed.
3. Pull mandrel through duct, if necessary, to remove obstructions.
Q. No more than 270 degrees of bends allowed in a continuous run of conduit. ++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 949 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16136-
4 City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 950 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16140-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
2. Twist-locking receptacles.
3. Wall-box motion sensors.
4. Isolated-ground receptacles.
5. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.
6. Solid-state fan speed controls.
7. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.
8. Communications outlets.
9. Pendant cord-connector devices.
10. Cord and plug sets.
11. Floor service outlets, service poles, and multi-outlet assemblies.
12. NEMA rated pushbuttons, selector switches, and operators for industrial plant use.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling" for workstation outlets.
2. Division 16 Section ìConductors and Cablesî
3. Division 16 Section ìRaceways and Boxesî
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
Packet Pg. 951 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16140-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described in subparagraphs below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Service/Power Poles: One for every 10, but no fewer than one.
2. Floor Service Outlet Assemblies: One for every 10, but no fewer than one.
3. Poke-Through, Fire-Rated Closure Plugs: One for every ten floor service outlets installed, but no fewer than one.
4. NEMA rated selector switches, pushbuttons, lights intended for industrial plant operation: 5 (five) each of every type supplied.
5. Industrial signaling equipment including strobes and warning horns: one for every ten but no fewer than one.
6. Welding receptacles: one for every twenty provided but no less than one.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
Packet Pg. 952 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16140-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex).
b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex).
c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).
B. Hospital-Grade, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498 Supplement SD.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cooper; 8300 (duplex).
b. Hubbell; HBL8310 (single), HBL8300H (duplex).
c. Leviton; 8310 (single), 8300 (duplex).
d. Pass & Seymour; 9301-HG (single), 9300-HG (duplex).
C. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Hubbell; CR 5253IG.
b. Leviton; 5362-IG.
c. Pass & Seymour; IG6300.
2. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap.
Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.
2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description: Straight blade, both feed and non feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cooper; GF20.
b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.
2.4 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES
A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Packet Pg. 953 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16140-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
a. Cooper; L520R.
b. Hubbell; HBL2310.
c. Leviton; 2310.
d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.
B. Isolated-Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Hubbell; IG2310.
b. Leviton; 2310-IG.
2. Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.
Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.
2.5 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES
A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector; NEMA WD 6 configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade.
1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip.
2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.
2.6 CORD AND PLUG SETS
A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.
1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with greeninsulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent.
2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.
2.7 SNAP SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four way). c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4 (four way).
Packet Pg. 954 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16140-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V.
b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V.
c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V.
d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V.
2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON." D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cooper; 2221L.
b. Hubbell; HBL1221L.
c. Leviton; 1221-2L.
d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.
2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.
E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cooper; 1995.
b. Hubbell; HBL1557.
c. Leviton; 1257.
d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.
F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cooper; 1995L.
b. Hubbell; HBL1557L.
c. Leviton; 1257L.
d. Pass & Seymour; 1251L.
2.8 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS
A. Telephone Outlet:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cooper; 3560-6.
b. Leviton; 40649.
2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568- B.1; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.
B. Combination TV and Telephone Outlet:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Packet Pg. 955 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16140-6
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
a. Cooper; 3562.
b. Leviton; 40595.
2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e; and one Type F coaxial cable connector.
2.9 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch thick, satin-finished stainless steel.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations."
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant , die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
2.10 FINISHES
A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.
3. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.
Packet Pg. 956 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16140-7
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
Packet Pg. 957 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16140-8
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems.
Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 958 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 16269
VFD 600V
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the design, manufacturing, testing, and delivery to the jobsite of metal enclosed, Variable Frequency Controller (VFD or drive), complete with accessories and all auxiliary equipment needed to accomplish the functions required by this specification.
B. This specification shall cover Variable Frequency Controllers for 460V loads.
C. Related Sections
1. 10000 Project Standards and Site Conditions
2. 16075 Electrical Identification
3. 16120 Conductors and Cables
4. 16130 Raceways and Boxes
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The drive shall comply with the following:
1. National Electric Manufactures Association (NEMA) Safety standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of Variable Frequency Controller Systems
2. National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70
3. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
4. IEC 146 International Electrical Code
5. ISO 9001
6. UL 508 Qualifications
7. IEEE Standard 519
8. Additional standards as listed in project specification 1000 ìPROJECT STANDARDS AND SITE CONDITIONSî
1.3 DEFINITIONS
Section not used.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The drives will be Manufacturers standard design, suitable for heavy duty industrial use and for the intended service. They will be installed in an industrial facility operating 24 hours a day 7 days a week.
Packet Pg. 959 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Regulations: This specification requires compliance with all laws and regulations which may be applicable including the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), as well as rules, regulations, and standards of the Secretary of Labor.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal literature, drawings, and documentation shall be clear, legible, and written in English. Failure to comply will result in rejection of submittal.
B. Product brochures must be sufficiently detailed so that an engineering evaluation may be completed on the suitability and part number of the equipment.
C. Submit details of the manufacturing quality assurance/quality control program and any QA/QC certifications.
D. Receipt by Owner or Ownerís Representative of all test and calibration submittals is a condition for final payment of the purchase order.
E. Submit written certification that all assembly, fabrication, and manufacturing has been performed in accordance with manufacturerís written QA/QC policy and standards. Receipt of this submittal is a condition for final payment of the purchase order.
F. Submit cost for the services of a factory trained technician or engineer to assist in startup and commissioning. Pricing shall include hourly or daily rate, estimated travel and per diem costs, and minimum number of days recommended for this service.
G. Note any exceptions to this Specification.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the production of these drives and shall have in place a quality assurance program to be applied during the preparation and fabrication of the instruments.
B. After Sales Support
1. Qualified support shall be available either directly from the manufacturing facility or from a network of factory-trained distributors and certified service centers located throughout North America and Canada.
C. Drive manufacturing facility shall be an ISO9001 certified manufacturing facility.
D. Assembly shop to be UL-508 certified.
Packet Pg. 960 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
E. Regulatory Requirements
1. Instruments shall have a UL listing and are marked and labeled in accordance with applicable codes and standards. If manufacturerís equipment is approved by a recognized testing laboratory other than UL, then the manufacturer shall provide a letter from the local authority having jurisdiction stating that such testing is acceptable to them.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading
B. All equipment shall be adequately crated or protected, including export packing where required to prevent damage in handling, transit, and storage at the site.
C. Each item, piece, or subassembly of equipment shall have a securely attached metal tag stamped with the tag number. All crates and boxes shall be stenciled with the tag number. Tags and stencils shall be in a conspicuous place and readable.
D. Transmit to Owner or Ownerís Representative the shipping lists and delivery dates prior to the day the equipment leaves the shop. Transmittal receipt must be confirmed by Owner or Ownerís Representative prior to shipping equipment.
E. Each shipping piece shall be clearly marked with 2 to 3 inch high contrasting numbers and/or letters, giving tag number as called out on detail drawing. Piece marking shall be with a non-erasable marker.
F. In addition to the piece marking, a standard 3 inch by 5 inch red shipping tag shall be wired to each shipping lot. This tag shall state the range of tag and mark numbers, Vendorís name and address, owner or Ownerís Representativeís name, jobsite address and Purchase Order number.
1.8 TAGGING
A. Each piece of equipment and loose accessory shall be tagged with a 316 stainless steel metal tag as described below and securely affixed to the equipment by pins or noncorroding metal screws.
B. Tagging information shall include the Ownerís Purchase Order Number, P.O. Item Number, Ownerís Equipment Number, Vendorís Name, Vendorís Model Number, Vendorís Shop Order Number, and Voltage stamped on the tag. Letters and numbers must be at least 1/8î (.125 inches) high.
1.9 ACCEPTANCE AT SITE
A. Inspect for visible and hidden damage and immediately notify Owner and Shipper of damage. Return to manufacturer for repair or replacement without compromising the construction schedule.
Packet Pg. 961 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.10 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store and protect equipment in accordance with manufacturerís recommendations. At a minimum, protect equipment from water, excess heat or cold, and construction dirt and debris.
B. Environmental Requirements
1. In accordance with specification 01000 ìPROJECT STANDARDS AND SITE CONDITIONSî
2. Drive will be located within an environmentally conditioned electrical control room.
Location is moderately dusty.
1.11 SEQUENCING
Section not used.
1.12 SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate shipping schedules as per priorities with the Owner or the Ownerís Representative.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. The warranty period for the equipment specified herein shall be a minimum one (1) year from the date of commercial operation at Owner's facility or eighteen (18) months from the date of delivery, whichever comes first. Vendor shall retain originals of all test reports through the duration of the equipment warranty period
1.14 SYSTEM STARTUP
Section not used.
1.15 OWNERíS INSTRUCTIONS
Section not used.
1.16 COMMISSIONING
Section not used.
1.17 MAINTENANCE
Section not used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Yaskawa GA800 with DI-101 DI Option Kit, SI-EN3 Ethernet/IP Kit and UUX001955 Remote Keypad Kit, no equal.
Packet Pg. 962 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-5
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.2 GENERAL
A. This specification covers AC adjustable frequency drives for industrial applications.
B. The manufacturer shall not have less than fifteen years of experience in the manufacture of AFDís.
C. The drives shall be manufactured in the United States.
D. All components will be accessible from the cabinet door for service. Drive(s) must be designed for side-by-side, back-to-back, or against the wall installation.
E. Drive harmonics are to be meet the requirements of IEEE 519 at the point of common coupling. If drive by itself will not comply with IEEE 519, furnish line reactors or harmonic filters to achieve compliance.
F. The unit shall be NEMA type 1, freestanding metal enclosed control cabinet with hinged front access doors, filtered ventilation system (if required) and containing main circuit breaker, static power conversion equipment, by-pass contactors with overloads, and all necessary controls, protection and metering, mounted, wired and tested, including at least the following:
1. Input disconnect switch, externally operated, with current limiting fuses for inverter.
Provide mechanical interlocks with enclosure door.
2. 115 Volt grounded AC control circuit.
a. Operator controls as shown on the schematic diagram which may include the following:
b. A speed control potentiometer
c. Hand/Off/Remote Selector Switch
d. Emergency Stop Pushbutton
G. Furnish each unit with a nameplate of laminated black and white plastic with beveled edges, with letters engraved through the white finish top lamination, exposing black interior lamination, containing the following information:
1. Unit Number
2. Shop Order Number
3. Horsepower
4. Short Circuit Rating
5. Date Manufactured
6. Drawing Number(s)
2.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Input Power
1. The drive main input power shall be three phase 230 ñ 480VAC 50/60 Hz
2. The drive shall have a voltage tolerance of +/-10% for all 200V and 400V drives. The voltage tolerance for 600V drives twenty horsepower and above shall be +/-10% and +5/-10 for 600V product below 20 Hp.
3. Input frequency tolerance shall be +/-5% for all ratings.
Packet Pg. 963 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-6
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
4. The efficiency of the drive shall be a minimum of 97.0% at full load at full speed.
Displacement power factor will be greater than 0.95 lagging over the entire speed range.
5. The Maximum Short Circuit Current Rating of the VFD shall be 200,000A RMS symmetrical for all ratings.
B. Hardware Design
1. Overall hardware design is for maximum flexibility, robustness, serviceability, and reliability for the most demanding applications.
2. Power Terminations are oversized for the drive current rating to allow for flexibility on all power terminations.
3. Drive cabinets contain a minimum of three ground termination points.
4. Power Terminations are ëfinger safeí and clearly labeled with both the US (NEMA) standards (L1, L2...T2) and IEC standards (R, SÖW).
5. The latest technology in packaging, heat sink design, and cooling is utilized to minimize overall size and weight without degrading performance or functionality.
6. Plastics, where used, are UV resistant.
7. Standard packaging is NEMA 1.
8. Interrupting current rating of 200KAIC for all ratings.
9. Power Semiconductor heat sinks contain one or more thermal sensors monitored by the microprocessor to prevent semiconductor damage caused by excessive heat or fan loss.
C. Converter Section
1. The drive employs diode bridge rectification to convert AC to DC. SCRs and other switching power devices are not used in the converter section of the drive to minimize line notching and RFI.
2. The Converter Section is unaffected by phase rotation/phase sequence.
3. Semiconductors on all ratings are sized (current) to allow full operation and overload capabilities at minimum input voltage.
4. PIV Ratings of the rectifier will be as follows:
a. 220V drives--rectifier minimum PIV rating of 800V
b. 460V drivesórectifier minimum PIV rating of 1600V
c. 600V drives ñ rectifier minimum PIV rating of 1700V
5. The drive shall have MOVs mounted phase to phase for surge protection.
6. Isolation transformers are not required for operation on most standard distribution systems.
7. The converter section is usable on 50Hz or 60Hz distribution systems.
D. DC Bus Section
1. Overall DC Bus design is passive capacitive filter to minimize ripple and maximize power-loss ride-through.
2. DC Bus capacitance (total filter capacitance) is sized to eliminate any requirement for bus inductance (for filtering purposes) when the DRIVE is used on a three-phase distribution system.
3. The DC bus voltage and current are monitored by the control section to prevent damage to either the drive or the driven equipment.
4. All ratings will contain fast acting fuses in the DC Bus section.
Packet Pg. 964 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-7
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
5. 220V drives ñ bus capacitance voltage rating 400VDC (minimum)
6. 460V drives ñ bus capacitance voltage rating 800VDC (minimum)
7. 600V drives ñ bus capacitance voltage rating 1050VDC (minimum)
8. All capacitors have balance/discharge resistors to equalize charge voltage and permit safe discharge on power outage
9. Soft charge circuitry does not utilize power transistors nor time delay relays
10. The DC Bus Section has complete power terminations to allowing:
a. Rectifier Isolation (positive side)
b. Addition of extended ëride throughí capacitor bank
c. Line regeneration using third party units
d. DC Link inductor
e. Common DC bus applications
f. DC input
11. A readily visible LED indicates when DC voltages are present
12. The DC Bus section is designed to permit common DC bussing of multiple drives.
E. Inverter Section
1. The inverter section makes use of the latest generation of IGBT power switching transistors to convert DC to three phase, variable frequency, sinusoidal coded PWM waveform.
2. IGBT initialization testing is performed by the control section on each power up and run command.
3. The inverter section does not require commutation capacitors.
4. All drives have software and hardware to limit reflected wave caused by long motor cable lengths.
5. The IGBT ratings will be as follows:
6. 220V drives ñ IGBT minimum Vce rating 600V
7. 460V drives ñ IGBT minimum Vce rating 1200V
8. 600V drives ñ IGBT minimum Vce rating 1200V
9. All IGBTs have reversed biased diodes (free wheeling) to prevent IGBT failure when subjected to motor discharge spikes
10. PWM switching frequencies are adjustable from 0.5 to 15kHz to 100Hp and 0.5 to 5kHz above to minimize audible motor noise and maximize both motor and drive efficiency.
11. IGBTs are sized (current) to allow the drive to operate at 110% (current) continuous and 150% (current) for up to 120 seconds. On units greater than 100Hp IGBTís will have an overcurrent rating of 130% for 120 seconds.
12. To allow dissipation of regenerated energy, all drives contain a microprocessor controlled dynamic braking transistor. The dynamic braking transistor is an IGBT power semiconductor that is sized to allow 100% motor braking torque when connected to an appropriate resistor.
13. The dynamic braking transistor is fully protected by the microprocessor.
14. The dynamic braking transistor will not ëturn oní when the drive is not actively engaged in controlling a motor.
15. Output currents in each phase are monitored using hall-effect current transducers to enabling control of flux current, torque current, and providing protection to both the drive and driven equipment.
Packet Pg. 965 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-8
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
16. The inverter section is capable of sensing and interrupting a phase to phase or phase to ground fault on the output of the drive.
F. Control Section
1. The control section is designed to provide complete monitoring and protection of drive internal operations while communicating with the outside world via one or more user interfaces.
2. The microprocessor used is the latest design CPU with adjustable frequency drive specific circuitry and firmware.
3. Algorithms for sensorless vector speed control, sensorless vector torque control, feedback vector speed, torque, and position control are resident in EEPROM memory and utilized by the microprocessor when applicable.
4. Microprocessor logic circuits are isolated from power circuits
5. Where switching logic power supplies are utilized, they are powered from the DC Bus Section of the drive.
6. Microprocessor diagnostics are performed (on application of power) to prove functionality and viability of the microprocessor.
7. Memory cyclic redundancy check (CRC) is performed (on application of power) to prove integrity of EEPROM and UVPROM memories.
8. Motor diagnostics are performed (on application of power and each start) to prevent damage to a grounded or shorted motor. The motor diagnostics may be disabled when using a low impedance motor.
9. All ratings contain at a minimum the following communications ports:
a. 1200 to 9600 baud rate, automatic baud rate and parity setting b. RS222/RS485 automatic switching port ñ 1200 to 28400 baud rate c. Ethernet communications port (for transmitting VFD diagnostics to a separate remote programmable logic controller system).
10. The control section is designed to allow ëquick changeí of the interface sections for both configuration and functionality.
G. Interface Section
1. Each drive shall have two user interfaces (in addition to the communication ports) as standard:
a. Electronic Operator Interface ñ A 90 X 280 (nominal) Graphical Backlit LCD display with the ability to display multiple parameters on one screen. The EOI shall provide complete operating, monitoring, and programming functionality. The EOI shall be capable of operation from an external power source and firmware operating system is flash upgradeable and may be customized for special applications. The EOI shall contain a TTL communication port and an RS485 communications port for remote mounting. A Real Time Clock option shall be available for the EOI that allows provides complete data logging in the event of a fault. b. Terminal Board Interface shall provide complete operation functionality. Standard terminal board interface shall provide eight digital inputs, three digital outputs, four analog inputs, two analog outputs, and one pulse output. Inputs and outputs are independently configurable for both scaling and functionality.
2. The drive shall retain the ability to function with no attached interface.
Packet Pg. 966 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-9
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
a. Output Power
1) The output voltage is adjustable from 0 to rated input voltage. 2) The output frequency range is adjustable for a maximum frequency output of 60 Hz.
3) The output (inverter) section of the drive will produce a PWM sinusoidal coded waveform.
4) The output power switching devices shall be IGBT devices of the latest design.
2.4 ELECTRONIC OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. The EOI shall provide a convenient method of programming, operating, and monitoring the AFD. Parameters shall be grouped in a logical manner allowing rapid access to all parameters. All parameters are displayed in an easily understandable format using plain English for all items.
B. The graphical display shall allow groupings of multiple, logically associated parameters to be displayed on a single screen.
C. EOI backlighting controls may be configured for the wide range of ambient lighting conditions.
D. The customizable graphical display enables the use of user friendly units such as feet per minute, gallons per hour.
E. For security, the EOI functionality and access may be limited and password protected preventing an unauthorized user from accessing parameters, functions, or monitoring.
2.5 FUNCTIONALITY
A. Drive shall contain four sets of independently configurable acceleration / deceleration ramps. Each set is configurable as to both time and pattern. Times are adjustable from
0.01seconds to 6000 seconds.
B. Available patterns are Linear, S-Curve, and Overspeed ëCí Curve with both ëSí and ëCí curves allow user adjustment to customize the pattern
C. Acceleration/Deceleration sets (total four) are selectable via discrete input, Electronic Operator Interface, communications, or automatic switching based on output frequency.
D. An automatic acceleration/deceleration selection is available which dynamically structures each change in speed to match conditions of the driven equipment to minimize shock due to changes in velocity and/or load conditions.
E. Overvoltage stall and overcurrent stall settings prevent damage to the driven equipment should acceleration or deceleration settings exceed the ability of the motor to accelerate or decelerate the driven equipment.
F. Braking
Packet Pg. 967 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-10
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1. Drive shall have as an integral part of the power and control circuitry an IGBT transistor for dynamic braking. The braking transistor is controlled by the AFD control system and allows, with the addition of an optional resistor, an economical means of rapidly stopping a high inertia load with up to 100% braking torque.
2. The braking transistor, braking resistor, and associated circuitry are fully protected by adjustable protection parameters eliminating the requirement for an external resistor overload protective device.
3. In addition to the dynamic braking, DC injection braking configurable for both standard and emergency stops, allowing full motor current applied as DC to rapidly bring a rotating load to a stop.
G. Control modes
1. The AFD shall have three distinct modes of operation a. Speed control as V/Hz sensorless vector, or feedback vector b. Torque control both sensorless vector and feedback vector c. Position control with feedback vector
2. The drive has the ability to switch between modes of operation while running.
H. Current Detection/protection
1. Overcurrent stall adjustable from 0.0 to 250%
2. Configurable undercurrent detection and response
3. UL recognized speed sensitive motor FLA trip curves adjustable from 10 to 100% inverter current rating
4. Motor 150% OL time limits adjustable from 10 seconds to 2400 seconds
5. OL Reduction Frequencies to optimize the speed sensitive motor overload to the application/motor characteristics
6. Configurable overtorque detection levels, times, and reactions I. Critical (skip) Frequencies
1. To avoid mechanical resonate frequencies, the AFD shall contains three programmable jump frequencies with adjustable bandwidths.
2. The jump frequencies may be any frequency less than or equal to the programmed value of maximum frequency.
3. The jump frequency bandwidths are independently programmable from +/- 0.00 to +/- 20.0 Hertz.
J. Load Sharing
1. AFD shall have the ability to share the load among multiple motors mechanically coupled to a common load. Because of variances in motors and mechanical speed reducers, one motor may experience more load than it counterparts and become overloaded. Drooping allows the overload motor to slow down, thus shedding torque and forcing the other motors to pick up the slack.
2. The drooping parameters allow the user complete adjustment over drooping gain, speed droop and multiple load levels, drooping filters, and drooping torque range.
K. Process Control (PID)
Packet Pg. 968 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-11
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1. The AFD shall contain an internal PID control algorithm with adjustable proportional, integral, and differential. Feedback may be configured for direct or inverse reaction and is adjustable to span. PID may be enabled via discrete input, Electronic Operator Interface, or communications. Reaction to loss of feedback is configurable and discrete outputs may be configured to indicate loss of feedback or maximum deviation from setpoint.
L. Electronic Thermal Motor Protection
1. The drive contains four independently configurable electronic thermal motor protection levels. The electronic thermal motor protection level may be selected by Electronic Operator Interface, discrete input, communication protocol, or fixed frequency.
2. The Electronic Thermal Motor Protection is speed sensitive and adjustable for motors with speed ranges of 2:1 to 10000:1 allowing the user to optimize motor protection to suit a variety of motors and applications.
3. The Electronic Thermal Motor Protection levels have configurable 150% motor FLA time limits allowing the user to adjust the I
2 T protection slope.
M. Emergency off Modes and Settings
1. Emergency off response is configurable to either Deceleration Stop, Coast Stop, or DC Injection Stop regardless of the standard stop mode. Emergency stop may be operator initiated via EOI, Discrete input (multiple E-Stop inputs allowed), Communication protocol
N. Feedback
1. For process control purposes, the drive will accept feedback signals as either an analog signal, binary digital, BCD digital, communication protocol, or 50% duty cycle pulse train.
O. Input/Output (I/O)
1. As a minimum, the standard control terminal board contains:
a. Four discrete inputs independently configurable for any of multiple functions, sink or source selectable and ëtrue/falseí on closure software selectable b. Two discrete relay outputs configurable for any of multiple functions with form ëCí contacts rated 2 amps/250v
c. Three analog inputs with adjustable gains and bias and multiple functions d. Potentiometer input
e. Two analog outputs with adjustable gain and bias 0-1ma or 4-20ma switch selectable
2. All control terminal boards are remote mountable (up to fifteen feet) using a standard 25-conductor computer cable.
P. Jog
1. Jog frequency may be configured for any frequency from 0.0Hz to 10Hz. Jog is initiated from an appropriately configured input terminal, Electronic Operator Interface, or communication protocol.
2. Jog stop method is user configurable to coast, controlled deceleration or DC Injection.
3. Jog may be configured to allow reversing or only operate in a configured direction.
Packet Pg. 969 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-12
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
4. When jog direction is reverse from direction of motor rotation, the drives jog function will smoothly decelerate the motor to zero then jog in the commanded direction.
Q. Override Control
1. Override control allows one or more analog signals to act as a trim source to a frequency command. Override may be configured as either a additive (or subtractive) input such as ñ 5Hz to +5Hz, or as a percent of frequency command. Override may be assigned to any analog input, communication option, or Electronic Operator Interface.
R. Overvoltage Stall
1. Overvoltage stall prevents faults caused by regeneration. During deceleration, overvoltage stall extends deceleration time when bus levels reach a user configurable level. When applied to overhauling loads, the drive will compensate for rising dc bus levels by momentarily increasing output frequency. Two overvoltage stall levels allow complete configuration and control for most cyclic overhauling loads and high inertia loads.
S. Pattern Run
1. The Pattern Run feature allows the drive to emulate many of the function of a small programmable logic controller. Useful on any application which requires a set pattern of speed changes, based on either time or contact input, the drive may be programmed for four independent or interactive patterns each consisting of up to 7 changes in speed and/or direction. Each step may be configured to any of the four accel/decel times and patterns, direction, and timed from either step change, speed reached, or contact closure.
T. Preset Speeds
1. Up to 15 preset speeds may be configured in the drive. Each preset speed may have defined direction, 1 of 4 accel/decel times and patterns, and motor protective set. The preset speed may be selected via input terminals (using BCD selection), Electronic Operator Interface, or communication function.
U. Ridethrough
1. Ridethrough mode allows the user to configure the drive to utilize motor regenerative voltages to continue operation during brief power outages. Undervoltage detection time and undervoltage stall levels are user configurable items in addition to the drives response to undervoltage conditions.
V. Retry/Restart
1. The retry/restart drive function allows the drive to smoothly start a rotating load regardless of the direction of rotation. When enabled, the drive will attempt to restart after a fault. The number of attempts and time between attempts are configurable items.
Packet Pg. 970 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-13
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
W. Soft Stall
1. Soft Stall allows the drive to reduce output frequency when the current requirements of the motor exceed the motorís Electronic Thermal Protection setting. If the current drops below the motors overload protection level within the specified time, the output frequency of the drive will return to the commanded output frequency. Soft Stall is highly effective in preventing motor overload trips when used on fans, blowers, pumps, and other centrifugal loads which require less torque and current at lower speeds.
X. Torque Limiting
1. Drive shall have a torque limiting function prevents mechanical shock to rotating equipment by allowing a user to establish a maximum torque limit. When enabled, the drive will prevent motor torque in excess of the user programmed torque limit.
2. Separate Torque Limits are configurable for positive and negative torque, and user adjustable from 0 to 250% motor torque. This allows complete torque control over both the motoring and generating regions on applications such as vibratory feeders and stamping machines.
Y. Torque Speed Limiting
1. Speed limits unique to torque control modes are configurable for both forward and reverse operation.
2.6 REGULATION
A. Speed Control
1. Sensorless Vector ñ 0.1% of motor base speed from 1 to 60HZ B. Torque Control
1. Sensorless Vector -- +/-10% of torque setpoint from 50 to 100% of the motors rated torque.
2.7 SOFTWARE AND COMMUNICATION
A. Programming Software
1. Drive shall be programmable via a computer software program and which shall provide the same functionality as the EOI with the additional capabilities of data logging, trending, storing and restoring multiple parameter sets. Cascading windows allow a user interface similar to the EOI in look and feel while allowing direct parameter access for experienced users. Trending and monitoring functions allow up to three items be graphically displayed on a standard trend chart and logged to a historical data file for future reference.
Packet Pg. 971 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-14
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Communications
1. All parameters are accessible from any of the following drive supported communication protocols.
a. RS222
b. RS485
c. Profibus
d. Modbus RTU
e. Ethernet
C. Environment
1. Operating environmental ambient conditions without derating shall be:
a. Temperature: ñ10 to +40 C
b. Relative humidity: 5 to 95% non condensing
c. Elevation: to 1000 meters (2200 ft)
d. Shock: 0.5 G maximum
2. Storage environmental ambient conditions:
a. Temperature: -10 to +65 C
b. Relative humidity: 5 to 98% non condensing
c. Elevation: to 5000 meters
2.8 LONG LEAD LENGTH
A. All drives shall have software and hardware to limit reflected wave caused by long motor cable lengths. When applied to motors with insulation systems that are compliance with NEMA MG-1-1998 Section IV Part 31, output filters shall not be required when motor lead length are within recommended limits.
B. If motor lead lengths are in excess of recommended limits, provide output filters with the drive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS
A. Contractor installing and commissioning the facility.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the jobsite and identifying site conditions which may affect the installation, storage, or operation of the equipment and notifying Owner or Ownerís Representative of such conditions.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Protect equipment from damage during installation.
B. Prepare installation location in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
Packet Pg. 972 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-15
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.4 ERECTION
A. Section not used.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturerís recommendations.
B. Do not locate drives where subject to mechanical damage or where subject to washdown or frequent water spray.
C. Securely attach wall mount units to a wall or fabricated support stand.
D. Provide a 4î housekeeping pad extending 2î out from all sides of the drive for floor mount units.
E. Allow sufficient space around the drive to allow for required cooling.
F. Install conduit and cable for power and control.
G. Ground drive in accordance with NEC and manufacturerís requirements.
H. Coordinate installation with other trades and disciplines.
3.6 APPLICATION
Section not used.
3.7 CONSTRUCTION
A. Fabricate and assemble drives and test to assure conformance to specification requirements.
B. Notify Owner or Ownerís Representative of factory testing schedule so that they have the option of witnessing the factory tests.
C. Provide each drive with an engraved nameplate of laminated black and white plastic with beveled edges. Letters shall be black on a white background. Nameplates shall contain the following information:
1. Drive tag number
2. Shop order number
3. Horsepower, voltage, phases
4. Short circuit rating
5. Date manufactured
6. Reference drawing numbers
Packet Pg. 973 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-16
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.8 REPAIR/RESTORATION
A. Repair or restore to previous condition any facility or equipment damaged or disturbed by the installation of the equipment.
3.9 RE-INSTALLATION
Section not used.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify installation in accordance with manufacturerís recommendations and with the requirements of this specification.
B. Verify field wiring and equipment calibration.
C. If required by the purchase order, schedule Manufacturerís Field Services representative for startup assistance. Submit report detailing all actions performed by this individual, all findings and recommendations. Report must state that manufacturerís representative has certified the installation in compliance with manufacturerís requirements.
3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Perform any field adjustments required by manufacturer or the manufacturerís representative.
B. Configure all drive parameters required for proper operation. Submit to Owner or Ownerís Representative a configuration and startup report documenting all drive settings and containing the following information:
1. Date of startup/configuration
2. Name of technician
3. Tag number and name of drive
4. Complete list of all configured parameters.
C. If parameters have been downloaded to a computer, submit a CD with this configuration file and labeled with the information required above.
3.12 CLEANING
A. Clean all debris from the equipment. Vacuum out all loose dirt and materials. Wipe down outside of drive.
3.13 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate proper operation to Owner or Ownerís Representative and leave equipment ready for normal operation.
Packet Pg. 974 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-17
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.14 PROTECTION
A. Protect work at all times from damage by other trades or disciplines. Repair or replace any equipment damaged by other trades or disciplines.
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 975 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16269-18
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 976 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16442-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 16442
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes
1. Power panelboards
2. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards
3. Panelboards for instrument and computer loads.
B. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under this Section
1. Section not used.
C. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under this Section
1. Section not used.
D. Related Sections
1. 01000 Project Standards and Site Conditions
2. 16075 Electrical Identification
E. Allowances
1. Section not used.
F. Unit Prices
1. Section not used.
G. Measurement Procedures
1. Section not used.
H. Payment Procedures
1. In accordance with contract.
I. Alternates/Alternatives
1. Section not used.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Section not used.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Section not used.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide fully assembled and tested panelboards. Install, energize, test, and leave ready for operation.
Packet Pg. 977 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16442-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. The equipment will be Manufacturers standard design, suitable for heavy duty industrial use and for the intended service. They will be installed in an industrial facility operating 24 hours a day 7 days a week.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with attached form ìVendor Drawings and Data to be Submittedî.
B. Submittal literature, drawings, and documentation shall be clear, legible, and written in English. Failure to comply will result in rejection of submittal.
C. Product brochures must be sufficiently detailed so that an engineering evaluation may be completed on the suitability and part number of the equipment.
D. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data describing each type of panelboard, accessory item, and component specified. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.
E. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each panelboard including dimensioned plans and elevations and component lists. Include front and side views of enclosure showing overall dimensions, enclosure type, enclosure finish, unit locations, and conduit entrances. Include the following:
1. Enclosure type with details for types other than NEMA Type 1.
2. Bus configuration and current ratings.
3. Short-circuit current rating of panelboard.
4. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and auxiliary components.
F. Wiring Diagrams: Submit detailing schematic wiring diagrams including control wiring, and differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
G. Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, installation, and starting of Product.
H. Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Submit operation and maintenance instructions. Include instructions for testing circuit breakers.
I. If provided as part of this section, completely fill in the fields of the equipment data sheets. Failure to complete the data sheets will result in rejection of any proposals.
J. Submit details of the manufacturing quality assurance/quality control program and any QA/QC certifications.
K. Receipt by Owner or Ownerís Representative of all test and calibration submittals is a condition for final payment of the purchase order.
L. Submit written certification that all assembly, fabrication, and manufacturing has been performed in accordance with manufacturerís written QA/QC policy and standards.
Packet Pg. 978 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16442-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
M. Note any exceptions to this Specification.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the production of this equipment and shall have in place a quality assurance program to be applied during the preparation and fabrication of the equipment.
B. Equipment shall have a UL listing and are marked and labeled in accordance with applicable codes and standards. If manufacturerís equipment is approved by a recognized testing laboratory other than UL, then the manufacturer shall provide a letter from the local authority having jurisdiction stating that such testing is acceptable to them.
C. Comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) for components and installation.
D. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.
E. Comply with NEMA PB1 Panelboards and NEMA AB1 Circuit Breakers.
F. Comply with UL 67 Panelboards, UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes, and UL 489 Circuit Breakers.
G. The manufacturer of the panelboards shall be a certified ISO 9001 or 9002 facility.
H. Provide products suitable for operation at the altitude at which the equipment will be installed at.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 1 Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction (ANSI) and NECA 407 Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards (ANSI).
1. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading
a. All equipment shall be adequately crated or protected, including export packing where required, to prevent damage in handling, transit, and storage at the site.
b. Each item, piece, or subassembly of equipment shall have a securely attached metal tag stamped with the tag number. All crates and boxes shall be stenciled with the tag number. Tags and stencils shall be in a conspicuous place and readable.
c. Transmit to Owner or Ownerís Representative the shipping lists and delivery dates prior to the day the equipment leaves the shop. Transmittal receipt must be confirmed by Owner or Ownerís Representative prior to shipping equipment.
d. Each shipping piece shall be clearly marked with 2 to 3 inch high contrasting numbers and/or letters, giving tag number as called out on detail drawing.
Piece marking shall be with a non-erasable marker.
e. In addition to the piece marking, a standard 3 inch by 5 inch red shipping tag shall be wired to each shipping lot. This tag shall state the range of tag and Packet Pg. 979 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16442-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
mark numbers, Vendorís name and address, owner or Ownerís Representativeís name, jobsite address and Purchase Order number.
2. Tagging
a. Each piece of equipment and loose accessory shall be tagged with a 316 stainless steel tag as described below and securely affixed to the equipment by pins or non-corroding metal screws.
b. Tagging information shall include the Ownerís Purchase Order Number, P.O.
Item Number, Ownerís Equipment Number, Vendorís Name, Vendorís Model Number, Vendorís Shop Order Number, and Voltage stamped on the tag.
Letters and numbers must be at least 1/8î (.125 inches) high.
3. Acceptance At Site
a. Inspect for visible and hidden damage and immediately notify Owner and Shipper of damage. Return to manufacturer for repair or replacement without compromising the construction schedule.
4. Storage and Protection
a. Store and protect equipment in accordance with manufacturerís recommendations. At a minimum, protect equipment from water, excess heat or cold, and construction dirt and debris.
1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements
1. In accordance with specification 01000 ìProject Standards and Site Conditionsî
2. Existing Conditions
3. Normally humid, dusty, and subject to washdown and splashing of water and slurry products.
1.9 SEQUENCING
A. Section not used.
1.10 SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate shipping schedules as per priorities with the Owner or the Ownerís Representative.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. The warranty period for the equipment specified herein shall be a minimum one (1) year from the date of commercial operation at Owner's facility or eighteen (18) months from the date of delivery, whichever comes first. Vendor shall retain originals of all test reports through the duration of the equipment warranty period PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. As listed below for different types of panelboards.
Packet Pg. 980 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16442-5
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.2 MATERIALS
A. All materials used in the fabrication and supply of the equipment shall be as listed on the equipment data sheet.
B. Extra Materials
1. Furnish six spare keys of each type for panelboard cabinet locks.
2. Provide one can of touch-up paint that matches panelboard finish.
2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Equipment provided shall be new and shall be the manufacturerís most current model.
B. Provide UL67 listed and labeled panelboards as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section.
C. Provide panelboard cabinets for flush or surface mounted as indicted on the Drawings.
D. Panelboard General Requirements:
1. Furnish NEMA Type 1 enclosures, except where the Drawings or conditions of installation indicate otherwise.
2. Provide galvanized steel cabinets constructed according to UL 50 requirements.
3. NEMA 1 boxes shall have removable end walls..
E. Provide trim fronts that meet the strength and rigidity requirements of UL 50.
1. Fronts for surface-mounted panels shall be same dimensions as box.
2. Fronts for flush panels shall overlap boxes at least 1 inch.
3. Fronts shall have ANSI 49 medium gray enamel electro-deposited over cleaned, phosphatized steel.
4. For NEMA 1 panelboards, provide fronts with hinged trim construction having a piano hinge down one side. The front shall contain a smaller lockable door, which when open, shall provide access to all device handles and rating labels. The hinged front, when open, shall provide access to all conductors and wiring terminals. The panelboard door shall open by a single lockable latch; the entire hinged front trim shall open by removing screws.
5. Provide a metal panelboard directory frame mounted inside the panelboard door.
6. Provide cylindrical tumbler type locks. Provide sliding vault locks with 3-point latching for enclosures more than 48 inches high. Key all lock assemblies alike.
Provide two (2) keys with each lock plus spares as required in the Extra Materials paragraph above.
F. Panelboard phase and neutral bus shall be copper. Panelboard bus current ratings shall be determined by heat-rise tests conducted according to UL 67.
G. Provide compression type lugs for mains plus all feeder and branch circuits 100 amperes and larger; smaller lugs shall be mechanical type. Provide panelboard box with dimensions as required to accommodate compression lugs.
Packet Pg. 981 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16442-6
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
H. Provide copper or aluminum equipment ground bus that is adequate for feeder and branch circuit equipment ground conductors. Bond ground bus to cabinet.
I. Panelboards having a main circuit breaker shall be NRTL-listed for use as service entrance equipment.
J. Equip panelboards with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances, for the future installation of circuit breakers in the ìspacesî scheduled on the Drawings.
K. Provide panelboards having NRTL-listed short circuit current ratings not less than the available fault current indicated on the Drawings. With the exception of panelboard with a current-limiting main circuit breaker, do not use ìseries ratingsî for circuit breaker interrupting capacities. The short circuit rating for a panelboard without a current-limiting main circuit breaker shall not exceed the lowest interrupting capacity rating of any circuit breaker installed in the panelboard.
L. Provide thermal-magnetic circuit breakers that meet the requirements of UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and NEMA AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
1. Provide circuit breakers of the type, rating, and features as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide circuit breakers with the following minimum NRTL-listed interrupting capacities:
a. 208Y/120V and 120/240V applications: 10,000 amperes, RMS symmetrical
3. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
4. Provide multipole breakers with a common trip.
5. Provide bolt-on type circuit breakers or circuit breakers that connect to the panel bus through positive gripping connector jaws and are secured by an independent mechanical locking device.
M. Provide padlockable handle lock-off devices for each panelboard main circuit breaker and for all two-pole and three-pole circuit breakers.
N. Provide the following accessories, modifications, or special features for panelboards as indicated on the Drawings.
1. Isolated Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit equipment ground conductors; insulated from the box.
2. Split Bus: Vertical buses of indicated panels divided into two vertical sections with connections as indicated.
3. Conduit Covers for Surface Mounted Panels: Same gage and finish as panel front with flanges for attachment to panel, wall, and the floor.
4. Contactors in Mains: Mechanically held, with current rating, poles, and connections as indicated on the Drawings.
5. Shunt trip: Shunt-trip main circuit breaker or shunt-trip branch circuit breakers.
6. Control Power Source: Control power transformer of capacity indicated, for contactor shunt trip or other devices. Mount in cabinet of panel indicated. Protect primary with current-limiting fuses. Provide fused protection of control circuits.
7. Extra Gutter Space: Dimensions and arrangement as indicated on the Drawings.
8. Gutter Barrier: Arranged to isolate section of gutter as indicated.
9. Auxiliary Gutter: Conform to UL 870, "Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings."
Packet Pg. 982 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16442-7
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
10. Column Type Panelboard Configuration: Narrow cabinet extended as wireway to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.
11. Neutral bus rated 200% of the phase bus for high harmonic applications.
12. Subfeed circuit breaker or lug provision as indicated.
13. Feed-Through Lugs: Sized to accommodate feeders indicated.
14. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors: Refer to Section 16445.
O. Power Panelboards:
1. Provide power panelboards as indicated on the Drawings. Main bus rating for the power panelboards described in this Section shall not exceed 1200 amperes and main circuit breaker frame size shall not exceed 800 amperes.
2. Refer to Section 16445 when main bus rating exceeds 1200 amperes or main circuit breaker frame size exceeds 800 amperes.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Cutler-Hammer ìPRL3a and PRL4î.
b. General Electric ìSpectraî (480Y/277V) and ìAQî (208Y/120V or 120/240V). c. Siemens ìP2, P3, and P4 Seriesî
d. Square D ìI-LINEî (480Y/277V) and ìNQODî (208Y/120V or 120/240V). e. Engineer approved equal.
4. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards
a. Provide lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard enclosures shall be not less than 20 inches or more than 26 inches in width.
c. Manufacturers:
1) Cutler-Hammer ìPRL3aî (480Y/277V) and ìPRL1a and PRL2aî (208Y/120V or 120/240V).
2) General Electric ìSpectraî (480Y/277V) and ìAQî (208Y/120V or 120/240V).
3) Siemens ìP2" (480Y/277V) and ìP1" (208Y/120V or 120/240V). 4) Square D ìI-LINEî (480Y/277V) and ìNQODî (208Y/120V or 120/240V). 5) Engineer approved equal
d. Panelboards for Instrument and Computer Loads
e. Provide panelboards for 208Y/120V or 120/240V instrument and computer loads.
f. Enclosures shall be not less than 20 inches or more than 26 inches in width. g. Provide a 200% rated neutral bus.
h. Provide an isolated ground bus in addition to the equipment ground bus. Size isolated ground bus to accept feeder and branch-circuit isolated ground conductors that are the same size as the corresponding circuit phase conductors.
i. Manufacturers:
1) General Electric ìAQî
2) Cutler-Hammer ìPRL1a and PRL2aî
3) Siemens ìP1"
4) Square D ìNQODî
5) Engineer approved equal.
2.4 EQUIPMENT
A. Section not used.
Packet Pg. 983 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16442-8
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.5 COMPONENTS
A. Section not used.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. As listed on the panel schedules.
2.7 MIXES
A. Section not used.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. The equipment shall be completely shop assembled and inspected prior to shipment to check for correct fit up and compliance with specification requirements.
2.9 FINISHES
A. Unless listed otherwise in the drawings, furnish equipment with manufacturerís standard finish and housing.
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests, Inspections
1. Test equipment for proper operation and in accordance with manufacturersí published QA/QC procedures.
2. Notify Owner or Ownerís Representative of factory test schedules so that they have the option of attending these tests. Provide minimum 2 weeks notification prior to start of testing.
B. Verification of Performance
1. Section not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS
A. Contractor installing and commissioning the facility.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the jobsite and identifying site conditions which may affect the installation, storage, or operation of the equipment and notifying Owner or Ownerís Representative of such conditions.
B. Examine surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Packet Pg. 984 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16442-9
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Protect equipment from damage during installation.
B. Prepare installation location in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
3.4 ERECTION
A. Section not used.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards where shown on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturerís instructions, NECA 407, and the NEC. Have the manufacturerís installation instructions available at the construction site.
B. Do not locate equipment in walkways, where subject to mechanical damage, where subject to immersion in water or liquids, in a hazardous location unless listed for the location, in direct sunlight unless protected by a sun shade, or in any other location detrimental to the equipmentís proper and long term operation.
C. Coordinate installation with other trades and disciplines.
D. Install equipment in a location which is readily accessible to Ownerís personnel for regular or scheduled access.
E. Ground and bond panelboards.
F. At flush panelboard install four 1-inch conduits to junction boxes in accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in future. If installed above a raised floor, install the four 1-inch conduits to junction boxes in raised floor space. Install branch circuit conductors from panelboard spare circuit breakers to junction boxes for future extension.
G. Provide typed circuit directories for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directories to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.
1. Provide one hard copy and an electronic copy of the panelboard schedule to the Owner or Owners representative at project closeout.
2. Install a plastic-laminated copy of the circuit directory on the inner side of the panelboard door.
H. Identify panelboards and install warning signs and arc-flash warning labels.
I. Mark floor in front of panelboards to show NEC required working space.
3.6 APPLICATION
A. Section not used.
3.7 CONSTRUCTION
A. Section not used.
Packet Pg. 985 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16442-10
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.8 REPAIR/RESTORATION
A. Repair or restore to previous condition any facility or equipment damaged or disturbed by the installation of the equipment.
3.9 RE-INSTALLATION
A. Section not used.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify installation in accordance with manufacturerís recommendations and with the requirements of this specification.
B. Verify that quantity, configuration, and rating of circuit breakers agrees with Drawings.
C. Clean, inspect, test, and energize installed panelboards in accordance with NECA 407.
D. After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.
3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Perform any field adjustments required by manufacturer or the manufacturerís representative.
B. After Substantial Completion, but not more than two months after Final Acceptance, conduct load-balancing in accordance with NECA 407 and as follows:
1. Do measurements during period of normal working loads as advised by the Owner.
2. Make load-balancing circuit changes outside the normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility. Arrange with Owner to avoid disrupting critical services.
3. Recheck loads after circuit changes during a normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.
3.12 CLEANING
A. Clean all debris from the equipment.
3.13 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate proper operation to Owner or Ownerís Representative and leave equipment ready for normal operation.
3.14 PROTECTION
A. Protect work at all times from damage by other trades or disciplines. Repair or replace any equipment damaged by other trades or disciplines.
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 986 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16443-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 16443
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Section includes free standing Low Voltage Motor Control Center (MCC). The MCC will be supplied from a 480 Volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz, wye connection, solidly grounded system and will be used in an industrial plant to provide the control and switching of industrial motors or other loads.
B. Representative equipment contained within the MCC and considered part of the MCC is as follows:
1. NEMA rated enclosures
2. Vertical and horizontal bus
3. Metering equipment
4. Main and secondary overcurrent protection devices including fuses and circuit breakers.
5. Mechanical, reduced voltage, or solid state motor starters
6. Variable frequency controllers.
7. Step down transformers and low voltage distribution panels
8. Interconnecting wiring, operators, indicating lights, and meters.
9. Surge protection devices
10. Space heaters and lighting
C. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under this Section
1. This section not used.
D. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under this Section
1. This section not used.
E. Related Sections
1. 01000 Project Standards and Site Conditions
2. 16269 Variable Frequency Controller
F. Allowances
1. This section not used.
G. Unit Prices
1. This section not used.
H. Measurement Procedures
1. This section not used.
I. Payment Procedures.
1. In accordance with contract.
J. Alternates/Alternatives
1. This section not used.
Packet Pg. 987 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16443-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.2 REFERENCES
A. All equipment covered in this Specification shall be designed, assembled and tested in accordance with the latest approved standards and codes as listed in ìProject Standards and Site Conditions.î
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Vendor to obtain the necessary approvals from the UL and to ensure that all parts of the equipment supplied are marked or labeled in accordance with the applicable codes and standards. If Vendorís equipment is approved by a recognized testing laboratory other than UL then the Vendor shall include with bid, a letter from the local authority enforcing the code stating that such testing laboratory is acceptable to them.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MCC Motor Control Center
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide fully assembled, wired, tested, listed, and ready for field installation free standing low voltage motor control centers configured and rated in accordance with project drawings. The equipment will be Manufacturers standard design, suitable for heavy duty industrial use and for the intended service. They will be installed in an industrial facility operating 24 hours a day 7 days a week.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with attached Vendor Data Sheet ìVendor Drawings and Data to be Submittedî.
B. Submittal literature, drawings, and documentation shall be clear, legible, and written in English. Failure to comply will result in rejection of submittal.
C. Product brochures must be sufficiently detailed so that an engineering evaluation may be completed on the suitability of the equipment.
D. Submit details of the manufacturing quality assurance/quality control program and any QA/QC certifications.
E. Receipt by Owner or Ownerís Representative of all test submittals is a condition for final payment of the purchase order.
F. Submit written certification that all assembly, fabrication, and manufacturing has been performed in accordance with manufacturerís written QA/QC policy and standards.
G. Do not proceed with fabrication until Engineer returns submittals either ìApprovedî or ìApproved as Notedî
H. Note any exceptions to this Specification.
Packet Pg. 988 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16443-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the production of this equipment and shall have in place a quality assurance program to be applied during the preparation and fabrication of the equipment.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Equipment shall have a UL listing and are marked and labeled in accordance with applicable codes and standards. If manufacturerís equipment is approved by a recognized testing laboratory other than UL, then the manufacturer shall provide a letter from the local authority having jurisdiction stating that such testing is acceptable to them.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading
1. All equipment shall be adequately crated or protected, including export packing where required, to prevent damage in handling, transit, and storage at the site.
2. Each item, piece, or subassembly of equipment shall have a securely attached metal tag stamped with the tag number. All crates and boxes shall be stenciled with the tag number. Tags and stencils shall be in a conspicuous place and readable.
3. Transmit to Owner or Ownerís Representative the shipping lists and delivery dates prior to the day the equipment leaves the shop. Transmittal receipt must be confirmed by Owner or Ownerís Representative prior to shipping equipment.
4. Each shipping piece shall be clearly marked with 2 to 3 inch high contrasting numbers and/or letters, giving tag number as called out on detail drawing. Piece marking shall be with a non-erasable marker.
5. In addition to the piece marking, a standard 3 inch by 5 inch red shipping tag shall be wired to each shipping lot. This tag shall state the range of tag and mark numbers, Vendorís name and address, owner or Ownerís Representativeís name, jobsite address and Purchase Order number.
B. Tagging
1. Each piece of equipment and loose accessory shall be tagged with a 316 stainless steel metal tag as described below and securely affixed to the equipment by pins or non-corroding metal screws.
2. Tagging information shall include the Ownerís Purchase Order Number, P.O. Item Number, Ownerís Equipment Number, Vendorís Name, Vendorís Model Number, Vendorís Shop Order Number, and Voltage stamped on the tag. Letters and numbers must be at least 1/8î (.125 inches) high.
C. Acceptance At Site
1. Inspect for visible and hidden damage and immediately notify Owner and Shipper of damage. Return to manufacturer for repair or replacement without compromising the construction schedule.
D. Storage and Protection
1. Store and protect equipment in accordance with manufacturerís recommendations.
At a minimum, protect equipment from water, excess heat or cold, and construction dirt and debris.
Packet Pg. 989 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16443-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements
1. In accordance with specification ìProject Standards and Site Conditionsî B. Existing Conditions
1. Equipment located within electrical rooms will be in environmentally controlled conditions. Equipment located out of doors will be provided with a canopy style sunshade but will be exposed to driven rain, snow, and dust.
1.9 SEQUENCING
A. Section not used.
1.10 SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate shipping schedules as per priorities with the Owner or the Ownerís Representative.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. The warranty period for the equipment specified herein shall be a minimum one (1) year from the date of commercial operation at Owner's facility or eighteen (18) months from the date of delivery, whichever comes first. Vendor shall retain originals of all test reports through the duration of the equipment warranty period
1.12 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Section not used.
1.13 OWNERíS INSTRUCTIONS
A. Section not used.
1.14 COMMISSIONING
A. Provide labor and materials to test, energize, and commission all components of the Motor Control Center.
1.15 MAINTENANCE
A. Section not used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D
B. Allen Bradley
Packet Pg. 990 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16443-5
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Cutler Hammer
D. Engineer approved equal
2.2 EXISTING PRODUCTS
A. Section not used.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. All materials used in the fabrication and supply of the equipment shall be new.
B. Due to the possible presence of small amounts of hydrogen sulfide gas, the main horizontal 3 phase power buses shall be tinned copper rated per the project drawings at a 50C temperature rise. The vertical buses shall be tinned copper rated not less than 300 amps. The entire bus system shall be braced to withstand a short circuit of not less than 42,000 amperes RMS symmetrical without damage.
C. The horizontal ground bus shall be a continuous º inch x 2 inch, horizontal nonplated, copper bus and shall be provided with compression lug connectors for #4/0 AWG copper wire on both ends. The bus shall run the full width of the motor control center at the bottom. Each vertical section of the motor control center shall have a non-plated, 3/16″ x ¾″, copper vertical ground bus. The bus shall be mounted and supported by the vertical structure. The vertical ground bus shall be factory wired or spliced to the horizontal ground bus. The vertical ground bus shall accept units with ground clips or of bolt-in-type.
2.4 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Equipment provided shall be new and shall be the manufacturerís most current model.
B. Enclosures
1. The MCC shall be Vendor's latest standard design. Vertical sections shall be 90 inches high and 20 inches wide by approximately 20 inches deep, joined together and mounted on channel iron sills to form a rigid, free standing, totally enclosed assembly, maximum six units high, mounting as shown on the drawings. If back to back design is required, this will be shown on the drawings.
2. MCCs for indoor installation shall be NEMA 1B gasketed construction.
3. MCCs for outdoor installation shall be NEMA 3R construction furnished as a dead front assembly with lockable exterior doors.
4. The MCC shall be assembled in a straight line shape with all units dead front mounted. Access to wiring space, terminal blocks and connections shall be from the front only.
5. Vertical sections shall be free standing with steel structures of adequate strength to withstand all stresses imposed by shipping, handling, installation and operation without distortion or other damage.
6. Each unit compartment shall have a rigid flanged formed door with concealed hinges.
7. Unit compartments shall be separated by insulated isolating barriers (red color) to retard propagation of damage due to faults. Barriers shall not hinder wiring.
Vertical bus barriers shall have interlocking front and back pieces to give added Packet Pg. 991 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16443-6
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
protection on all sides and shall segregate the phases from each other to reduce the chance of accidental ìflash over.î Protective bus covers shall be provided for both main horizontal bus and vertical buses. Vertical buses shall be polyester covers with cutouts for unit stab-on connections. Bottom bus covers shall be provided below the vertical bus to protect the ends of this bus from contact with fish tapes or other items entering the bottom of the enclosure.
8. The structure shall be provided with two (2) horizontal wireways, one (1) at the top and one (1) at the bottom which will line up to form a convenient wiring space the entire length of the control center. In addition, each vertical section shall have a vertical wireway for unit wiring. The vertical troughs shall have cable tie supports. All wireways shall be accessible from the front only. Roof plates shall be removable, heavy gauges for top conduit entry. Bottom shall be open for conduit entry between sills. Insulating grommets shall be installed on all wireway penetrations between vertical sections.
9. The MCC shall have provisions for adding future sections.
10. Spaces shall be fully equipped with bus, doors and all necessary unit mounting hardware.
11. The MCC construction shall be such that each starter, relay and disconnect switch cubicle shall be isolated from other cubicles (bus and wiring) so as to contain a fire or damage from an internal fault to the cubicle itself.
C. Incoming sections will be top or bottom, left or right as shown on the drawings.
Incoming bus shall be rated the same as the main horizontal bus. Provide two hole terminal lugs for the incoming line. Size lugs based upon cable size shown on drawings. Cable termination lugs shall be rated for 75 degree centigrade cables.
D. The MCC shall be factory wired to NEMA Class 1, Type B standards.
2.5 EQUIPMENT
A. Main Service Disconnect
1. Breakers shall be operated by a toggle or rotary type low torque handle with independent, spring charged mechanism for quick-make, quick-break, mechanically trip free operation. Tripping shall be clearly indicated and the handle automatically assuming a position midway between the ìONî and ìOFFî positions.
2. Circuit breakers rated 1000 amps or higher shall be provided with ground fault protection.
B. Metering
1. Where shown on drawings, provide voltage, current, or combination meters.
Furnish with disconnects, over current protection, current transformers, and voltage transformers to form a complete and operable metering system.
C. Feeder Circuit Breakers
1. Feeder circuit breakers shall be rated 600 Volt, 60 Hertz and have an interrupting capacity of not less than 42,000 amperes RMS symmetrical at 480 Volt D. Dry Type Transformers
1. Single or three phase with KVA rating as shown on drawings. Provide with a feeder circuit breaker. Provide in accordance with Specification 16461.
Packet Pg. 992 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16443-7
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
E. Lighting Panels
1. Single or three phase with ratings, ampacity, and accessories as shown on the panel schedules. All feeder breakers to be screw on type. Provide with main disconnect circuit breaker. Provide in accordance with Specification 16442.
F. Combination Motor Starters (Control Units)
1. MCC combination motor starters with motor circuit protectors shall be rated 600 Volt, 60 Hertz and have an interrupting capacity of not less than 42,000 amperes RMS symmetrical at 480 Volt.
2. Operators to be NEMA 4 rated. Provide each starter with Green run light, Hand/Off/Remote selector switch, and external overload reset. Indicating lights are to be 120VAC, LED style with push-to-test provision. Provide additional operators and indicating lights if required by drawings.
3. Control units shall be installed in separate compartments or grouped in the same compartment depending on space requirements and shall be rated 600 Volts A.C.
4. Each control unit shall consist of either:
a. A manually operated thermal magnetic circuit breaker. b. A combination magnetic full-voltage starter with a motor circuit protector with an adjustable trip. Reversing starters shall be mechanically interlocked.
5. All circuit breakers and MCPs shall be heavy duty, manually operated, load break, air break type with quick break operating mechanism and non-welding type contacts. They shall be provided with a manual, externally operated handle capable of operating the circuit breaker or MCP with the unit door closed. The handle shall have ìOnî and ìOffî positions clearly marked on the outside cover of the door.
6. Circuit breaker and MCP operating handles shall be interlocked with the door so the door cannot be opened with the switch in the closed position except through a hidden release mechanism which shall be provided for use only by authorized personnel. Provisions shall be made for closing the breaker or MCP and energizing the controlled device with the door open, and opening the door without opening the disconnect for testing and maintenance purposes. The operating handle shall be arranged for padlocking in the ìOffî position with up to three (3) padlocks.
7. The combination starter units shall consist of motor circuit protectors and full voltage non-reversible or reversible, magnetically operated motor starters equipped with three (3) manual reset thermal overload relays and heaters, control power transformers and 120 Volt operating coils.
8. Each starter unit shall have a 480-120 Volt, 60 Hertz control circuit transformer fused on the primary. One (1) side of the secondary of the control transformer shall be grounded; the line side shall be fused. Fuse size shall be coordinated with size of control transformer. The transformer shall be sized for the operating coil plus 50 VA extra capacity but shall not be less than 100 VA. This information shall appear on Vendor drawings.
9. In addition to the seal-in contact, all starters shall be furnished with minimum of two (2) N.O. and two (2) N.C. auxiliary contacts. Provide additional contacts as required as indicated on applicable drawings attached to this Specification. All auxiliary contacts shall be wired to terminal strips.
10. A unit wiring diagram shall be pasted inside of each compartment door.
11. Each starter shall be furnished with 75C rated T-lugs. Each circuit breaker shall be provided with 75C rated lugs.
Packet Pg. 993 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16443-8
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
12. All control units size 4 and smaller shall connect on to the vertical bus with tin plated stab-on connectors. These connectors shall be constructed so as to increase contact pressure under short circuit conditions.
13. All compartments including starters shall have a UL label showing approval for the application.
14. Compartments shall have complete steel top and bottom to provide maximum isolation between units. Unit support brackets shall be provided in the structure to properly align the unit.
15. Combination starter units shall be wired, and terminal blocks arranged and designated in accordance with project drawings. A minimum of fifteen (15) terminal blocks shall be provided in each combination starter unit for Owner's control wiring hookup. Terminal blocks shall be large enough for a maximum of two (2) No. 14 AWG stranded copper wire per block and shall be of the add on type to permit extension in the field by the Owner. Terminal blocks shall be ìpull apartî style so the field wiring need not be disconnected when the starter is removed from the cubicle.
16. Compartments labeled ìSpareî shall be equipped with a control unit of size and type indicated on attached drawings. Those labeled ìSpaceî shall be equipped to receive the largest unit capable of being mounted in the allotted space.
G. Adjustable Frequency Drives
1. Provide in accordance with Specification 16269.
2.6 COMPONENTS
A. Shall be new and the manufacturers most current model.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Nameplates
1. Provide nameplates for each cubicle and MCC including ìSparesî and ìSpaces.î Nameplates shall be phenolic engraved on a white face to a black core in accordance with the drawings.
2. Provide a nameplate at the top of center of the MCC with the MCC number as indicated on the drawings. Nameplate shall be approximately 2 inches by 6 inches with æ inch letters.
3. Each motor starter or circuit breaker shall have a nameplate placed on its door to show its location in the MCC, its equipment number and its service as shown on drawings. Nameplate shall be Manufacturer's standard.
2.8 MIXES
A. This section not used.
Packet Pg. 994 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16443-9
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.9 FABRICATION
A. The equipment shall be completely shop assembled and inspected prior to shipment to check for correct fit up and compliance with specification requirements.
B. Shipping and Lifting Surfaces
1. The MCC assembly shall be provided with supports to maintain alignment of parts during shipment and handling. Sufficient strength shall be provided to permit hoisting with safety. Location of lifting points shall be clearly shown on Vendor's drawings.
2. Vendor shall supply complete instructions for shipping, unloading, loading and erection.
2.10 FINISHES
A. The MCC shall be cleaned, primed and finished painted in accordance with Vendor's standard specifications. Color shall be Vendor's standard.
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests, Inspections
1. Test equipment for proper operation and in accordance with manufacturersí published QA/QC procedures.
2. Notify Owner or Ownerís Representative of factory test schedules so that they have the option of attending these tests. Provide minimum 2 weeks notification prior to start of testing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS
A. Contractor constructing and commissioning the facility at which this equipment will be used.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the jobsite and identifying site conditions which may affect the installation, storage, or operation of the equipment and notifying Owner or Ownerís Representative of such conditions.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Protect equipment from damage during installation.
B. Prepare installation location in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
3.4 ERECTION
A. This section not used.
Packet Pg. 995 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16443-10
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturerís recommendations.
B. Verify that mounting surface is clean, level, and plumb.
C. Mechanically attach MCC to mounting surface to prevent tipping or movement.
D. Connect shipping splits together using splice kits provided by the manufacturer.
E. Coordinate installation with other trades and disciplines.
F. Test in accordance with relevant sections of the latest version of the NETA (or IETA) testing manual. Provide Owner or Owners representative with certified copies of the test results.
G. Leave ready for installation of power, load, and control conductors.
3.6 APPLICATION
A. Section not used.
3.7 CONSTRUCTION
A. Section not used.
3.8 REPAIR/RESTORATION
A. Repair or restore to previous condition any facility or equipment damaged or disturbed by the installation of the equipment.
B. Touch up any scratches with manufacturer supplied paint.
3.9 RE-INSTALLATION
A. Section not used.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify installation in accordance with manufacturerís recommendations and with the requirements of this specification.
B. Verify field wiring and equipment calibration.
C. If required by the purchase order, schedule Manufacturerís Field Services representative for startup assistance. Submit report detailing all actions performed by this individual, all findings and recommendations. Report must state that manufacturerís representative has certified the installation in compliance with manufacturerís requirements.
Packet Pg. 996 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16443-11
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Perform any field adjustments required by manufacturer or the manufacturerís representative.
3.12 CLEANING
A. Clean all debris from the equipment.
3.13 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate proper operation to Owner or Ownerís Representative and leave equipment ready for normal operation.
3.14 PROTECTION
A. Protect work at all times from damage by other trades or disciplines. Repair or replace any equipment damaged by other trades or disciplines.
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 997 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16443-12
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 998 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16461-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 16461
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.
B. Section 1000 Project Standards and Site Conditions.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA:
1. Distribution transformers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with attached Vendor Data Requirement sheet (attached).
B. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
D. Source quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
Packet Pg. 999 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16461-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.
B. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading
1. All equipment shall be adequately crated or protected, including export packing where required to prevent damage in handling, transit, and storage at the site.
2. Each item, piece, or subassembly of equipment shall have a securely attached metal tag stamped with the tag number. All crates and boxes shall be stenciled with the tag number. Tags and stencils shall be in a conspicuous place and readable.
3. Transmit to Owner or Ownerís Representative the shipping lists and delivery dates prior to the day the equipment leaves the shop. Transmittal receipt must be confirmed by Owner or Ownerís Representative prior to shipping equipment.
4. Each shipping piece shall be clearly marked with 2 to 3 inch high contrasting numbers and/or letters, giving tag number as called out on detail drawing. Piece marking shall be with a non-erasable marker.
5. In addition to the piece marking, a standard 3 inch by 5 inch red shipping tag shall be wired to each shipping lot. This tag shall state the range of tag and mark numbers, Vendorís name and address, owner or Ownerís Representativeís name, jobsite address and Purchase Order number.
C. Tagging
1. Each piece of equipment and loose accessory shall be tagged with a 316 stainless steel tag as described below and securely affixed to the equipment by pins or non-corroding metal screws.
2. Tagging information shall include the Ownerís Purchase Order Number, P.O. Item Number, Ownerís Equipment Number, Vendorís Name, Vendorís Model Number, Vendorís Shop Order Number, and Voltage stamped on the tag. Letters and numbers must be at least 1/8î (.125 inches) high.
D. Acceptance At Site
1. Inspect for visible and hidden damage and immediately notify Owner and Shipper of damage. Return to manufacturer for repair or replacement without compromising the construction schedule.
E. Storage and Protection
1. Store and protect equipment in accordance with manufacturerís recommendations. At a minimum, protect equipment from water, excess heat or cold, and construction dirt and debris.
Packet Pg. 1000 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16461-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. General Electric Company.
2. Square D; Schneider Electric.
3. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
4. Federal Pacific Transformer Company; Division of Electro-Mechanical Corp.
5. Hammond Co.; Matra Electric, Inc.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.
B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.
C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.
1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
2. Coil Material: Copper.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B. Cores: One leg per phase.
C. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2 or 3R as required by project drawings.
1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.
D. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.
1. Finish Color: Gray.
E. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: None
F. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full capacity.
Packet Pg. 1001 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16461-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
G. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity
H. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.
I. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:
1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels.
2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2.
J. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-factor.
1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K-factor.
2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.
K. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.
1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals.
2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield.
3. Shield Effectiveness:
a. Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.
b. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz.
c. Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz.
L. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.
Packet Pg. 1002 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16461-5
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.
D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.
D. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.
B. Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.
C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.
Packet Pg. 1003 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16461-6
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.6 CLEANING
A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. ++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 1004 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16500-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide lighting fixtures as shown and/or scheduled.
B. Coordination:
1. Coordinate location of fixtures with piping, ductwork, openings and other systems and equipment and locate clear of interferences.
2. Coordinate fixtures to be mounted in hung ceilings with the ceiling suspension system proposed for use.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 16135, Outlet, Pull, and Junction Boxes.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. UL Standard #57, Electric Lighting Fixtures.
3. UL Standard #844, Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous Locations.
4. UL Standard #1570, Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures.
5. UL Standard #1571, Incandescent Lighting Fixtures.
6. UL Standard #1572, High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit, for approval, including the following:
1. Fixture construction details.
2. ETL photometric and isocandle curves for each fixture proposed.
3. Verification that recessed fixtures that are to be mounted in hung ceilings are compatible with the ceiling suspension system proposed for use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Type: Lighting fixtures are noted in the Fixture Schedule in the Drawings. Fixtures to be complete with supports, ballasts, lamps and incidentals as required.
B. Fixtures located in an area which is identified as a hazardous location shall be approved as a complete assembly for the hazardous location classification shown on the Drawings, shall be clearly marked to indicate maximum wattage of lamps for which they are approved, and shall be protected against physical damage by suitable guards.
Packet Pg. 1005 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 16500-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Hardware: All necessary hangers, supports, conduit adaptors, reducers, hooks, brackets and other hardware required for safe fixture mounting shall be furnished.
Hardware shall have a protective, non-corrosive finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Fixture mounting heights and locations shown on the Drawings are approximate and are subject to revision in the field, where necessary to clear conflicts and obstructions.
B. Suspended Fixtures: Pendant mount using 1/2-inch conduit stems. Ground to outlet box. Attach mounting to building structure with expansion anchors. Fixtures shall not be dependent on the outlet box cover screws for support.
C. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Attach to appropriate outlet box.
D. Boxes and Fixtures:
1. For units mounted against masonry or concrete walls, provide suitable 1/2-inch spacers to prevent mounting back of box directly against wall.
2. Bolt units rigidly to building with expansion anchors, toggle bolts, hangers or Unistrut.
3. No boxes shall be installed with open conduit holes.
4. Cable each circuit and identify with tag.
E. Mounting Heights: Mounting heights or elevations are to bottom of the fixture or to centerline of device.
F. Relamp all fluorescent fixtures with new lamps at end of construction period, prior to final acceptance of the new facilities by OWNER.
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 1006 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 1007
Attachment: Addendum 1 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 1008
Attachment: Addendum 1 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 1009
Attachment: Addendum 1 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 1010
Attachment: Addendum 1 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 1011
Attachment: Addendum 1 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 1012
Attachment: Addendum 1 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 1013
Attachment: Addendum 1 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 1014
Attachment: Addendum 1 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 1015
Attachment: Addendum 1 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 1016
Attachment: Addendum 1 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 1017
Attachment: Addendum 1 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 1018
Attachment: Addendum 1 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant)
PUBLIC WORKS - ENGINEERING
530-225-4170
530-245-4170 FAX
ADDENDUM NO. 2
to the
WELL 12 WATER TREATMENT PLANT
(Job No. 2422)
BID SCHEDULE NO. 5381
TO ALL PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS:
Addendum No. 2 provides for deletions, corrections, clarifications, and additions to the contract specifications and drawings for the Well 12 Water Treatment Plant, Bid Schedule No. 5381.
The deletions, corrections, clarifications, and additions shall apply to Contract Bid Schedule No. 5381 in the same manner as if they were originally part of the printed specifications, drawings, and proposal.
1. Volume 1- Technical Specifications, Section 11540 Greensand Filtration System, Section 11540.2.3.I:
Add the following.
5. Double-Disc Check Valve
a. Service: Water
b. Features:
1) Body: Cast iron, ASTM A126, CL. B, or ASTM A278, Cl. 40. 2) Disc: Aluminum Bronze or Stainless Steel, ASTM A351, Type 316. 3) Seal/seat: Viton
4) Spring, hinge pin and stop pin: Stainless Steel, ASTM A276, Type 316. 5) Retainerless Design
6) Lugged body, 2” to 6”. Double-flange valve body (8” and larger). 7) Designed for a working pressure of 175 psi and tested at a hydrostatic pressure of 300 psi.
8) Coatings and Linings:
a) Liquid epoxy, 12 mil minimum, for valve interior and exterior. b) For potable water applications, epoxy lining shall be NSF 61 approved. c. Manufacturers and Products:
1) Crane, Duo-Check II, Style H
2) Gulf Valve Model MB
3) Or equal
2. Volume 1- Technical Specifications, Section 11540 Greensand Filtration System, Section 11540.2.3.L:
Packet Pg. 1019 Attachment: Addendum 2 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Add the following.
4. Water Quality Analyzers
a. CHLORINE ANALYZER/TRANSMITTER
1) Analyzer/transmitter shall measure residual chlorine. a) Range: 0 to 5 mg/L
b) Compensated for temperature variations over the range 0 to 52 degrees C (32 to 125 degrees F).
c) LCD display with 0.7-inch high characters.
d) Selection of the high and low control and alarm points shall be by means of test switches and an internal simulator.
e) Two relay contacts shall be SDPT and shall have a current capacity of ten amps at 120 VAC non-inductive loads.
f) Electronics shall be solid-state and no printed circuit boards. g) Output signals shall be 4 to 20 mADC isolated.
2) Sensor:
a) Combined available chlorine sensors shall be of the passive amperometric type with gold cathode and silver anode.
b) Electrolyte reservoir of 60 ml.
c) Each probe shall have an automatic pressure-compensating gland to prevent any influence of pressure on the signal when tested to 150 feet submergence.
d) The sensor shall be provided with a replaceable screw-on-type cap over the gold cathode, which contains chlorine permeable membrane so constructed that replacement caps will cause less than three percent change in readings.
e) Sensor shall have a minimum service period of six months between electrolyte changes.
f) The consumable materials in the sensor shall be sufficient for a minimum of three years of sensor life at ambient operating conditions. g) Sensor shall come complete with spare membrane caps and electrolyte. h) Cable shall be four conductor, heavy-duty type with reinforcing core wire, vinyl covering and mylar insulation. Cable shall be long enough to permit easy withdrawal and inspection of the sensor without disconnecting the cable.
i) The sensor shall screw into the base end of the probe holder and this assembly shall contain all wiring. No exposed wiring shall be permitted. j) Provide mounting bracket.
3) Product and Manufacturer: Provide the following:
a) Endress+Hauser Free Chlorine Measurement System (Material #71573437), 0 to 5 mg/L chlorine range. This includes
1. Memosens free chlorine sensor (CCS51D-AA11AD-NC),
2.PH sensor (CPS31D),
3.Flowfit CCA250 flow assembly, and
4. Liquiline CM444 transmitter,
all assembled in a coordinated panel with inlet and outlet valves, interconnecting piping, etc.
b) No equal
b. TURBIDIMETER
Packet Pg. 1020 Attachment: Addendum 2 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 1) Type: Continuous monitoring system consisting of a flow through sensor and analyzer/transmitter designed to continuously measure the turbidity of liquids and produce an output signal linearly proportional to the turbidity. 2) Measurement Principle: Ratio type signed analysis which measures and detects the transmitted light through the sample in addition to the light scattered at 90 degrees on both sides of the incident light beam. 3) Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a) Hach TU5300sc turbidimeter. Provide with
1.Automatic Cleaning Module LQV159.97.00002 and
2.SC-200 controller with (5) 4-20 mA outputs.
b) No equal
3. Volume 1- Technical Specifications, Section 11540 Greensand Filtration System, Section 11540.2.3.G.1a:
Replace this section with the following.
a. Place lean concrete (1,000 psi) in the bottom of the vessel up to the base of the gravel support bed (30”). Concrete shall be supplied and installed by equipment installer.
4. Volume 1- Technical Specifications, Section 13311 I&C-PLC Hardware and Software:
Delete the following sections.
• Section 13311.2.3
• Section 13311.2.7.J
• Section 13311.2.10
5. Volume 2- Drawings:
Replace drawings G-15, 20-M-2, 20-E-1, 50-SM-1, 50-SM-3, E-2 and E-6 with the attached drawings marked Addendum 2 7/28/23.
Dated: July 28, 2023
Chuck Aukland
City Engineer
Bidders SHALL acknowledge receipt via email of all Addenda to the CITY OF REDDING PRIOR TO BID OPENING. Failure to acknowledge receipt via email of all addenda shall cause the bid to be non-responsive and may be rejected.
Please Email [email protected]
Copy and paste in the Subject line: Acknowledgement of Addendum No. 2, Well 12 Water Treatment Plant, B/S No. 5381. Type your name and business name in the email text box.
Packet Pg. 1021 Attachment: Addendum 2 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) PI
PI
PI
M
PI
6"x3" ECC RDCR
PI
PI
ANALYZER
CHLORINE
M
CELL 1 CELL 2 CELL 3
VALVE, TYP
AIR RELEASE
GREENSAND FILTER
1" DR
NOTES:
1. DITCH
TO DRAIN
DISTRIBUTION
TO
FLOW CONTROL VALVE EW12_GTV_01120
10" RW
FLOW STREAM IDENTIFICATION
1 1/2" FW
WELL 12 PUMP
(2330 GPM)
6" SW
6" SW
6" SW
M M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
12" RW12" RW12" RW
12" RW 4" DR
D G-16
BACKWASH RECLAIM TANK
(125,000 GALLONS NOMINAL)
12" BWW
FLOWMETER
BACKWASH RECLAIM PUMP
12" BWW
14" OF
TO GROUND
COLLECTOR
FLOATING SUPERNATANT
4" DR
3/8" FECL
4" REC
STORAGE TANK
FROM FECL
METER
FLOW
RDCR
4"x1-1/2"
RDCR
6"x2" ECC
EW12_FIT_01120
FLOW METER
MAGNETIC
12" FW
12"BYP
12"x6" RDCR TEE
REDUCER
12"x10"
6"x4" RDCR
6" SW
EW12_GTV_08110 EW12_GTV_08100
EW12_BFV_08130
EW12_BFV_04150
EW12_BFV_05120
EW12_PMP_04160
04160
EW12_BFV_04160
EW12_BFV_04170
EW12_BFV_05110
EW12_BFV_06130 05100
EW12_BFV_02150
EW12_MXR_02130
MIXER
EW12_FLT_04100
02140
EW12_BFV_02120
EW12_GTV_01100
EW12_CHV_01100
01110
EW12_GTV_01120
01100
EW12_PMP_01100
EW12_FIT_02170
02170
EW12_BFV_02170
EW12_CHV_02170
EW12_FCV_06140
FLOW CONTROL VALVE
EW12_FIT_06150
EW12_TNK_06170
EW12_PLV_06180
2. EW12_PMP_02170
EW12_BFV_02160
EW12_RPP_04160
VENT
8" PTW
EW12_GTV_01130
EW12_GTV_01140
MAX WS EL 521.35
DPIT
04110
8" PTW
3/4" RW
ANALYZER
TURBIDITY
12" RW
EW12_BFV_05130
S
V VENT
SW SURFACE WASH
SLD SLUDGE
SHC SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE
SFM SEWER FORCE MAIN
SD STORM DRAIN
SA SAMPLE
RW RAW WATER
REC BACKWASH RECYCLE
PTW PUMP TO WASTE
OF OVER FLOW
FW FINISHED WATER
FTW FILTER-TO-WASTE
FECL FERRIC CHLORIDE
DR DRAIN
BYP BYPASS
BWW BACKWASH WASTE
ALL TAG NOS SHALL CONTAIN PREFIX EW12_.
GREENSAND FILTER SYSTEM SUPPLIER.
INDICATES EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY
12" FW
FHY
6" SW
SURFACE WASH PUMP
12" BWW
12"BYP
4" REC
6" REC
S
EW12_GTV_06160
EW12_GTV_01150
BOARD
GAUGE
EW12_RPP_08120
FW USE
TO BOOSTER PUMP
E G-16
FROM CHLORINE INJECTOR
3/4" CS
C G-16
EW12_BFV_04180 EW12_BFV_04190
12" BWW12" BWW
12" BWW
EW12_BFV_04120 EW12_BFV_04130 EW12_BFV_04140
EW12_BFV_06100 EW12_BFV_06110 EW12_BFV_06120
8" PTW
EW12_GTV_01160
EW12_PRV_01160
RELIEF VALVE
PRESSURE
SET TO 150 PSI
6" PTW
1" SA
4" SLD
B
A
G-16
G-16
4" DR
CONTAINERS
FILTER ROLL-OFF
TO SLUDGE
TO SEWER
G-15
15 NTS
A-32477 PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM NO. 1 S KADER J MARTIN
PIPE SECTION
REMOVABLE
3/4" CS
Drink ng
t
i W
r
SHEET
ORIGINAL SCALE:
DATE:
OF
CITY OF REDDING
ORIGINAL SCALE IN INCHES
0 2 1
DESIGNED BYDRAWN BYCITY OF REDDING RECORD DRAWING DATE
93 JOB NO. 2422 BID SCH NO. 5381 PUBLIC WORKS
DEPARTMENT
DRAWING NUMBER: ARSENIC/IRON/MANGANESE WTP WELL 12
MAY 2023
LIVI
C
REDAK.AIMAS
NEER
GI
NELAN IOSSEFORP DERETSIGER
AINR OFILAC FO ETATS
No. C56653
** EW12_CKV_06140 2 ADDENDUM 2 7/28/23
2 2
Packet Pg. 1022 Attachment: Addendum 2 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) EL 503.53
CL EL 506.16
4" REC
12" FW
SEE DWG Y-1
FOR CONT
SEE Y-1, TYP ALL
CONTINUATION
12" FW FOR
SEE DWG Y-1, TYP ALL
12" FW FOR CONT
SPECIFICATION 15010.
SUBMIT DESIGN FOR PIPING SUPPORT PER
VISUAL PURPOSES ONLY. CONTRACTOR TO
3. PIPE SUPPORTS DEPICTED IN DRAWING ARE FOR
MANUFACTURER.
OF GREENSAND FILTER FACE PIPING WITH FILTER
2. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION
SYSTEM SUPPLIER.
1. EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY GREENSAND FILTER
NOTES:
12" RW
TYP
12" RFCA,
6" SW
12" RW FILTERS
GREENSAND
12" RW TO
BUILDING
MECHANICAL
BUILDING
MECHANICAL
BUILDING
MECHANICAL
BUILDING
MECHANICAL
EL 503.53 VARIES
RFCA
TYP
CL EL 508.14
TYP
D SECTION
--- 3/8" = 1'-0"
PIPE, TYP
12" FLG X GC
TYP
GROOVED CAP,
GC WITH
TYP
GREENSAND FILTERS
12" FW FROM
CL EL 509.82
CL EL 504.57
CL EL 507.25
CL EL 505.05
EL 503.53
WITH 3/4" FECL TUBING
2" PVC CARRIER PIPE
CL EL 500.76
NOTE 3
TYP, SEE
EW12_PMP_02170
RECLAIM PUMP
BACKWASH
0 4
SCALE 3/8"=1'-0"
2 2 FEET
CL EL 514.95
1" SA
EW12_BFV_05110
TYP OF 2
1" SA
6" x 3" ECC RDCR
EW12_RPP_04160
PREVENTER
BACKFLOW
02170
INS-01
15006
20-BS-2
DUCTING, SEE
COOLER AND
EVAPORATIVE
15006
15000 15350
15000A
15006
15120A
15000A
15006
CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE
BYPASSING FILTER,
TO BE INSTALLED WHEN
12" GROOVED END INSERT
TYP ALL
1" ARV-03
15102
TYP ALL
B SECTION
20-M-1 3/8" = 1'-0"
3200A
15010
A SECTION
20-M-1 3/8" = 1'-0"
C SECTION
20-M-1 3/8" = 1'-0"
W 3/8" FECL TUBING
2" PVC CARRIER PIPE
1" ARV-03
20-M-2
41 AS SHOWN
A-32503 S KADER J MARTIN
FILENAME:1507D-20M201.dgn PLOT DATE:12/22/2015 10:17:33 PM MECHANICAL BUILDING SECTIONS
FILTERS
GREENSAND
6" SW TO
CL EL 509.81
CL EL 506.20
2" FW
CL EL 507.05
CL EL 512.38
CL EL 512.81
CL EL 506.22
TYP
PUMP EW12_PMP_04160
SURFACE WASH
3/4" HSV (BEHIND)
HOSE RACK
FF EL 503.55
EW12_RPP_08120
CL EL 512.05
CL EL 506.02
12" BWW
12" FTW
CL EL 507.05
12" BWW
6" REC
04160, TYP ALL
CL EL 499.50
12" BWW
CL EL 499.10
6" REC
CL EL 507.25
6" SW
CL EL 500.33
6" x 4" RDCR
EW12_BFV_04150
15120B
EW12_PMP_02170
RECLAIM PUMP
BACKWASH
EW12_CHV_02170
EW12_BFV_02170
EW12_FIT_02170
EW12_BFV_05120
12" RFCA
EW12_FIT_06150
EW12_RPP_04160
EW12_BFV_05130
EW12_BFV_02120
05100
FF EL 503.55
CL EL 500.33
2" FW
CL EL 499.83
2" FW
CL EL 500.33
2" FW
CL EL 500.76
12" FW
RFCA
12" RW
02140
EW12_MXR_02130
EW12_BFV_06100
EW12_BFV_06110
EW12_BFV_04120
EW12_BFV_04130
EW12_BFV_04140
EW12_BFV_06120
EW12_BFV_06130 EW12_BFV_05120
EW12_BFV_04120
EW12_BFV_04160
EW12_BFV_06100
EW12_BFV_06140
EW12_BFV_04160
CL EL 505.05
CL EL 500.33
2" FW
12" FW
6" SW
2" FW
15310
15230
15200D
15205
EW12_BFV_04150
RFCA
PUMP EW12_PMP_04160
SURFACE WASH
RFCA
EW12_BFV_02160
4" DR
3/8" FECL
2" FW
3/8" FECL
EW12_BFV_02150
1" ARV-03
Drink ng
t
i W
r
SHEET
ORIGINAL SCALE:
DATE:
OF
CITY OF REDDING
ORIGINAL SCALE IN INCHES
0 2 1
DESIGNED BYDRAWN BYCITY OF REDDING RECORD DRAWING DATE
93 JOB NO. 2422 BID SCH NO. 5381 PUBLIC WORKS
DEPARTMENT
DRAWING NUMBER: ARSENIC/IRON/MANGANESE WTP WELL 12
MAY 2023
LIVI
C
REDAK.AIMAS
NEER
GI
NELAN IOSSEFORP DERETSIGER
AINR OFILAC FO ETATS
No. C56653
EW12_CKV_06140
*
2 2 ADDENDUM 2 7/28/23 Packet Pg. 1023 Attachment: Addendum 2 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Drink ng
t
i W
r
SHEET
ORIGINAL SCALE:
DATE:
OF
CITY OF REDDING
ORIGINAL SCALE IN INCHES
0 2 1
DESIGNED BYDRAWN BYCITY OF REDDING RECORD DRAWING DATE
93 JOB NO. 2422 BID SCH NO. 5381 PUBLIC WORKS
DEPARTMENT
DRAWING NUMBER: ARSENIC/IRON/MANGANESE WTP WELL 12
MAY 2023
RECLAIM PUMP
BACKWASH
LOCATION
20-M-2 FOR
REFER TO DWG
2 20-E-1
MCC-12A
P100
MATCHLINE: SEE DWG 40-E-1 FOR CONTINUATION
MATCHLINE: SEE DWG 30-E-1 FOR CONTINUATION MATCHLINE: SEE DWG 10-E-1 FOR CONTINUATION
WASH PUMP
SURFACE
1 20-E-1
J J
3/4"C - 2PR #16TWSH 3/4"C - 3#12, 1#12G
PANEL
CONTROL
FILTER
J J
3/4"C - 6#12, 1#12G
PANEL
CONTROL
FILTER
J J
1-1/4"C - 30#14
PANEL
CONTROL
FILTER
1"C - 20#14
CONDUIT BLOCK DIAGAM
20-E-1
1 NONE
CONDUIT BLOCK DIAGAM
20-E-1
2 NONE
(TYP 3)
3/4"C - 10#14
(TYP 3)
3/4"C - 3#12, 1#12G
(TYP 2)
3/4"C - 10#14
(TYP 2)
3/4"C - 3#12, 1#12G
#16TWSH (TYP 2)
3/4"C - 1PR
(TYP 2)
3/4"C - 2#12, 1#12G
J J
1-1/4"C - 30#14
PANEL
CONTROL
FILTER
(TYP 3)
3/4"C - 10#14
(TYP 3)
3/4"C - 3#12, 1#12G
2 0 2 4
SCALE 1/2"=1'-0"
FEET
PNL-LA
FOR CONTINUATION
REFER TO DWG E-2
FOR CONTINUATION
REFER TO DWG E-2
MIXER
P611, C610
S702, C702
S701, C701
P703, P704
P701, P702
S400
C100, C403
S700
P403
P403, C403
LA-10,12
LA-6, 8
PNL-DP
P800
PANEL
CONTROL
FILTER
C611, S611
P610
SEE
13405
WATER HEATER
3/4"C - 3#12, 1#12G
COOLER
EVAPORATIVE
PNL-DP PNL-DP
2. REFER TO SCHEDULE ON DRAWING E-7.
1. REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWING 20-M-2 FOR VALVE LOCATIONS.
NOTES:
REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWING 20-M-2 FOR FLOWMETER LOCATIONS.
NOTE:
PNL-DP
LA-5, 7
C501
LA-17
CONTINUATION
30-E-1 FOR
REFER TO DWG
CONTINUATION
FOR
DWG 40-E-1
REFER TO
CONTINUATION
10-E-1 FOR
REFER TO DWG
34, 36
DP-32,
P604
P600
19, 21, 23
LA-11, 13, 15,
P500, C500
P300, C300
1"C - 3#6, 1#8G
1"C - 9#12, 1#12G 1"C - 9#12, 1#12G
20-E-1
45 AS SHOWN
A-32507 K KERSTETTER A REANTASO
FILENAME:2165D-20E001.dgn PLOT DATE:10/11/2022 2:56:42 PMELECTRICAL POWER & CONTROL PLAN 1/2" = 1'-0"
PLAN
EW12_PMP_02170
EW12_DPIT_04110
EW12_MXR_02130
EW12_FIT_02170 EW12_FIT_06150
EW12_PMP_04160
EW12_VFD_02170
EW12_AIT_15120
EW12_AIT_15130
EW12_BFV_06100
EW12_BFV_04120
EW12_BFV_04130
EW12_BFV_04140 EW12_BFV_06110 EW12_BFV_06120
EW12_FIT_02170 EW12_FIT_06150
EW12_BFV_05110 EW12_BFV_06130
FOR CONTINUATION
REFER TO DWG E-2
(2) 1" C TO UPS ENCLOSURE
SI GER
TERED PROFESSIONAL ENGIN
EER
ST A T E OF CA L FI ORN AI BR AI N G. Y OUNG
No. E20743
06-22-22 S604 ROUTE CONDUITS, SIZES INDICATED ABOVE, UNDER BUILDING TO THE PANELS INDICATED. 2 ADDENDUM 2 7/28/23 2 2
Packet Pg. 1024 Attachment: Addendum 2 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Drink ng
t
i W
r
SHEET
ORIGINAL SCALE:
DATE:
OF
CITY OF REDDING
ORIGINAL SCALE IN INCHES
0 2 1
DESIGNED BYDRAWN BYCITY OF REDDING RECORD DRAWING DATE
93 JOB NO. 2422 BID SCH NO. 5381 PUBLIC WORKS
DEPARTMENT
DRAWING NUMBER: ARSENIC/IRON/MANGANESE WTP WELL 12
MAY 2023
LIVI
C
REDAK.AIMAS
NEER
GI
NELAN IOSSEFORP DERETSIGER
AINR OFILAC FO ETATS
No. C56653
2'-0"
NOTE 1, BELOW
2" x 3/4" RDCR
2 0 2 4
SCALE 1/2"=1'-0"
FEET
1/2" = 1'-0"
TOP PLAN
12" BWW
6" REC
14" FCA
2'-6"
TANK
RECLAIM
BACKWASH
MANWAY
24" SQUARE
SYSTEM PER SPECIFICATION SECTION 13212.
3. INSTALL SACRIFICIAL ANODE CATHODIC PROTECTION
2. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 15120.
AND FULL TANK.
SHALL NOT EXCEED 2,000 PSF WITH SNOW LOAD
GROSS ALLOWABLE SOIL BEARING PRESSURE
BE DESIGNED BY THE TANK MANUFACTURER. THE
1. ROOF SUPPORT COLUMN FOOTING. FOOTING SHALL
NOTES:
221-01-0617, NOTE 2
FL x FL FLEXIBLE JOINT
6" FJ RESTRAINT
A
50-SM-2
A
50-SM-2
EXTENTS OF RIP RAP
SEE DWG C-3 FOR
SECTION 02390,
SPECIFICATION
RIP RAP PER
A
50-SM-2
50-SM-1
60 AS NOTED
A-32522 S KADER J MARTIN
FILENAME:1507D-50SM101.dgn PLOT DATE:12/23/2015 12:51:05 PM BACKWASH RECLAIM TANK PLAN 24" X 46" ACCESS HATCH
15201A
15205
4'-0"
N 9403.31
E 9544.54
B
50-SM-3
TYP
TYP
2" FW
4" SLD
TYP
3200D
TYP
2'-6"
TYP ALL
SEE DWG Y-1
FOR CONTINUATION
EW12_TNK_06170
45°
37°
8°
45°
2" FW
RAILING
SAFETY CAGE AND
SAFETY CLIMB DEVICE,
OSHA LADDER WITH
TANK MFR
ANCHORS AS REQD BY
TANK, PROVIDE ADDL
SPACED EQUALLY AROUND
(10) MIN ANCHOR BOLTS
W/ GAUGE BOARD
LIQUID LEVEL INDICATOR
SEE DWG Y-1
FOR CONTINUATION
1" FW
4'-6"
221-01-0416, NOTE 2
FL x FL FLEXIBLE JOINT
4" FJ RESTRAINT
EW12_PLV_06180
C
50-SM-3
32'-3"DIA
0'-1"
12" FLANGED
NOZZLE IN TANK
ROOF
PIPE SUPPORT
2 ADDENDUM 2 7/28/23
2 Packet Pg. 1025 Attachment: Addendum 2 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Drink ng t i W
r
SHEET
ORIGINAL SCALE:
DATE:
OF
CITY OF REDDING
ORIGINAL SCALE IN INCHES
0 2 1
DESIGNED BYDRAWN BYCITY OF REDDING RECORD DRAWING DATE
93 JOB NO. 2422 BID SCH NO. 5381 PUBLIC WORKS
DEPARTMENT
DRAWING NUMBER: ARSENIC/IRON/MANGANESE WTP WELL 12
MAY 2023LIVI C REDAK.AIMAS NEER GI NELAN IOSSEFORP DERETSIGER AINR OFILAC FO ETATSNo. C56653 EAVE HEIGHT, NOTE 1
EL 528.10 NOMINAL
2024
SCALE 1/2"=1'-0"
FEET
C SECTION
50-SM-1 1/2" = 1'-0"
HOSE.
3. PROVIDE 12'-0 OF 6" FLEXIBLE BRAIED PVC
SECTION 13212.
PROTECTION SYSTEM PER SPECIFICATION
2. INSTALL SACRIFICIAL ANODE CATHODIC
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS.
REQUIREMENTS OF AWWA D103-09 SEISMIC
ROOF FRAMING TO MEET THE FREEBOARD
1. PROVIDE A TANK SIDESHELL HEIGHT AND
NOTES:
EXTENTS OF RIP RAP
SEE DWG C-3 FOR
SECTION 02390,
SPECIFICATION
RIP RAP PER
50-SM-3
62 AS SHOWN
A-32524 S KADER J MARTIN
FILENAME:1507D-50SM102.dgn PLOT DATE:12/23/2015 12:50:00 PM BACKWASH RECLAIM TANK SECTION VARIES
1 1
3'-0"
1 1
TOC EL 504.10
AVG WSE 517.24
MIN WSE 505.60
TANK
BACKWASH RECLAIM
EW12_TNK_06170
(125,000 GAL NOMINAL)
A SECTION
50-SM-1 1/4"=1'-0"
3305
2'-6" CLR
TANK SHELL BY TANK MFR
CHAIR BY TANK MFR
ANCHOR BOLT AND
BY TANK MFR
TANK BTM
SPLICES
REINF STAGGER
(6) #6 CONT CIRC
3/4" CHAMFER
B SECTION
50-SM-1 1/2"=1'-0"
RELATIVE DENSITY
COMPACTED TO 95%
AGGREGATE BASE
12" LIME TREATED
ASTM D1751
JOINT FILLER,
CANE-FIBER
1/2" THICK
3"
+
#5 STIRRUPS @ 14" 3'-0"
12"
MIN
1'-3"
4048
SCALE 1/4"=1'-0"
FEET
14" FCA
CL EL 499.50
12" BWW
VARIES
15051
W/ (3) #4 EACH WAY
BASE SUPPORT
14" OF
1'-0"
CL EL 520.85
14" OF
4'-0"
12" BWW PIPE SUPPORT (TYP)
5'-0"
MAX
12" FLANGED NOZZLE IN
TANK ROOF
2'-0"
12" ELASTOMER
EXPANSION JOINT WITH
CONTROL RODS
2 ADDENDUM 2 7/28/23 2
Packet Pg. 1026 Attachment: Addendum 2 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
UGE
OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX
OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX OX
UGE
OX
SHEET
ORIGINAL SCALE: DATE: OF 93 MAY 2023JOB NO. 2422 BID SCH NO. 5381 ORIGINAL SCALE IN INCHES 0 2 1 DESIGNED BY DRAWN BY CITY OF REDDING RECORD DRAWING DATE DRAWING NUMBER: Drink n g t i W r
10 0 10 20 FEET
SCALE 1"=10' 0
BACKWASH
RECLAIM TANK
SEE 50-E-1
EXST WELL
BUILDING
FF= 500.35
SEE 10-E-1
MECHANICAL
BUILDING
SEE 20-E-1
SLUDGE FILTER
ROLL OFF CONTAINER,
SEE DWG
70-SM-1 (TYP OF 3)
GREENSAND
FILTER
SEE 30-E-1
CONCRETE
BOLLARDS
TRANSFORMER
PAD
P600 S605
16112
POWER
PULLBOX PB1
TYP 3 S605
P600 NOTE5
SIGNAL PULL
BOX PB2
P002,
NOTE 3
C001
C001
NOTE2
P001,
NOTE 1
TELEPHONE
PULLBOX
NOTE 2
CHEMICAL STORAGE
FACILITY, SEE 40-E-1
RADIO
TOWER
NOTE 4
P601, P602,
C601, C602,
C603
(2) 1"C
UPS
ENCLOSURE
FILTER
CONTROL PANEL
WET AREA
REFERENCE
SHEET G-11 WET AREA
REFERENCE
SHEET G-11
WET AREA
REFERENCE
SHEET G-11
CORROSIVE AREA
REFERENCE
SHEET G-11
WET AREA
REFERENCE
SHEET G-11
WASTE WATER
SAMPLING STATION
PARSHALL FLUME MANHOLE
FOR WASTEWATER FLOW
MEASUREMENT
NOTES
1. ELECTRICAL UTILITY PRIMARY PER REU
REQUIREMENTS. REFERENCE REU DRAWING.
2. PROVIDE NEW CONDUIT, CABLE AND PULLBOX
FOR TELEPHONE TO EXISTING TELEPHONE
TERMINATION BOX AT EXISTING MECHANICAL
BUILDING. COORDINATE REQUIREMENTS WITH
SERVICE PROVIDER.
3. ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICE LATERAL TO
EXISTING MAIN SWITCHBOARD IN EXISTING
MECHANICAL BUILDING PER REU
REQUIREMENTS. REFERENCE REU DRAWING.
4. CITY TO PROVIDE A NEW RADIO TOWER. STUB
UP AND CAP CONDUITS.
5. PROVIDE NEW CONDUIT TO ROLL OFF
CONTAINER AREA FOR AUTO SAMPLER POWER.
6. ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING IN
WET AND CORROSIVE AREAS MUST MEET THE
REQUIREMENTS OF THIS CONTRACT AND THE
RELEVANT PROVISIONS OF THE 2022
CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE. SI GER TERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER ST A T E OF CA L FI ORN AI BR AI N G. Y OUNG No. E20743
06-22-22 2
P604 S604
P604
S604 2 ADDENDUM 2 7/28/23 2
Packet Pg. 1027 Attachment: Addendum 2 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Drink ng
t
i W
r
SHEET
ORIGINAL SCALE:
DATE:
OF
CITY OF REDDING
ORIGINAL SCALE IN INCHES
0 2 1
DESIGNED BYDRAWN BYCITY OF REDDING RECORD DRAWING DATE
93 JOB NO. 2422 BID SCH NO. 5381 PUBLIC WORKS
DEPARTMENT
DRAWING NUMBER: ARSENIC/IRON/MANGANESE WTP WELL 12
MAY 2023
FILENAME:2165D-E006.dgn PLOT DATE:10/11/2022 PLOT TIME:9:39:59 AM E-6
71 AS SHOWN
A-32533 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES K KERSTETTER A REANTASO
SI GER
TERED PROFESSIONAL ENGIN
EER
ST A T E OF CA L FI ORN AI BR AI N G. Y OUNG
No. E20743
06-22-22 P604 PNL-LA CKT 36 20/1 #12 LIT 06230 FLOWMETER LIT 06230 3/4" 2#12, 1#12G S604 FILTER CONTROL PANEL PARSHALL FLUME MANHOLE 3/4" 1PR #16 TWSH EW12_BFV_04170
EW12_BFV_04180
EW12_BFV_04190
EW12_BFV_04170
EW12_BFV_04180
EW12_BFV_04190 DPIT 04110 EW12_MXR_02130 EW12_MXR_02130 EW12_PMP_04160 EW12_PMP_04160 EW12_PMP_04160 STARTER EW12_PMP_02170 EW12_PMP_02170 EW12_VFD_02170 EW12_VFD_02170 EW12_VFD_02170 AIT 15120/AIT 15130 LIT 02160 FeCl METERING PUMP SKID
EW12_PMP_7210
FeCl METERING PUMP SKID
EW12_PMP_7210
(FUTURE) (FUTURE)
2 ADDENDUM 2 7/28/23
2 2
Packet Pg. 1028 Attachment: Addendum 2 (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant)
CITY OF REDDING
REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL
Recommendation
Adopt Resolution approving an amended Appendix A (Designated Positions) to the City of Redding’s Conflict of Interest Code, Redding Municipal Code Chapter 2.90 (Conflict of Interest for designated positions of the City), in compliance with the California Fair Political Practices Commission biennial review requirements.
Fiscal Impact
There is no fiscal impact to the General Fund resulting from this action to comply with Fair Political Practices Commission regulations.
Alternative Action
The City Council (Council) could choose to amend Appendix A and/or B in a different manner; or decline to adopt the Resolution and provide direction to staff.
Background/Analysis
Redding Municipal Code Chapter 2.90 – Conflict of Interest for Designated Positions of the City lists designated positions within City of Redding (City) departments and agencies, boards, commissions, and committees that make or participate in the making of governmental decisions.
Government Code Section 87302 requires that employees in positions involved in making (and/or those who participate in making) decisions that may have a material effect on personal financial interest shall file applicable Statement(s) of Economic Interests. The Political Reform Act requires every local agency to review its conflict of interest code biennially to determine whether the code is accurate or if an amendment is necessary.
MEETING DATE: September 5, 2023
ITEM NO. 4.12(a)
FROM:
***APPROVED BY***
[email protected] [email protected]
SUBJECT: 4.12(a)--Resolution amending the City of Redding's Conflict of Interest Code Sharlene Tipton, City Clerk
Packet Pg. 1029
Report to Redding City Council August 29, 2023
Re: 4.12(a)--Resolution amending City's Conflict of Interest Code Page 2 On June 18, 2022, the Council directed staff to review the City’s Conflict of Interest Code and file a Biennial Report regarding the review, including any necessary revisions. Based on this review, it is recommended that the Conflict of Interest Code Appendix A, the list of designated positions, be amended.
The City Clerk and City Attorney have completed a biennial review, and recommend that the attached resolution be adopted amending Appendix A to the Conflict of Interest Code to accurately reflect designated positions within the City’s jurisdiction.
Environmental Review
This is not a project defined under the California Environmental Quality Act, and no further action is required.
Council Priority/City Manager Goals
• This is a routine operational item.
Attachments
^Resolution
^Exhibit A - Summary of Amendments
^Appendix A - Designated Positions
^Appendix A - strikeout version Designated Positions
^Appendix B - 2023 Final Version
Packet Pg. 1030
RESOLUTION NO. 2023-___
A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF REDDING APPROVING AND ADOPTING AN AMENDED “APPENDIX A” TO THE
CONFLICT OF INTEREST CODE FOR DESIGNATED POSITIONS OF
THE CITY AND THE AGENCIES AND ENTITIES FOR WHICH THE
CITY SERVES AS CODE REVIEWING BODY, PURSUANT TO THE
POLITICAL REFORM ACT OF 1974
WHEREAS, the Legislature of the State of California enacted the Political Reform Act of 1974, Government Code Section 8100, et seq. (the “Act”), which contains provisions relating to conflicts of interest which potentially affect all officers, employees and consultants of the City of Redding (the “City”), and which requires all public agencies to adopt and promulgate a conflict of interest code; and
WHEREAS, the City Council adopted a Conflict of Interest Code (the “Code”), which was last amended on September 18, 2018, in compliance with the Act; and WHEREAS, subsequent changed circumstances within the City have made it advisable and necessary to amend and update the Appendix to the City’s Code pursuant to Sections 87306 and 87307 of the Act; and
WHEREAS, the potential penalties for violation of the provisions of the Act are substantial and may include criminal and civil liability, as well as equitable relief which could result in the City being restrained or prevented from acting in cases where the provisions of the Act may have been violated; and
WHEREAS, Ordinance No. 2426, adopted on December 16, 2008, ordained that Redding Municipal Code Title 2, Chapter 2.90 - Conflict of Interest for Designated Positions of the City, Section 2.90.020, Appendix A and Appendix B, be periodically updated by resolution of the City Council and shall constitute the Conflict Interest Code of the City and for each agency for which the City serves as the Code Reviewing Body; NOW, THEREFORE, IT IS HEREBY RESOLVED by the City Council that “Appendix A” of the City’s Conflict of Interest Code be amended, as attached and made a part hereof by reference, to accurately reflect designated positions and disclosure categories within the City’s jurisdiction.
Packet Pg. 1031 Attachment: ^Resolution (4.12(a)--Resolution amending City's Conflict of Interest Code) I HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing resolution was introduced and adopted at a regular meeting of the City Council of the City of Redding on the 5th day of September, 2023, by the following vote:
AYES: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
NOES: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
ABSTAIN: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
ABSENT: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
________________________________
MICHAEL DACQUISTO, Mayor
ATTEST: APPROVED AS TO FORM:
______________________________ ________________________________ SHARLENE TIPTON, City Clerk BARRY E. DeWALT, City Attorney Packet Pg. 1032 Attachment: ^Resolution (4.12(a)--Resolution amending City's Conflict of Interest Code)
ASSIGNED
TITLE JOB DISCLOSURE
CITY DEPT/COMMISSION/AGENCY CHANGE ADDITION DELETION CODE POSITION TITLE CATEGORY City Clerk
x 231/232 Management Analyst I/II 1
City Manager
x 75 Airports Manager 1
x 166 Purchasing Officer 1
x 175 Management Assistant to City Manager 1
x 202 Transit Manager 2,3,4,6,7
x 209 Assistant Airports Manager 2,3,4
x 238 Buyer 2,3,4
x 239 Senior Buyer 2,3,4
x 231/232 Management Analyst I/II 2,3,4,6,7
City Treasurer/Finance
x 105 Assistant Finance Officer 1
x 152 Financial Management Specialist 1
x 166 Purchasing Officer 1
x 231/232 Management Analyst I/II 1
x 238 Buyer 2,3,4
x 239 Senior Buyer 2,3,4
Community Services
x 50 Assistant Director of Community Services 1
x 51 Communications Manager 5
x 146 Senior Project Coordinator - Community Services 5 x 169 Recreation Superintendent 5
Electric Utility
x 41 Electric Program Supervisor - Meter Shop 2,3,4,6
x 54 Cyper Security Officer 1
x 58 Electric Program Supervisor - Operational Technology 2,3,4,6 x 59 Electric Program Supervisor - Power Production 2,3,4,6 x 61 Electric Manager - Energy Management 1
x 62 Electric Program Supervisor - Transmission & Distribution 2,3,4,6 x 63 Electric Manager - Customer Services and Metering 1 x 66 Compliance Officer 1
x 67 Electric Manager - Technology 1
x 68 Operations/Compliance Engineer 2,3,4,6
x 83 Electric Manager - Engineering 1
x 84 Electric Manager - Operations 1
x 87 Electrical Engineering Superivisor 2,3,4,6
x 118 Associate Civil Engineer 3,4,6
x 137 Energy Trader 2
x 155 Electric Utility Senior Project Engineer 2,3,4,6
x 181 Senior Electric Utility Distribution Planner/System Inspector 2,3,4,6 x 195 Electric Utility Associate Resource Planner 2
x 253 Electric Utility Senior System Operator - Transmission and Distribution 2 x 254 Power Pre-scheduler 2
x 255 Electric Utility Analyst 2
x 260 Electric Utility Senior Resource Planner 2
x 273 Electric Program Supervisor - Vegetation Management 2,3,4,6 x 274 Electric Program Supervisor - Customer Programs 2,3,4,6 x 275 Electric Program Supervisor - Customer Service 2,3,4,6 x 276 Electric Program Supervisor - Compliance 2,3,4,6
x 277 Electric Program Supervisor - Settlements 2,3,4,6 x 278 Electric Program Supervisor - Financial Services 2,3,4,6 Information Technology
x 94 Director of Information Technology/Chief Information Officer 1 x 182 Geographic Information Systems Manager 1
x 230 Assoc Project Coordinator - Technical 1
x 231/232 Management Analyst I/II 1
Personnel
x 65 Personnel Director 1
x 95 Personnel Manager 1
x 241 Office Services Supervisor 1
Public Works
x 74 Construction Manager 3,4,6
x 75 Airports Manager 1
x 124 Senior Civil Engineer 3,4,6
x 167 Safety Specialist 3,4,6
x 209 Assistant Airports Manager 2,3,4
x 226 Assistant Project Coordinator - Technical 1
x 231/232 Management Analyst I/II 1
Redding Area Bus Authority (RABA)
x 12 Assistant City Manager 1
x 20 Director of Public Works 1
x 106 Assistant Director of Public Works 1
x 202 Transit Manager 1
Redding Housing Authority (RHA)
x 12 Assistant City Manager 1
x 138 Planning/Community Development Manager 1
x 231 Management Analyst I 2,3,4,6,7
PROPOSED CHANGES TO CONFLICT OF INTEREST CODE APPENDIX A CITY OF REDDING DESIGNATED POSITIONS - 2023
EXHIBIT A
Packet Pg. 1033 Attachment: ^Exhibit A - Summary of Amendments (4.12(a)--Resolution amending City's Conflict of Interest Code) Appendix A
DESIGNATED POSITIONS
City of Redding - 2023
City Dept/Division
Assigned
Disclosure Category
City Attorney
134 Assistant City Attorney II 1
135 Assistant City Attorney I 1
151 Deputy City Attorney 1
090 Risk Manager 1
City Clerk
096 City Clerk 1
098 Administrator of the Office of the City Clerk 1
109 Reprographics Manager 2,3,4
187 Assistant City Clerk 1
231/232 Management Analyst I/II 1
City Manager
012 Assistant City Manager 1
018 Deputy City Manager 1
075 Airports Manager 1
175 Management Assistant to City Manager 1
202 Transit Manager 2,3,4,6,7
209 Assistant Airports Manager 2,3,4
231/232 Management Analyst I/II 2,3,4,6,7
City Treasurer/Finance
60 Finance Officer 1
64 Director of Finance 1
099 Administrator of the Office of the City Treasurer 1 166 Purchasing Officer 1
188 Deputy City Treasurer 1
231/232 Management Analyst I/II 1
238 Buyer 2,3,4
239 Senior Buyer 2,3,4
Community Services
050 Assistant Director of Community Services 1
051 Communications Manager 5
052 Director of Community Services 1
092 Parks & Facilities Manager 1
146 Senior Project Coordinator - Community Services 5
160 Facility Supervisor 5
165 Parks Superintendent 5
169 Recreation Superintendent 5
Development Services
043 Director of Development Services 1
071 Asst Director of Development Services/Building Official 1 119 Senior Planner 1
138 Planning Manager/Community Development Manager 1
211 Code Enforcement Supervisor 1
222 Development Services Supervisor 1
Job Code / Position / Title
Packet Pg. 1034 Attachment: ^Appendix A - Designated Positions (4.12(a)--Resolution amending City's Conflict of Interest Code) Appendix A
DESIGNATED POSITIONS
City of Redding - 2023
City Dept/Division
Assigned
Job Code / Position / Title Disclosure Category
Electric Utility
030 Director of Electric Utility 1
031 Assistant Director-Electric Utility 1
041 Electric Program Supervisor - Meter Shop 2,3,4,6
054 Cyber Security Officer 1
058 Electric Program Supervisor - Operational Technology 2,3,4,6 059 Electric Program Supervisor - Power Production 2,3,4,6 061 Electric Manager - Energy Management 1
062 Electric Program Supervisor - Transmission & Distribution 2,3,4,6 063 Electric Manager - Customer Services and Metering 1 066 Compliance Officer 1
067 Electric Manager - Technology 1
068 Operations/Compliance Engineer 2,3,4,6
069 Electric Manager-Financial 1
076 Electric Manager-Power Production 1
077 Electric Manager-Line 1
078 Electric Program Supervisor-Line 2,3,4,6
080 Electric Program Supervisor-Substations 2,3,4,6
081 Electric Manager 1
082 Electric Program Supervisor 2,3,4,6
083 Electric Manager - Engineering 1
084 Electric Manager - Operations 1
086 Electric Manager-Resources 1
087 Electrical Engineering Supervisor 2,3,4,6
088 Electric Program Supervisor-Energy Management 2,3,4,6 089 Electric Program Supervisor-Service Planning 2,3,4,6 116 Electric Utility Resource Planner 2
120 Safety and Environmental Compliance Coordinator 2
155 Electric Utility Senior Project Engineer 2,3,4,6
181 Senior Electric Utility Distribution Planner/System Inspector
2,3,4,6
195 Electric Utility Associate Resource Planner 2
253 Electric Utility Senior System Operator -
Transmission and Distribution
2 255 Electric Utility Analyst 2
260 Electric Utility Senior Resource Planner 2
273 Electric Program Supervisor - Vegetation
Management
2,3,4,6
274 Electric Program Supervisor - Customer Programs 2,3,4,6 275 Electric Program Superivsor - Customer Service 2,3,4,6 276 Electric Program Supervisor - Compliance 2,3,4,6
277 Electric Program Supervisor - Settlements 2,3,4,6
278 Electric Program Supervisor - Financial Services 2,3,4,6 308 Electric Utility Senior System Operator - Power 2
311 Electric Utility System Operator-Power 2
Fire
040 Fire Chief 1
042 Deputy Fire Chief 1
126 Battalion Chief/Division Chief 1
133 Battalion Chief-Shift 2,3
164 Assistant Fire Marshal 1
Packet Pg. 1035 Attachment: ^Appendix A - Designated Positions (4.12(a)--Resolution amending City's Conflict of Interest Code) Appendix A
DESIGNATED POSITIONS
City of Redding - 2023
City Dept/Division
Assigned
Job Code / Position / Title Disclosure Category
Information Technology
094 Director of Information Technology/Chief Information Officer 1 182 Geographic Information Systems Manager 1
230 Assoc Project Coordinator Technical 1
231/232 Management Analyst I/II 1
Personnel
056 Senior Personnel Analyst 1
065 Personnel Director 1
090 Risk Manager 1
095 Personnel Manager 1
215 Personnel Analyst II/Volunteer Coordinator 1
Police
035 Chief of Police 1
114 Police Captain 2
Public Works
020 Director of Public Works 1
072 Environmental Compliance Manager 3,4,6
074 Construction Manager 3,4,6
093 Deputy Director of Public Works 1
106 Assistant Director of Public Works 1
124 Senior Civil Engineer 3,4,6
125 Street Maintenance Superintendent 1
130 Fleet Manager 2
167 Safety Specialist 3,4,6
216 City Surveyor 1
226 Assistant Project Coordinator - Technical 1
231/232 Management Analyst I/II 1
252 Municipal Utility Manager-Water/Wastewater System 2 252 Municipal Utility Manager-Solid Waste 2
City Agencies Assigned Disclosure
Category per Agency's
Adopted Code
Redding Area Bus Authority (RABA)
011 City Manager 1
012 Assistant City Manager 1
064 Director of Finance 1
099 City Treasurer 1
202 Transit Manager 1
Board Members 1
* Consultants 1
General Counsel 1
Redding Capital Services Corporation (RCSC)
011 City Manager 1
064 Director of Finance 1
Board Members 1
* Consultants 1
General Counsel 1
Packet Pg. 1036 Attachment: ^Appendix A - Designated Positions (4.12(a)--Resolution amending City's Conflict of Interest Code) Appendix A
DESIGNATED POSITIONS
City of Redding - 2023
City Dept/Division
Assigned
Job Code / Position / Title Disclosure Category
Redding Housing Authority (RHA)
011 City Manager 1
012 Assistant City Manager 1
138 Planning/Community Development Manager 1
064 Director of Finance 1
099 City Treasurer 1
103 Housing Manager 2,3,4,6,7
173 Housing Program Supervisor 2,3,4,6,7
210 Senior Housing Specialist 2,3,4,6
231/232 Management Analyst I/II 2,3,4,6
Commissioners 1
* Consultants 1
General Counsel 1
Housing Administrator (City Manager Designee) 1
Redding Joint Powers Financing Authority (RJPFA)
011 City Manager 1
064 Director of Finance 1
Board Members 1
* Consultants 1
General Counsel 1
Redding Municipal Library Board
052 Director of Community Services 1
064 Director of Finance 1
Board of Trustees Member(s) 1
* Consultant-Library Systems & Services, LLC (LLSI) 1
Executive Director 1
General Counsel 1
City of Redding as Successor Agency to the Redding Redevelopment Agency 011 City Manager 1
012 Assistant City Manager 1
064 Director of Finance 1
099 City Treasurer 1
Agency Member(s) 1
General Counsel 1
City Boards/Commissions/Committees
Member-Administrative Hearings Board 1
Member-Board of Administrative Review 3,4,6
Member-Community Development Advisory Committee 1
Member-Community Services Advisory Commission 5
Member-Shasta Public Library Citizens Advisory Committee 8 Consultants*
William Avery Associates 1
Library Systems & Services, LLC (LSSI) 1
George Hills Company, Inc. & Local Representative 1
*Consultants shall be included in the list of designated employees and shall disclose pursuant to the broadest disclosure category in the Conflict of Interest Code, subject to the following limitations:
The City Manager, or designee, may determine in writing that a particular consultant, although a "designated position," is hired to perform a range of duties that are limited in scope, and thus is not required to fully comply with the disclosure requirements described in this section. Such written determination shall include a description of the consultant's duties and, based upon that description, a statement of the extent of disclosure requirements. The determination of the City Manager, or designee, is a public record and shall be retained for public inspection in the same manner and locations as this Conflict of Interest Code.
Packet Pg. 1037 Attachment: ^Appendix A - Designated Positions (4.12(a)--Resolution amending City's Conflict of Interest Code) Appendix A
DESIGNATED POSITIONS
City of Redding - 2023
City Dept/Division
Assigned
Disclosure Category
City Attorney
134 Assistant City Attorney II 1
135 Assistant City Attorney I 1
151 Deputy City Attorney 1
090 Risk Manager 1
City Clerk
096 City Clerk 1
098 Administrator of the Office of the City Clerk 1
109 Reprographics Manager 2,3,4
187 Assistant City Clerk 1
231/232 Management Analyst I/II 1
City Manager
012 Assistant City Manager 1
018 Deputy City Manager 1
075 Airports Manager 1
166 Purchasing Officer 1
175 Management Assistant to City Manager 1
202 Transit Manager 2,3,4,6,7
209 Assistant Airports Manager 2,3,4
238 Buyer 2,3,4
239 Senior Buyer 2,3,4
231/232 Management Analyst I/II 2,3,4,6,7
City Treasurer/Finance
60 Finance Officer 1
64 Director of Finance 1
099 Administrator of the Office of the City Treasurer 1 105 Assistant Finance Officer 1
152 Financial Management Specialist 1
166 Purchasing Officer 1
188 Deputy City Treasurer 1
231/232 Management Analyst I/II 1
238 Buyer 2,3,4
239 Senior Buyer 2,3,4
Community Services
050 Assistant Director of Community Services 1
051 Communications Manager 5
052 Director of Community Services 1
092 Parks & Facilities Manager 1
146 Senior Project Coordinator - Community Services 5
160 Facility Supervisor 5
165 Parks Superintendent 5
169 Recreation Superintendent 5
Development Services
043 Director of Development Services 1
071 Asst Director of Development Services/Building Official 1 119 Senior Planner 1
138 Planning Manager/Community Development Manager 1
211 Code Enforcement Supervisor 1
222 Development Services Supervisor 1
Job Code / Position / Title
Packet Pg. 1038 Attachment: ^Appendix A - strikeout version Designated Positions (4.12(a)--Resolution amending City's Conflict of Interest Code) Appendix A
DESIGNATED POSITIONS
City of Redding - 2023
City Dept/Division
Assigned
Job Code / Position / Title Disclosure Category
Electric Utility
030 Director of Electric Utility 1
031 Assistant Director-Electric Utility 1
041 Electric Program Supervisor - Meter Shop 2,3,4,6
054 Cyber Security Officer 1
058 Electric Program Supervisor - Operational
Technology
2,3,4,6
059 Electric Program Supervisor - Power Production 2,3,4,6 061 Electric Manager - Energy Management 1
062 Electric Program Supervisor - Transmission &
Distribution
2,3,4,6
063 Electric Manager - Customer Services and Metering 1 066 Compliance Officer 1
067 Electric Manager - Technology 1
068 Operations/Compliance Engineer 2,3,4,6
069 Electric Manager-Financial 1
076 Electric Manager-Power Production 1
077 Electric Manager-Line 1
078 Electric Program Supervisor-Line 2,3,4,6
080 Electric Program Supervisor-Substations 2,3,4,6
081 Electric Manager 1
082 Electric Program Supervisor 2,3,4,6
083 Electric Manager - Engineering (E&O) 1
084 Electric Manager-Engineering Operations 1
086 Electric Manager-Resources 1
087 Senior Electrical Engineer Electrical Engineering
Supervisor
2,3,4,6
088 Electric Program Supervisor-Energy Management 2,3,4,6 089 Electric Program Supervisor-Service Planning 2,3,4,6 116 Electric Utility Resource Planner 2
118 Associate Civil Engineer 3,4,6
120 Safety and Environmental Compliance Coordinator 2
137 Energy Trader 2
155 Electric Utility Project Coordinator Electric Utility Senior Project Engineer
2,3,4,6
181 Senior Distribution Planner Senior Electric Utility Distribution Planner/System Inspector
2,3,4,6
195 Electric Utility Associate Resource Planner 2
253 Electric Utility Senior System Operator -
Transmission and Distribution
2 254 Power Pre-scheduler 2
255 Electric Utility Analyst 2
260 Electric Utility Senior Resource Planner 2
273 Electric Program Supervisor - Vegetation
Management
2,3,4,6
274 Electric Program Supervisor - Customer Programs 2,3,4,6 275 Electric Program Superivsor - Customer Service 2,3,4,6 276 Electric Program Supervisor - Compliance 2,3,4,6
277 Electric Program Supervisor - Settlements 2,3,4,6
278 Electric Program Supervisor - Financial Services 2,3,4,6 308 Electric Utility Senior System Operator - Power 2
311 Electric Utility System Operator-Power 2
Packet Pg. 1039 Attachment: ^Appendix A - strikeout version Designated Positions (4.12(a)--Resolution amending City's Conflict of Interest Code) Appendix A
DESIGNATED POSITIONS
City of Redding - 2023
City Dept/Division
Assigned
Job Code / Position / Title Disclosure Category
Fire
040 Fire Chief 1
042 Deputy Fire Chief 1
126 Battalion Chief/Division Chief 1
133 Battalion Chief-Shift 2,3
164 Assistant Fire Marshal 1
Information Technology
094 Director of Information Technology/Chief Information Officer 1 182 Geographic Information Systems Manager 1
230 Assoc Project Coordinator Technical 1
231/232 Management Analyst I/II 1
Personnel
056 Senior Personnel Analyst 1
065 Director of Personnel Personnel Director 1
090 Risk Manager 1
095 Personnel Manager 1
215 Personnel Analyst II/Volunteer Coordinator 1
241 Office Services Supervisor 1
Police
035 Chief of Police 1
114 Police Captain 2
Public Works
020 Director of Public Works 1
072 Environmental Compliance Manager 3,4,6
074 Construction Manager 3,4,6
075 Airports Manager 1
093 Deputy Director of Public Works 1
106 Assistant Director of Public Works 1
124 Project Coordinator Senior Civil Engineer 3,4,6
125 Street Maintenance Superintendent 1
130 Fleet Manager 2
167 Safety Specialist 3,4,6
209 Assistant Airports Manager 2,3,4
216 City Surveyor 1
226 Assistant Project Coordinator - Technical 1
231/232 Management Analyst I/II 1
252 Municipal Utility Manager-Water/Wastewater System 2 252 Municipal Utility Manager-Solid Waste 2
Packet Pg. 1040 Attachment: ^Appendix A - strikeout version Designated Positions (4.12(a)--Resolution amending City's Conflict of Interest Code) Appendix A
DESIGNATED POSITIONS
City of Redding - 2023
City Dept/Division
Assigned
Job Code / Position / Title Disclosure Category
City Agencies
Assigned Disclosure
Category per Agency's
Adopted Code
Redding Area Bus Authority (RABA)
011 City Manager 1
012 Assistant City Manager 1
020 Director of Public Works 1
064 Director of Finance 1
099 City Treasurer 1
106 Assistant Director of Public Works 1
202 Transit Manager 1
Board Members 1
* Consultants 1
General Counsel 1
Redding Capital Services Corporation (RCSC)
011 City Manager 1
064 Director of Finance 1
Board Members 1
* Consultants 1
General Counsel 1
Redding Housing Authority (RHA)
011 City Manager 1
012 Assistant City Manager 1
138 Planning/Community Development Manager 1
064 Director of Finance 1
099 City Treasurer 1
103 Housing Manager 2,3,4,6,7
173 Housing Program Supervisor 2,3,4,6,7
210 Senior Housing Specialist 2,3,4,6
231/232 Management Analyst I/II 2,3,4,6
Commissioners 1
* Consultants 1
General Counsel 1
Housing Administrator (City Manager Designee) 1
Redding Joint Powers Financing Authority (RJPFA)
011 City Manager 1
064 Director of Finance 1
Board Members 1
* Consultants 1
General Counsel 1
Redding Municipal Library Board
052 Director of Community Services 1
064 Director of Finance 1
Board of Trustees Member(s) 1
* Consultant-Library Systems & Services, LLC (LLSI) 1
Executive Director 1
General Counsel 1
Packet Pg. 1041 Attachment: ^Appendix A - strikeout version Designated Positions (4.12(a)--Resolution amending City's Conflict of Interest Code) Appendix A
DESIGNATED POSITIONS
City of Redding - 2023
City Dept/Division
Assigned
Job Code / Position / Title Disclosure Category
City Agencies
Assigned Disclosure
Category per Agency's
Adopted Code
City of Redding as Successor Agency to the Redding Redevelopment Agency 011 City Manager 1
012 Assistant City Manager 1
064 Director of Finance 1
099 City Treasurer 1
Agency Member(s) 1
General Counsel 1
City Boards/Commissions/Committees
Member-Administrative Hearings Board 1
Member-Board of Administrative Review 3,4,6
Member-Community Development Advisory Committee 1
Member-Community Services Advisory Commission 5
Member-Shasta Public Library Citizens Advisory Committee 8 Consultants*
William Avery Associates 1
Library Systems & Services, LLC (LSSI) 1
George Hills Company, Inc. & Local Representative 1
*Consultants shall be included in the list of designated employees and shall disclose pursuant to the broadest disclosure category in the Conflict of Interest Code, subject to the following limitations:
The City Manager or his designee may determine in writing that a particular consultant, although a "designated position," is hired to perform a range of duties that are limited in scope, and thus is not required to fully comply with the disclosure requirements described in this section. Such written determination shall include a description of the consultant's duties and, based upon that description, a statement of the extent of disclosure requirements. The determination of the City Manager or his designee is a public record and shall be retained for public inspection in the same manner and locations as this Conflict of Interest Code.
Packet Pg. 1042 Attachment: ^Appendix A - strikeout version Designated Positions (4.12(a)--Resolution amending City's Conflict of Interest Code)
APPENDIX B
LIST OF DISCLOSURE CATEGORIES SPECIFICATION SHEET
REPORTABLE INVESTMENTS, INTERESTS IN REAL PROPERTY AND INCOME
CONFLICT OF INTEREST CODE
FOR THE CITY OF REDDING AND RELATED AGENCIES
Disclosure Category
1 All investments and business positions in business entities, sources of income, and interests in real property in the City of Redding or property located within a two-mile radius of any property owned or used by the City of Redding or it’s related agencies, whether in the City or not.
2 Investments and business positions in business entities, and sources of income from entities providing supplies, services, equipment, or machinery of the type used by the designated employee's unit.
3 Investments and business positions in business entities, and income from sources engaged in construction, building, or material supply.
4 Investments and business positions in, and income from sources engaged in, the construction of public works projects.
5 All reportable interests in real property located in the City and located within or outside the City if within a two-mile radius of any open space or park property owned or used by the City. All reportable business positions, investments, or income for any person, firm or entity which supplies goods or services to the Community Services Department of the City of Redding, including businesses with leaseholds in City parks, construction firms, recreational equipment supplyfirms, financial institutions, aquatic equipment or supply firms or landscape design or maintenance businesses. 6 All real property, all investment in, all business positions in, or income from construction firms, building supply firms, engineering firms, architecture firms and financial institutions.
7 Investments and business positions in business entities, and sources of income from entities involved in any business relationship with any entity having a history of making applications before the board or commission which the designated position serves on.
8 Investments and business positions in business entities, and sources of income from entities providing supplies, services, equipment or machinery of the type used by the Redding Main Library, the Burney Branch Library or the Anderson Branch Library.
Packet Pg. 1043 Attachment: ^Appendix B - 2023 Final Version (4.12(a)--Resolution amending City's Conflict of Interest Code)
CITY OF REDDING
REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL
Recommendation
Authorize the following actions relative to the Downtown Park Plaza Project 2023, for construction of a public park located at 1470 Market St:
(1) Award bid to SnL Group Inc. in the amount of $3,985,883; (2) Approve $100,000 for administration costs and inspection fees; $350,000 for project development costs; and $101,463 to provide construction contingency funding; and (3) Find that the project is exempt from review under the California Environmental Quality Act Guidelines, pursuant to Section 15300.1 - Relation to Ministerial Projects.
Fiscal Impact
The Downtown Park Plaza Project (Project) is being funded by Clean California Local Grant Program (CCLGP) funds in the amount of $3,889,480 and Park Impact Fee Reimbursement Agreement funds in an amount not to exceed $780,000. These funding sources were approved by City Council on August 2, 2022. Considering the CCLGP funds, $99,589 is set aside for noninfrastructure community programming costs. To date, the City has received $607,914 of Park Impact Fees. The Developer will contribute funds as needed to cover costs exceeding available CCLGP and Reimbursement Agreement funds.
Cost Summary
Item Estimated
Project Development Costs $350,000
Construction Contract + Contingency $4,087,346
Contract Administration, Inspection, Testing $100,000
Total Project Costs $4,537,346
Total Project Budget $4,537,346
MEETING DATE: September 5, 2023
ITEM NO. 9.2(b)
FROM:
***APPROVED BY***
[email protected] [email protected]
SUBJECT: 9.2(b)--Award bid to SnL Group Inc. for the City of Redding Downtown Park Plaza Project 2023.
Steve Bade, Assistant City
Manager
Packet Pg. 1044
Report to Redding City Council August 30, 2023
Re: 9.2(b)--Award Bid, Downtown Plaza Park Page 2
Project cost components are estimates and some shifting of the project development, construction management, and construction contingency funds may be necessary to balance the project within the approved budget. Based on the availability of Park Impact Fee Reimbursement funds, an amendment to the Park and Recreation Impact Fee Reimbursement Agreement may be presented to Council at a future meeting.
Alternative Action
The Council may choose not to award the bid for the project and provide staff with alternate direction. This action could put the City of Redding (City) in default of the terms of Park Impact Fee Reimbursement Agreement; the project would not be constructed as designed; the grant funding would be lost and predevelopment, design and bidding costs would have to be paid by the City.
Background/Analysis
When Market Street was extended south beyond Tehama Street, the green lawns between the Shasta College building and From the Hearth were removed. The Block 7 Development Team, the City and Shasta College agreed that adding green space back to the area was consistent with the Downtown Specific Plan and the former Shasta College parking lot was a good location to create open space with a park.
On January 18, 2022, the City Council authorized an application in collaboration with The McConnell Foundation to the Clean California Local Grant Program for up to $5,000,000 to fund the park project. In March of 2022, the City was notified of the award at $3,889,480. In June 2022, Council approved a Park Dedication and Easement Agreement between the City and Shasta-Tehama-Trinity Joint Community College District for the purpose of developing a park.
Community Services’ staff worked in concert with the developers’ design team and the Community Services Advisory Commission approved the park design.
On August 2, 2022, the Council approved the Second Amendment to North Block Parking Project that added Exhibit 10, Park and Recreation Facilities Impact Fee Reimbursement Agreement with Block 7 Retail Investors, LLC, for the construction of a Downtown Park Plaza.
The Agreement allowed for reimbursement of park development impact fees up to $780,000 for the park and for the developer to administer the Clean California grant awarded to the project.
Attached is a tabulation of bids received and opened on July 28, 2023, for the project. The low bid in the amount of $3,985,883 was received from SnL Group of Redding, California. The engineer's estimate was $2,000,000. The bid prices reflect significant increases in material costs and specialty items due to high inflation. Total project development costs for this project are estimated to be $350,000. Project development costs include engineering, surveying, right-ofway, environmental, consultant services, and permit and utility connection fees.
The project consists of the construction of a public park at 1470 Market St, Redding CA 96001.
The project will include landscaping, irrigation, a fog misting system, walking path, boulders, lighting and a pavilion.
Packet Pg. 1045
Report to Redding City Council August 30, 2023
Re: 9.2(b)--Award Bid, Downtown Plaza Park Page 3
Environmental Review
Staff has reviewed the project and determined that it is categorically exempt from review under the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) Guidelines, per 15300.1 – Relation to Ministerial Projects. Section 15300.1 cites Section 21080 of the Public Resources Code as exempting those projects over which public agencies exercise only ministerial authority. The proposed park & recreation facility is allowed by right in the Downtown Core zoning district under the Downtown Specific Plan. This means that construction of the project would only require a building permit. Since approval of building permits is ministerial and not discretionary, CEQA does not apply to the construction of this project.
Council Priority/City Manager Goals
• Government of the 21st Century – “Be relevant and proactive to the opportunities and challenges of today’s residents and workforce. Anticipate the future to make better decisions today.”
• Economic Development – “Facilitate and become a catalyst for economic development in Redding to create jobs, retain current businesses and attract new ones, and encourage investment in the community.”
Attachments
^Bid Tabulation
^Notice of Exemption
^1470 Market Street (Downtown Park Plaza) Location Map
Packet Pg. 1046
UNIT UNIT UNIT
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY PRICE TOTAL PRICE TOTAL PRICE TOTAL 1 Construct Urban Park LS 1 $2,000,000.00 $2,000,000.00 $3,985,883.00 $3,985,883.00 TOTAL - CONTRACT ITEMS $2,000,000.00 $3,985,883.00
UNIT UNIT UNIT
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY PRICE TOTAL PRICE TOTAL PRICE TOTAL 1 Construct Urban Park LS 1
TOTAL - CONTRACT ITEMS
UNIT UNIT UNIT
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY PRICE TOTAL PRICE TOTAL PRICE TOTAL 1 Construct Urban Park LS 1
TOTAL - CONTRACT ITEMS
BIDDER
ENGINEER'S EST
BIDDER BIDDER
BIDDER BIDDER BIDDER
7/28/2023
URBAN PARK
BID TABULATION FOR:
SnL GROUP
BIDDER BIDDER
Shaded areas indicate corrections made in accordance with the Special Provisions. Page 1 of 1 Packet Pg. 1047 Attachment: ^Bid Tabulation (9.2(b)--Award Bid, Downtown Plaza Park) Packet Pg. 1048
Attachment: ^Notice of Exemption (9.2(b)--Award Bid, Downtown Plaza Park)
MARKET ST
CALIFORNIA ST
BUTTE ST
TEHAMA ST
SHASTA ST
PINE ST
MTG. DATE:
ITEM:
ATTACHMENT:
LOCATION MAP GIS DIVISION
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY DEPARTMENT
DATE PRODUCED: -
P:\Housing\ProProjects\1470 Market Street
AUGUST 25, 2023 DOWNTOWN PARK PLAZA PROJECT
1470 MARKET STREET 0 50 100
US Feet
Packet Pg. 1049 Attachment: ^1470 Market Street (Downtown Park Plaza) Location Map (9.2(b)--Award Bid, Downtown Plaza Park)
CITY OF REDDING
REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL
Recommendation
Authorize and approve the following for the Redding Police Department:
(1) Extend the lateral signing incentive for an additional 18-months in the amount of $40,000, with payment of the bonus to continue to be in installments of $20,000 at hiring, $10,000 at successful completion of field training, and $10,000 after completion of probation, with a contract remaining in place requiring a three-year commitment to the Redding Police Department to receive the bonus. Lateral officers that resign prior to the full three years are required to repay the incentive at a prorated rate; and (2) Authorize and approve the City Manager to cancel the incentive without City Council approval due to unforeseen issues such as budget reductions.
Fiscal Impact
The cost of the hiring incentive will be paid for through the existing Redding Police Department’s (RPD) budget. The cost is considerably less than a police recruit (academy) position.
Alternative Action
The City Council (Council) could choose not to extend the hiring incentive for lateral police officers and provide staff with alternative direction. Not extending the hiring incentives may impact RPD’s ability to recruit qualified applicants to fill vacant police officer positions.
Background/Analysis
On March 15, 2022, the Council approved a $40,000 lateral signing bonus for police officer positions. RPD was facing a high level of turnover due to retirements, resignations, and injuries to officers. In 2021 and 2022, the City Council approved multiple new police officer positions – including Park Rangers, Crisis Intervention Response Team, and Beat 8.
MEETING DATE: September 5, 2023
ITEM NO. 9.9(c)
FROM:
***APPROVED BY***
[email protected] [email protected]
SUBJECT: 9.9(c)--Consider extending the Redding Police Department's $40,000 signing bonus for an additional 18-months.
Bill Schueller, Chief of Police
Packet Pg. 1050
Report to Redding City Council August 29, 2023
Re: 9.9(c)--Signing Bonus Page 2
Lateral police officers offer a distinct advantage due to their experience, a shorter training period with a Field Training Officer (FTO), and providing significant cost savings to RPD. The estimated cost for a police recruit to attend the police academy is approximately $78,000, which includes academy cost, salary, benefits, meal and lodging stipend, uniform allowance, and ammunition. This cost does not include the additional field training time before being released as a solo officer. Lateral police officers are currently averaging nine weeks in the field training program while police recruits are averaging seventeen weeks. This results in police recruits averaging an additional eight weeks of field training, which includes an officer doubled with the officer in training and not available for staffing a patrol beat. The average cost for the additional eight weeks of a FTO’s salary/benefits is $26,240. This additional cost to the Department for a recruit versus a lateral police officer is approximately $104,000.
After the approval of the lateral signing bonus, word quickly spread in the law enforcement community and RPD received applications from many well-qualified, lateral candidates. RPD has hired 22 lateral police officers in the 18-month period that the signing bonus was available.
Sixteen of the 22 lateral police officers have been successful and are still employed with RPD.
This is a 72 percent success rate. Between 2019 and 2021, the lateral success rate was 95 percent.
The six that were unsuccessful left voluntarily for various reasons, but most returned to their original agencies or had personal issues relocating. Per the lateral signing bonus contract, officers that have left have either paid back the signing bonus or will be sent to collections.
During that same time period, RPD hired fifteen police recruits. Thirteen of the police recruits were successful and are currently working as police officers at RPD. This is an 86 percent success rate. Between 2019 and 2021, the recruit success rate was only 46 percent. RPD attributes the increased success rate to several changes made to the recruiting process. The department now utilizes two agency-operated police academies that include the Alameda County Sheriff’s Academy and Sacramento Police Academy. The RPD Training Sergeant and Field Training Officers are assigned to individual recruits throughout the academy in a mentor role.
The department also implemented an in-house RPD orientation period for recruits prior to attending the police academy.
RPD has hired three entry level police officers and two have been successful and are currently employed. This is a 66 percent success rate.
In the March 8, 2022 report to City Council (staff report) regarding the request for a lateral signing bonus, the following agencies were listed with current signing bonuses.
Redding Police Department $10,000
Chico Police Department $10,000
Shasta County Sheriff’s Office $15,000
Paradise Police Department $20,000
Eureka Police Department $20,000
Vacaville Police Department $20,000
Palo Alto Police Department $25,000
San Mateo Police Department $30,000
Alameda Police Department $30,000
Oakland Police Department $50,000
Scotts Valley Police Department $50,000
Packet Pg. 1051
Report to Redding City Council August 29, 2023
Re: 9.9(c)--Signing Bonus Page 3
Since that time, many agencies have started a lateral signing bonus program and/or increased the amount offered. Scotts Valley is the only listed agency that decreased their signing bonus from $50,000 to $40,000. Yuba City was added to the list below with the recent addition of a $45,000 signing bonus.
Redding Police Department $40,000
Chico Police Department $40,000
Shasta County Sheriff’s Office $15,000
Paradise Police Department $40,000
Eureka Police Department $20,000
Vacaville Police Department $20,000
Palo Alto Police Department $25,000
San Mateo Police Department $30,000
Alameda Police Department $75,000
Oakland Police Department $50,000
Scotts Valley Police Department $40,000
Yuba City Police Department $45,000
Environmental Review
This item is not a project as defined by the California Environmental Quality Act, therefore, no further action is required at this time.
Council Priority/City Manager Goals
• Public Safety – “Work to improve all aspects of public safety to help people feel secure and safe where they live, work, and play in the City of Redding.” Packet Pg. 1052
CITY OF REDDING
REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL
Recommendation
Authorize the following actions relative to the City of Redding Downtown Parking Program as outlined and summarized below:
(1) Accept the staff report outlining the status of Downtown Redding parking; (2) Adopt Resolution to amend the traffic control map thereby allowing on-street employee permit exempt parking zones, increasing the number of employee parking permits sold from 175 to 300, allowing Shasta College students to purchase employee parking permits and changing the Oregon Street loading zone from 12 minutes to 30 minutes; and (3) Find that the action is exempt from environmental review under the California Environmental Quality Act pursuant to 14 CCR 15601(b)(3) (Common Sense Exemption).
Fiscal Impact
On October 16, 2022, the City Council (Council) approved moving to a pay station-based parking system. The parking rate was adjusted to $1.00 per hour at the time with 175 monthly parking permits authorized for off-street, long-term parking in City of Redding (City) managed lots. At that time, Dixon Resources Unlimited (Dixon), the City’s parking consultant, estimated revenues from the parking payment devices and enforcement efforts were to be sufficient to fund the elements of the full parking program without impact to the General Fund when fully implemented. After approximately five months of data, expenses (~$32,000/month) are exceeding revenues (~$22,000/month).
At this time, staff is recommending two minor adjustments to the system to close the financial gap. These include reducing the off-street leased inventory, increasing the number of monthly passes from 175 to 300, and allowing Shasta College students to be eligible for monthly passes.
The proposed changes will reduce expenses by nearly $2,000 per month and increase revenues by nearly $3,000 per month. Staff does not recommend modifying the parking rate nor the MEETING DATE: September 5, 2023
ITEM NO. 9.11(d)
FROM:
***APPROVED BY***
[email protected] [email protected]
SUBJECT: 9.11(d)--Update to the Downtown Redding Parking Program - Consider the proposed changes, and adoption of a Resolution to amend the Traffic Control Map of the City of Redding.
Chuck Aukland, Public
Works Director
Packet Pg. 1053
Report to Redding City Council August 30, 2023
Re: 9.11(d)--Update to the Downtown Redding Parking Program Page 2 citation fine amounts at this time as there are several factors that will change the dynamic downtown in the coming months including the opening of the new courthouse, starting of a new school year, and multiple tenets coming to the recently constructed retail space.
Moving forward, two areas will be monitored more closely with potential changes that include the citation fine amounts and the off-street leased space inventory. When looking at both of these elements in isolation, the expenses exceed revenues.
Dixon identified a financial concern regarding the relatively low cost of parking citations. The cost of the parking violation or “bail” was last amended in the early 1980’s. The most typical parking violation bail is $24.50 for unpaid parking and over-time limits. Of that amount, the City retains approximately $11.45 – the remaining portion, $13.05, by statute, goes directly to the state court system and transportation funds, as well as consultant costs for appeal processing, correspondence and collections. The retained City funds are meant to cover the costs of enforcement, including staff, vehicles and equipment. The parking citation revenue is tracking around $4,000 per month while the cost of enforcement exceeds $7,500 per month.
Anecdotally, another concern regarding the low price point of the parking citations is that the effectiveness to encourage compliance. It has been conveyed to the parking enforcement officer and staff, that users of the system are often willing to take the risk of not paying for parking but rather pay a couple parking tickets at the current rates. One ticket is similar to the cost of a monthly pass. Dixon compared similar California cities and found that the City’s bail rate is very low and they recommended adjustment in order to obtain better payment compliance rates. As stated, staff is not requesting a change at this time, but will monitor for future consideration.
The City is currently leasing six private, parking lots at a total cost of $8,450 per month. Many of these lots are currently underutilized as demand is lower than expected in the periphery and sufficient parking is available on adjacent streets; free in some locations. Staff intends to adjust the private leased parking inventory to reduce expenses and increase the number of monthly permits issued to 300 (with Council approval) as mentioned above and as demand allows. To make up for the potential loss of off-street inventory, staff suggests adding permit exempt parking at certain underutilized on-street block faces near the leased lots to be eliminated; approximately 70 in all as shown on the attached Traffic Control Map. If occupancy rates increase to where additional leased parking lots become necessary to meet additional capacity, the value of the private parking lots may increase enough to allow the private owners to manage the parking lots on their own, or the parking system may have enough revenue at that time to lease or purchase additional parking lots.
It should also be noted that the City will own the pay stations following the five-year lease period which will reduce expenses by approximately $12,000 per month. However, the City should anticipate additional expenses to maintain and replace the pay stations in the City inventory as they age and wear. Staff is tracking warranty expenses, not currently charged to the City under the lease agreement, to better gauge potential future costs.
Alternative Action
The Council may choose not to accept this report, provide staff alternative direction and/or adopt this resolution. In either case, staff would need time to analyze Council’s direction with the intent of operating a Downtown Redding parking system that is revenue neutral and avoids requesting General Funds to backfill expenditures that may exceed revenues.
Packet Pg. 1054
Report to Redding City Council August 30, 2023
Re: 9.11(d)--Update to the Downtown Redding Parking Program Page 3 Background/Analysis
Since the roll out of the Council-approved paid parking system, there have been many actions to purchase and install signage and equipment, educate and respond to the community, and most recently implement an enforcement and data collection system to understand the dynamics of the system as a whole. The main goal of the system is to ensure parking availability and turnover for the downtown business community. To date, the system is working to achieve those goals.
Parking is available and nearly all areas are below the goal of 85 percent occupancy. However, as noted above, demand, and thus revenues, are lower than expected, and adjustments are necessary to ensure financial neutrality for the overall system. The following summarizes various elements of the system implemented to date.
Leased Off-Street Parking Lots – In 2018, the City sold the 640-space, California Street parking structure to support the redevelopment of the area. As a parking mitigation measure, the City agreed to lease private, downtown parking lots and make them available to the public. By the time the parking garage was demolished, the City was able to obtain and manage four leased lots with approximately 250 spaces. At the same time, Council also increased the on-street availability by adding angled parking to a number of streets.
The number of leased lots has increased over time to eight parking lots with over 527 off-street parking spaces available. These lots, while beneficial and allow for numerous parking options, cost the City approximately $8,500 per month. The 1620 Pine Street parking lot’s lease term ended earlier this year and was not renewed. In addition, after reviewing initial data, it is clear the two free lots on the southern end of parking district at 2032 Pine and 1950 California are unnecessary due to the abundance of free, unoccupied on-street parking and are planned to be phased out. On the whole, leased parking lots are underutilized with less than 50 percent occupancy rates.
It should be noted that Lot #20 at the corner of California Street and Placer Street is a short-term lease with K2 Development. There are plans in place to develop that lot after a one-year lease.
That popular central lot with 116 spaces has about 45-50 percent occupancy on weekdays and much higher on nights and weekends. The loss of this lot in the next year or two will put additional pressure on the spaces in the periphery. Due to the anticipated loss of this lot, these spaces are not counted toward the availability for employee parking permits. In addition, longterm parking is necessary in all corners of downtown for patrons needing to stay longer than the 2-hour designated zones allow. The leased lots around Pine Street provide additional convenient options for patrons wanting to park for more than two hours.
A concern in removing leased lots is the capacity of the system to handle enough employee parking permits. There is currently a need for additional employee parking permits. With low occupancy, the City could eliminate one or two additional leased lots and allow employee permit exempt parking on-street around these lots in the underutilized extremities of the paid parking zones. A review of the occupancy data reveals that approximately 120-125 on-street parking spaces, around the leased parking lots have under 20 percent occupancy, and could be better utilized as employee exempt parking spaces while still retaining their two-hour time limit for other users.
Packet Pg. 1055
Report to Redding City Council August 30, 2023
Re: 9.11(d)--Update to the Downtown Redding Parking Program Page 4 Staff had originally recommended enough parking permits to accommodate 50 percent of the number of spaces in the off-street lots. Staff believes the City could sell up to 100 percent of the number as the utilization rate of the employee permits is around 60 percent at any given hour thus leaving 40 percent for daily long-term parkers. This provides capacity to add 125 additional employee parking permits for a total of 300 parking permits. Allowing permit parking in underutilized on-street parking spaces will reduce lease costs while making better use of underutilized parking areas and add to the capacity of the employee parking permit system.
Pay Stations and Signage - The City’s Streets crews removed the remaining 136 original parking meters from Downtown, and have added 44 new pay stations. There are a few remaining pay stations to be installed that are reserved for the opening of the new Shasta County Courthouse. In addition to the pay stations, staff introduced the “Pay by App” and “Pay by Text” features of the system. Staff is working with the developers of the Flowbird application, and is still in the process of fine-tuning those payment methods. As shown below, most users of the system are paying at the pay station itself followed by using the Flowbird App:
In total, over 400 signs have been installed to date and another 200+ are in process to complete the system. The minimum required signs to enforce have been installed, and now staff is working on placing additional signage to provide better visibility, fill in gaps, and add specialty signs that address permit parking and loading zones. Staff recently obtained an Encroachment Permit from Caltrans to add new sign locations within Caltrans right-of-way. Eventually all of the downtown signage will be completed in the dark navy-blue color, which is consistent with the other planned signage for the Downtown area.
Enforcement and Education – Leading up to the March 2023 opening of the parking program, a concerted effort was made to reach the larger community of the upcoming changes. These outreach efforts included a series of press releases, podcasts, social media posts, a dedicated City website and Downtown business owner informational meetings. This was followed by a large influx of phone calls, emails and general questions in regards to the new program operations.
Eventually a slow roll out of enforcement commenced with many weeks of notifications of future enforcement and education as to the parking program requirements and how to use the various payment methods. The enforcement officer spent the first month issuing warnings and talking with people that he encountered Downtown. The citation processing system keeps track of the number of warnings issued, and if a vehicle had received multiple warnings then tickets were issued. Currently the enforcement officer is in full operation issuing 12 to 20 parking citations on a daily basis.
Packet Pg. 1056
Report to Redding City Council August 30, 2023
Re: 9.11(d)--Update to the Downtown Redding Parking Program Page 5 The License Plate Recognition (LPR) system was installed and implemented in late May 2023.
The LPR system not only helps with the citation process, but also collects occupancy data while driving. The new technology brings some challenges with sight recognition, but the overall system is a time-saver and valuable source of data.
The data from the citations is automatically uploaded into the Dataticket citation processing system. This system is almost entirely automated and handles general questions, violation letters, the citation appeals process, collections, defaults, and Department of Motor Vehicle reporting.
This process was previously handled by the Treasurer’s Office via staff manual input. The online automated system has significantly streamlined the process and removed a large amount of processing, letter writing and money handling for City staff.
Employee and Student Parking – One of the early concerns with the launch of the system was employee parking. The Council originally approved 175 employee parking passes. After the first month of employees rushing to obtain permits, due in large part to Shasta County employee interest, demand quickly subsided as employees found other places to park. Carpooling increased, some began obtaining rides, and many found convenient parking in available free zones. In addition, when Shasta College went to summer session, many of the free spaces on the north end of the parking district became more readily available. Demand fell below the maximum 175 employee permits to around 140-160 for a majority of the summer. In recent weeks demand has increased due in part to Shasta College resuming for the fall semester, and the remodeled buildings on California Street have reopened to Shasta County employees. There is currently a demand of approximately 40-50 additional employee permits, but with the recommended changes to include student permits, the program could foreseeably see an increase in demand for an additional 125 permits. Staff is recommending to increase the employee permit cap from 175 to 300 permits. The reduced monthly rate for residential and employee monthly parking is currently set at $25.00 per month and Dixon recommends adding downtown students to permit eligibility.
Occupancy Rates – In total, the paid parking zone has approximately 800 on-street parking stalls that are managed with pay stations with a portion designated loading zones or free shortterm parking. The consultant and staff closely monitor occupancy rates in the paid parking zones to determine where changes may be necessary. The surrounding blocks outside the paid parking zone includes approximately 250 free on-street parking spaces are also monitored to identify impacted blocks of free parking. Data has consistently improved since implementation and the most reliable data for these blocks is from the last couple months. The data is much more readily available with the recent addition of the Dixon Data Suite tool. The data collected from the new LPR technology can monitor occupancy rates by block face, day of week, even hour of day. The longer data is collected, the more robust the information becomes and staff can start to see more significant trends.
Initial data suggests that the core occupancy is close to the ideal parking rates of 70-85 percent occupancy while the rest of the system is seeing less than 50 percent occupancy. To the benefit of the core however, staff has seen a significant shift in weekday employee parking since implementing the parking program. The data suggests approximately 200-250 vehicles that used to park all day in front of adjacent businesses have moved from the downtown core to either the off-street parking lots or on-street free spaces surrounding the core. This has opened a healthy percentage of available spaces in the core that are seeing a preferable amount of turnover. There remains sufficient room for retail growth and sufficient spaces around the core for additional employee parking.
Packet Pg. 1057
Report to Redding City Council August 30, 2023
Re: 9.11(d)--Update to the Downtown Redding Parking Program Page 6 Business Impacts – The downtown core has seen a number of new businesses open in the paid parking zone over the last year that include: Rose’ Kitchen and Spirits, Moseley Winery tasting room, Fridays Vintage Co., Cask and Cleaver, Apricot Lane Boutique, Shenanigans Baby Boutique, Jungle Realty Group and Jungle Home Store and The Farm. More businesses are in the works to move into the downtown core that include: New Clairvaux Tasting Room, the Ribcage Restaurant, Area 151- a virtual reality gaming facility, and the Redding Public Market with multiple food vendors.
The Council may recall some written concerns from office users on Oregon Street just south of Shasta Street. The concern is that this free parking area of Oregon Street, between Shasta Street and Tehama Street, is being impacted by the overall parking system. Recent data found that occupancy reduced from 85 percent down to approximately 70 percent. This appears to be due to the reduction in construction vehicles for the Shasta County Courthouse building which has steadily declined as the construction moves closer to completion. Additionally, the courts have encouraged their contractors to park within the construction zone and not move to those blocks north of Tehama. Staff will continue to monitor this location when the Courthouse is open and determine if additional changes are necessary.
The Market Square area adjacent to Lot #11 on Pine Street near Tehama houses numerous businesses with over 60 employees. This area has seen more direct effects of the paid parking zone with many of the employees now parking to the east of Pine Street. This has opened up Lot #11 for the patrons to the benefit of those businesses. Many of the employees found free parking in the Shasta Regional Medical Center parking lots across Pine Street and on Butte Street east of Pine Street. The proposed expansion of the employee parking permit program will help those employees but will require the purchase of a permit or to park further away. Some are concerned that parking a few blocks away and/or paying $25.00 monthly may make finding employees more difficult.
It has been noted that the increased focus and attention to the downtown core has renewed interest in downtown and the paid parking system has helped to put value to these areas. Patrons have expressed feeling safer with increased police presence. The addition of women’s clothing stores, baby boutiques and a youth gaming center is testament to a renewed faith in the safety of the downtown core. As the City continues to invest in Downtown, the business community is responding and continuing to grow the Downtown core. The City in partnership with K2 Development and the McConnell Foundation is working to develop the new City park on Market Street and this facility along with the new retail stores on the horizon continue to see growth and progress downtown.
The parking program is committed to remain as dynamic to the needs of downtown as it continually adjusts. The recommended changes requested by the attached Resolution will help to work toward that end. The Resolution has been approved to form by the City Attorney.
Packet Pg. 1058
Report to Redding City Council August 30, 2023
Re: 9.11(d)--Update to the Downtown Redding Parking Program Page 7 Environmental Review
Staff has reviewed this action and determined that it is exempt from review under California Environmental Quality Act, per Section 15061(b)(3) – Common Sense Exemption. CEQA applies only to projects which have the potential for causing a significant effect on the environment. It can be seen with certainty that there is no possibility that the action may have a significant effect on the environment; therefore, the activity is not subject to CEQA. The City has an existing paid parking zone that is being modified. The proposed modifications will affect the locations of parked vehicles and may encourage mode shift, carpooling and transit use. The proposed changes, while not significant, will assist in the City’s goals of increasing parking availability to Downtown Redding while also helping to reach environmental goals.
Council Priority/City Manager Goals
• Economic Development – “Facilitate and become a catalyst for economic development in Redding to create jobs, retain current businesses and attract new ones, and encourage investment in the community.”
• Government of the 21st Century - “Be relevant and proactive to the opportunities and challenges of today’s residents and workforce. Anticipate the future to make better decisions today.”
Attachments
^Resolution
^Resolution Exhibit A
^Downtown Parking Map_8.29.23
^Parking Occupancy Exhibit
^NOE Downtown Parking Program & Traffic Control Map Update Packet Pg. 1059
RESOLUTION NO. 2023-____
A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF REDDING
MODIFYING THE EMPLOYEE PARKING ZONES AND MODIFYING
THE AMOUNT OF EMPLOYEE PERMITS SOLD, AND MODIFYING
LOADING ZONES ON OREGON STREET
WHEREAS, California Vehicle Code (CVC) Section 22507 provides that a local government may, by ordinance or resolution, restrict the stopping, parking, or standing of vehicles on certain streets or highways, or portions thereof, during all or certain hours of the day; and WHEREAS, Redding Municipal Code (RMC) Section 11.24.170 provides that the City Council may, by resolution, establish time limited parking zones for such days and periods of time deemed necessary as shown on the Traffic Control Map established pursuant to the provisions of RMC Section 11.04.020; and
WHEREAS, RMC Section 11.28.020 provides that the City Council may, as traffic conditions require, designate, modify or eliminate by resolution paid parking zones upon such streets or portions of streets of the City. The areas, streets and portions of streets designated as paid parking zones shall be depicted on the Traffic Control Map adopted pursuant to RMC Section 11.04.020; and
WHEREAS, RMC Section 11.28.075 provides that the City Council may, by resolution, establish employee parking permit areas and pursuant to CVC Section 22507(b), an employee parking permit program may be utilized to designate employee parking permit zones that will improve parking availability for customers if the use of the permits will not adversely impact parking conditions for residents and merchants in the area;
NOW THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL THAT:
1. The recitals set forth herein are true and correct.
2. Pursuant to RMC Section 11.24.170, the City Council modifies the loading zone adjacent to the United States Post Office on Oregon Street, between Yuba Street and Placer Road from 12 minutes to 30 minutes.
3. Pursuant to RMC Section 11.28.075, and CVC 22507, the City Council modifies the Employee Parking Program and finds that:
a. After an audit of available parking spaces, including all of the leased parking lots, the average utilization of the Downtown area is consistently below 50 percent. The RMC sets a goal of 85 percent occupancy, thus leaving at least 35 percent of spaces available for additional parking to reach the goal.
b. The City of Redding manages 457 off-street parking spaces designated as 10-hour parking. and there are 463 private off-street parking spaces open to the public for a total of 920 off-street spaces. These spaces provide allowances for long term parking options surrounding the vicinity of the downtown core. There is an excess in off-street long-term parking spaces and a reduction in leased parking spaces will help increase occupancy in the core parking zones and in underutilized on-street parking spaces.
Packet Pg. 1060 Attachment: ^Resolution (9.11(d)--Update to the Downtown Redding Parking Program) c. A reduction of leased parking lots and replacement with underutilized on-street parking spaces as permit exempt zones will reduce lease costs and increase occupancy rates.
d. The reduction of leased parking lots will require the designation of underutilized on-street parking spaces as employee permit exempt parking. This will allow valid permit holders to park in the properly signed exempt zones to park for longer than the 2-hr designation. A review of underutilized (below 20% occupancy) parking block faces found that at least 120 spaces could allow on-street permit exempt parking. Of the 120 underutilized on-street parking spaces, 70 would be made available for on-street employee permit exempt parking. The parking system would hold onto a minimum of 315 spaces available for employee permit parking, to insure there is enough parking for the proposed number of permit holders. The 315 spaces would be comprised of the City owned spaces, the remaining leased lots and the new on-street employee permit exempt parking.
e. Of the 315 spaces available for employee permit parking, 300 spaces would be offered at a discounted monthly rate for qualified Downtown employees in certain designated employee exempt zones. A review of the employee parking utilization rates found that permit holders park approximately 60% of weekly hours. This would leave approximately 126 spaces for other long-term parkers in addition to the privately managed 463 spaces in the core.
f. There are approximately 200 students of Shasta College, that currently do not have any discount parking allowances. As the parking system becomes more robust, it will require the students to pay for parking in the long-term parking, or park farther away from the college in one of the free zones. This could negatively affect residential areas or other zones that are currently free. Allowing students to purchase employee parking permits will help pay for the cost of leased lots, support Shasta College located in the Downtown core and reduce the impacts to the free zones. A survey of students found that not all require a permit and many will still utilize the free zones, a portion work from home and others are off-site many hours a week. It is anticipated that 30-40 may purchase employee parking permits. g. The provision of an Employee Parking Program will encourage employees to utilize underutilized lots and on-street parking around the core of Downtown, without negatively impacting parking.
h. The modification of the Employee Parking Program will encourage employees to move out of the Downtown core on-street parking and utilize the off-street parking areas thereby not adversely affecting parking conditions for merchants within close proximity. The provision of adequate customer parking and employee permit parking will thereby not adversely affect residential areas surrounding the Paid Parking Zone.
4. Pursuant to the findings above the employee parking areas will maintain 315 available spaces for employee permit parking. The traffic control map shall be modified to identify the block faces to allow up to 70 on-street parking spaces as employee permit exempt parking as demand requires subject to modification by the City Engineer. These spaces shall be made available for employee parking permits in the areas so designated, as shown on Exhibit A. and that, based on the findings set forth in Section 3, above, the employee parking zones so designated will not adversely impact parking conditions for residents and Packet Pg. 1061 Attachment: ^Resolution (9.11(d)--Update to the Downtown Redding Parking Program) merchants in the area.
5. Pursuant to the findings above, 300 employee/student permits shall be made available for purchase. Based on the findings set forth in Section 3, above, the employee parking zones so designated will not adversely impact parking conditions for residents and merchants in the area.
6. Pursuant to the findings above the employee parking program will allow Shasta College students to purchase employee parking permits and utilize all of the allowed employee parking permit zones. Students will be required to show proof of current enrollment in one of the programs at the Downtown campus.
7. The City Engineer shall cause to be signed and marked any areas noted on Exhibit A, in accordance with RMC Section 11.28.030, and amend the Traffic Control Map adopted pursuant to RMC Section 11.04.020 to account for the change in parking established herein.
8. Amendment of the Traffic Control Map is exempt from review under the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA), per Section 15601(b)(3) – Common Sense Exemption. CEQA applies only to projects which have the potential for causing a significant effect on the environment. It can be seen with certainty that there is no possibility that the actions may have a significant effect on the environment; therefore, the activities are not subject to CEQA.
I HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing resolution was introduced and adopted at a regular meeting of the City Council of the City of Redding on the 5th day of September, 2023, by the following vote:
AYES: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
NOES: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
ABSENT: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
ABSTAIN: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
____________________________________
MICHAEL DACQUISTO, Mayor
ATTEST: FORM APPROVED:
________________________________ ____________________________________ SHARLENE TIPTON, City Clerk BARRY E. DeWALT, City Attorney Packet Pg. 1062 Attachment: ^Resolution (9.11(d)--Update to the Downtown Redding Parking Program) Lot #20
116 Spaces
Sept 5, 2023
EXHIBIT "A"
Packet Pg. 1063 Attachment: ^Resolution Exhibit A (9.11(d)--Update to the Downtown Redding Parking Program) *
CA &
Tehama
LOT 10
Pine &
Tehama
LOT 12
CA &
Shasta
LOT 9
CA &
Placer
LOT 20
East &
Yuba
LOT 13
Pine &
Sacramento
LOT 4
Pine &
Butte
LOT 11
*
Courthouse
Parking
Packet Pg. 1064 Attachment: ^Downtown Parking Map_8.29.23 (9.11(d)--Update to the Downtown Redding Parking Program) Packet Pg. 1065
Attachment: ^Parking Occupancy Exhibit (9.11(d)--Update to the Downtown Redding Parking Program) Packet Pg. 1066
Attachment: ^NOE Downtown Parking Program & Traffic Control Map Update (9.11(d)--Update to the Downtown Redding Parking Program)
CITY OF REDDING
REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL
Recommendation
Approve the following regarding proposed service rates for the City of Redding Solid Waste, Water, and Wastewater Utilities:
(1) Approve the Protest Notice format;
(2) Approve adding a new rate for the Solid Waste Utility for commercial source-separated food waste collection; and
(3) Approve setting a Public Hearing on November 7, 2023, 6:00 p.m., in the City Council Chambers, 777 Cypress Avenue, Redding, California, to consider the four-year package of rates for Solid Waste, Water, and Wastewater Utilities proposed for implementation on or about January 1, 2024.
Fiscal Impact
The proposed new monthly service rate and annual utility rate increases for Solid Waste, Water and Wastewater over the next four years are provided in the Background below. For comparison purposes, a typical single-family residential customer uses a yearly average of 2,100 cubic feet of water per month, is connected to the City’s sewer system, and utilizes a single 96-gallon refuse cart. On or about January 1, 2024, the total impact for the typical household will be approximately $16.83 per month. For years two, three and four, annually, service rates would increase by approximately $10 per month for a total increase above current rates of $47.73 per month in year four.
The rate package for Solid Waste includes the addition of a new rate proposed for the collection of commercial source-separate food waste to support the implementation of a new service for businesses subject to the food waste diversion requirements of Senate Bill 1383.
Utility customer revenue may not be used for other general government purposes.
MEETING DATE: September 5, 2023
ITEM NO. 9.11(e)
FROM:
***APPROVED BY***
[email protected] [email protected]
SUBJECT: 9.11(e)--Consider setting a Public Hearing regarding a four-year service rate package for the City of Redding Solid Waste, Water, and Wastewater Utilities.
Chuck Aukland, Public
Works Director
Packet Pg. 1067
Report to Redding City Council August 30, 2023
Re: 9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Waste and Utilities Page 2
Alternative Action
Alternatives for the Council to consider are:
1. Modify and approve the protest notice thereby adjusting the proposed rate increases (up or down) and set the public hearing for November 7, 2023. The implication of this alternative is that staff will, to the extent practical, adjust utility expenses (capital project schedules and programs) to match revenues. If proposed rates are adjusted downward the ability to properly maintain the utility systems may be compromised; or
2. The Council may decline to set a public hearing at this time and direct staff to come back at a later date to show additional justification for any rate adjustments. The implication of this alternative is that the Council determines no rate adjustments are necessary at this time but would consider adjustments at a later date.
Background/Analysis
Rate Update Process. The City of Redding (City) retained NBS Consultants to undertake the necessary cost-of-service studies and utility-rate analyses used to prepare a new service rate for the implementation of commercial source-separated food waste collection and rate adjustment recommendations for the Solid Waste, Wastewater, and Water Utilities. The recommended rates take into consideration the maintenance and operation of each utility, such as purchasing raw water, electricity, supplies, rehabilitation and replacement of equipment and infrastructure, personnel costs, and regulatory compliance.
As part of the update process, staff asked a number of citizens to sit as an "advisory group" (AG) to assist staff and the consultant. Public Works often uses AGs to ensure staff understands the impacts of decisions on various utility and infrastructure users in the community. The AG for this effort was composed of the following individuals who are utility rate customers through their home and/or business in Redding:
• Cindy Fisher – Vice President of Cornerstone Community Bank; • Trisha Funk – Financial Counselor and Advisor;
• Larry Olmstead – President & CEO of United Way of Northern California; • Cameron Tiraterra – Restaurant Owner;
• Janice Cunningham – Real Estate Consultant; and
• Sami Kader – Business Owner/Consulting (Civil) Engineer.
The focus of the AG was to ensure that the methodology used in the analyses was appropriate, function as a "sounding board" regarding options to modify the rate structures, and provide personal input on the reasonableness of the rates and fees. The AG met six times between May and August 2023, and provided extremely valuable input regarding financial stability, capital improvement program time frames, potential adjustments to the rate structures, and a host of other items.
Packet Pg. 1068
Report to Redding City Council August 30, 2023
Re: 9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Waste and Utilities Page 3
Recent Rate Adjustments. The City Council last considered water, wastewater, and solid waste rate adjustments during a public hearing in February, 2020. At that time, the Council approved increases for the three Utilities as follows:
UTILITY 2020* 2021* 2022* 2023*
Solid Waste 3%
$0.89
3%
$0.78
3%
$0.80
3%
$0.82
Wastewater 4%
$2.19
4%
$2.28
4%
$2.37
4%
$2.47
Water 4%
$0.60
4%
$2.11
4%
$2.18
4%
$2.22
TOTAL $3.68 $5.17 $5.35 $5.51
*Monthly increase for typical single-family home using 96-gallon solid waste service and 2,100 cubic feet of water per month.
In order to maintain adequate financial operating reserves and relative rate stability through time, it is appropriate that the Council consider adopting Water, Wastewater, and Solid Waste (collectively referred to as Utilities) rate adjustments incrementally to avoid potential future "rate shock," while maintaining the financial integrity of the City's Utilities.
Proposed Rate Increases. The following table shows the proposed four years of rate increases for the Utilities. The amounts shown are the proposed monthly increases for a typical singlefamily residence for each year of the program, which would become effective on or about January 1, 2024.
UTILITY 2024* 2025* 2026* 2027*
Solid Waste 15%
$4.29
8%
$2.61
8%
$2.82
6%
$2.28
Wastewater 5%
$3.21
5%
$3.37
4%
$2.83
4%
$2.94
Water 12% /
18%**
$9.33
6.5%
$4.35
6.5%
$4.68
6.5%
$5.02
TOTAL $16.83 $10.33 $10.33 $10.24
*Monthly increase for typical single-family home using 96-gallon solid waste service and 2,100 cubic feet of water per month. **Monthly increase for the fixed meter charge is 12% and the increase for the variable/commodity charge is 18% for a single-family home Need for Rate Increases. The City provides various Utility services for its citizens and some select areas outside the City. The day-to-day operations of each utility are funded through monthly service rates and are not supported by property taxes or sales taxes paid by residents.
The City's utility operations must be financially self-sufficient and fiscally responsible, and must provide reliable services to prevent impacts to customers as a result of deferred maintenance or lack of system capacity. While the Water, Wastewater and Solid Waste Utilities have been Packet Pg. 1069
Report to Redding City Council August 30, 2023
Re: 9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Waste and Utilities Page 4
highly successful in containing costs, there are ongoing fiscal challenges that must be addressed, including:
• Expanding environmental and regulatory mandates associated with water quality, waste diversion (increased recycling), air quality, endangered-species protection, and more; • Increasing fuel, energy, chemical, material, equipment, and labor costs in all utilities exacerbated by the recent inflationary pressure nationwide; • Needed upgrades to Foothill Treatment Plant, new source water wells and replacement of Pump Station No. 1 in the Water Utility;
• Critical aging pipe-replacement needs in the Water distribution and Wastewater collection systems;
• Meeting debt service associated with the critical past upgrades to the Clear Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant and the Stillwater Wastewater Treatment Plant; and • Needed upgrades and expansion of the City of Redding Transfer and Recycling Facility.
These challenges place continuous upward pressure on rates, and they will continue to do so into the foreseeable future for the Utilities. By proactively anticipating these future needs, the City and its Utilities strive to prevent dramatic and unanticipated increases in rates and disruption to services and maintain a reasonable level of operating funds using the lowest responsible rates.
However, with unanticipated increased inflationary pressure, major capital requirements and new regulatory requirements, particularly in the Water and Solid Waste Utilities, there is a need to reset rates higher than typical before they stabilize into modest annual adjustments.
Because each Utility is fundamentally different, detailed information and the recommended rates are summarized for each Utility in Attachments B, C, and D.
Public Participation in Rate Setting Process. To ensure public participation in the rate-setting process and implement the requirements of Proposition 218, a Notice of Public Hearing and Protest Procedures (Notice) will be mailed to every property owner as well as each Water, Wastewater, and Solid Waste Utility customer in the City/service area receiving one or more of these services in accordance with Resolution 2019-93 adopted on September 17, 2019. The notice will be mailed a minimum of forty-five days prior to the date of the public hearing. This will involve noticing to over 32,000 utility account holders and parcel owners within the City and another 1,000 outside the City. If the total protest forms representing a simple majority (50 percent plus one) of the properties are returned against the proposed rate adjustments, the Council will not be able to enact any rate increases.
In order to reduce costs, the proposal is to consolidate the hearings and notices for the Water, Wastewater and Solid Waste Utilities into one combined notice and hearing, and establish rate adjustments for a four-year period. Additional notification of the public hearing and proposed rate increases will include postings on the City's website and social media outlets, and coverage in the newspaper and other local media sources. Staff hosted a public informational workshop in the City’s Community Room on August 31, 2023.
Packet Pg. 1070
Report to Redding City Council August 30, 2023
Re: 9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Waste and Utilities Page 5
Environmental Review
This activity is not a project as defined by the California Environmental Quality Act, and no further action is required.
Council Priority/City Manager Goals
• Communication and Transparency – “Improve the quality of communication with the public and City employees to enhance knowledge and increase transparency to improve public trust.”
• Budget and Financial Management – “Achieve balanced and stable 10-year Financial Plans for all funds.”
• Government of the 21st Century – “Be relevant and proactive to the opportunities and challenges of today’s residents and workforce. Anticipate the future to make better decisions today.”
Attachments
^2023 Prop 218 Notice
^2023 Solid Waste System Overview and Proposed Rates
^2023 Wastewater System Overview and Proposed Rates
^2023 Water System Overview and Proposed Rates
^Resolution 2019-93 Procedures for Protest Hearings
Packet Pg. 1071
This notice explains proposed Water, Wastewater, and Solid Waste Utility service rate increases for City of Redding customers. The proposed rate increases will only apply to utilities provided by the City, not services provided by other entities, such as the Bella Vista Water District or Centerville Community Services District. Please review your City utility bill to determine services received.
What Do Water, Wastewater, and Solid Waste Rates Fund? The City provides water, wastewater (sewer), and solid waste (refuse and recycling) services to residential and commercial customers in the Redding area. These Municipal Utilities are not-for-profit and are operated to be financially self-sufficient. Monthly rates paid by customers are the primary source of revenue. Utility rates are calculated to cover the costs for the maintenance and operation of each Utility, such as purchasing raw water, electricity, supplies, rehabilitation and replacement of equipment/infrastructure, employee costs, and regulatory compliance. Ratepayer revenue is not used for other general government purposes. For more information about water and wastewater rates and services, please call (530) 224-6068, and for solid waste rates and services, please call (530) 224-6201. Visit www.reddingutilities.com for additional information, including City Council reports, utility master plans, and other related materials.
Why are rate increases being proposed? An increase in the rates is necessary in order to cover increased costs associated with operating and maintaining the City’s water, wastewater, and solid waste systems. Specifically, the unexpected and significant inflationary cost increases of energy, fuel, chemicals, rehabilitation/replacement of equipment, employee costs, and California State regulatory compliance mandates. Funding is also needed to replace significant portions of the City’s aging water and sewer infrastructure network. This is necessary if the City is to continue to provide reliable service to its customers and comply with the requirements of various regulatory agencies including the replacement of the City’s main water pump station built over 85 years ago, miles of pipeline replacement, and installation of a biosolids processing system to divert organic material from the landfill to comply with California Senate Bill 1383. A new commercial rate for businesses is being introduced to provide hauling and disposal services for source separated food waste; a new requirement imposed by the State of California through passage of Senate Bill 1383. If approved, the proposed rate increases will become effective January 1, 2024.
Utility rate increases are subject to Proposition 218 requirements approved by California voters in 1996. The City must: (1) inform property owners of the new rates and proposed rate increase(s), (2) clearly demonstrate the basis on which the rates are calculated, and (3) hold a public hearing at least 45 days after public notification. If written protests are received representing a majority of properties receiving the utility service, the proposed rate increase(s) will not be imposed. If a sufficient number of protests are not received, the rate increases may be approved by the CityCouncil.
NOTICEISHEREBYGIVENthattheCity ofReddingwillhold a publichearing onTuesday,November 7, 2023, at 6 p.m., in the City Council Chambers at 777 Cypress Avenue, Redding, California, to consider adoption of new rates and proposed increases to existing rates for Water, Wastewater, and Solid Waste Utility services.
Reasons for the proposed rates are described in more detail below. For additional information, please visit the City of Redding Utility website at:www.reddingutilities.com.
Notice of Public Hearing
On Proposed Rate Increases for
Water, Wastewater, and Solid Waste Utilities
Packet Pg. 1072 Attachment: ^2023 Prop 218 Notice (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Waste and Utilities) The property owner and the utility account holder (ratepayer) subject to the proposed rate changes may submit a protest against any or all of the proposed rate changes by filing a written protest with the City Clerk at or before the time set for the public hearing.
Please be advised: (1) More than one notice may be sent for a single property because the City sends notices to both property owners and ratepayers. (2) Property owners may receive more than one copy of this notice if they own multiple properties and/or have multiple City of Redding utility accounts. (3) While the City may receive multiple protests for a given property, only one protest can be counted for each property. (4) Not all utility services apply to each property, for example, some residents receive water from other providers. (5) A Public Hearing and Majority Protest is not an election, there are no “yes” and “no” votes.
If you object to the proposed increase in utility rates for a property you own and/or a utility service you receive, you may submit a written protest against any or all of the proposed rate increases by providing the following information: (1) the property address and/or Shasta County Assessor’s Parcel Number where the service is received; (2) the utility account holder or property owner’s printed name and signature; and (3) listing the proposed utility increase(s) being protested. Then place your written protest notice in an envelope and submit to the City of Redding-City Clerk, 3rd floor, at 777 Cypress Avenue, Redding, California via one of the following methods: (1) U.S. mail, (2) hand-deliver to the City Clerk’s Office, or (3) in person prior to the close of the public hearing. In order for the written protest to be counted as a valid protest, it must contain all the information noted above and be received (not postmarked) by the City Clerk no later than the end of the public hearing noticed above on November 7, 2023.
Please be advised, if the proposed utility rates do not pass, services may be scaled back or modified accordingly to continue operations and comply with regulatory requirements.
If you are satisfied with the level of utility services provided and do not object to the proposed rate increases to fund the operation, maintenance, and replacement costs relating to providing Water, Wastewater, and Solid Waste utilities services, you do not need to take any action.
You may prepare a written protest as instructed above or use this form to protest the proposed utility rate increases.
I, ___________________________________, protest the proposed rate increase(s) for the following utilities:
(Print first and last name, must be legible)
_______________________________________________________________________________________ (Print Water, Wastewater, and/or Solid Waste)
Property Address or Assessor’s Parcel Number: ______________________________________________ (Please Print legibly)
Please sign here: __________________________________________ If you wish to use this form as your written protest, fill out and hand deliver or mail in a stamped envelope to:
City of Redding, City Clerk, 777 Cypress Avenue, Redding, CA, 96001 Packet Pg. 1073 Attachment: ^2023 Prop 218 Notice (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Waste and Utilities) Proposed rates for Solid Waste services:
The proposed single-family residential rates for the various size solid waste carts are depicted in Table 1.
Proposed new rates for collection of source-separated food waste from commercial customers are depicted in Table 2. In addition to the rate tables shown below, commercial accounts have a recommended increase of same percentages shown in Table 1 for each fiscal year. Because of the diverse nature of commercial collection, such as varying number of pickup days per week, size of containers, etc., it is not practical to list all charges and estimated rate changes for this Utility in this rate hearing notice. However, those charges are listed online at www.reddingutilities.com and are available by calling customer service at (530) 224-6201.
TABLE 1 – Proposed Rates for Residential Solid Waste Services 2024 2025 2026 2027
Annual Rate increases as shown in Financial Plan: 15.00% 8.00% 8.00% 6.00% Residential Wheeled Cart Monthly Rate 1
45-Gal Container $25.30 $25.90 $27.97 $30.21 $32.02
64-Gal Container $26.45 $28.34 $30.61 $33.06 $35.04
96-Gal Container $28.30 $32.59 $35.20 $38.02 $40.30
Additional Green Waste Container $4.00 $4.60 $4.97 $5.37 $5.69 Landfill Monitoring
SOLID WASTE RATE SCHEDULE Current Rates
(2023)
($0.22/month - no increases)
Proposed Rates
1. Residential Service includes trash, recycling, and green waste containers.
New Proposed Rates for Commercial Solid Waste Food Waste Services A new commercial rate for businesses is being introduced to provide hauling and disposal services for source separated food waste; a new requirement imposed by the State of California through passage of Senate Bill 1383.
If approved, the proposed rate increases will become effective January 1, 2024. This portion of the proposed increase does not apply to residential customers.
TABLE 2 – New Proposed Rates for Commercial Solid Waste Food Waste Services Container Type 1 2 3 4 5 6
45-Gal Container $29.91 $59.82 $89.72 $119.63 $149.54 $179.45 64-Gal Container $33.49 $66.98 $100.46 $133.95 $167.44 $200.93 1-Yard Container $187.74 $374.22 $560.71 $747.19 $933.67 $1,120.15 2-Yard Container $314.10 $625.95 $937.81 $1,249.67 $1,561.52 $1,873.38 Proposed Commercial Rates
Monthly Rates by Number of Pickups Per Week 2024 Food Waste Rate Schedule Packet Pg. 1074 Attachment: ^2023 Prop 218 Notice (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Waste and Utilities) Proposed rates for Water and Wastewater services:
Water and wastewater rates vary by size of water meter and type of wastewater effluent (i.e., rates are higher for restaurants and similar “high-strength” users). The complete schedule of rate increases under consideration is shown in Tables 3 and 4.
TABLE 3 – Proposed Rates for Water Services
2024 2025 2026 2027
12%/18%* 6.50% 6.50% 6.50%
Fixed Service Charge - Based on Meter Size
* SFR 5/8 and 3/4 inch $24.92 $27.92 $29.73 $31.67 $33.73 3/4 inch $33.30 $39.41 $41.97 $44.70 $47.60
1 inch $50.08 $62.38 $66.44 $70.76 $75.36
1.5 inch $92.01 $119.82 $127.61 $135.91 $144.74
2 inch $142.32 $188.75 $201.02 $214.08 $228.00
3 inch $276.50 $372.55 $396.77 $422.56 $450.03
4 inch $427.45 $579.33 $616.99 $657.10 $699.81
6 inch $846.76 $1,153.72 $1,228.72 $1,308.58 $1,393.64
8 inch $1,349.93 $1,842.99 $1,962.79 $2,090.37 $2,226.24 10 inch N/A $4,829.82 $5,143.76 $5,478.10 $5,834.18
Commodity Charges for All Water Consumed per CCF
Uniform Rate $1.59 $1.88 $2.00 $2.13 $2.27
* Single Family Residents (SFR) Meters are 12% Increase, Commodity Charge is 18% Increase.
Larger Meter Fixed Charges Percent Increases Vary.
CCF = Hundred Cubic Feet (748 gallons)
Monthly Fixed Service Charge - Standard Meters:
Current Recommended Rates
Rates
Proposed Annual Rate Increases
Water Rate Schedule
TABLE 4 – Proposed Rates for Wastewater Services
2024 2025 2026 2027
Proposed Annual Rate increases : 5.00% 5.00% 4.00% 4.00% Monthly Service Charges:
Single Family Dwelling ($/residence) $64.17 $67.38 $70.75 $73.58 $76.52 Multi Family Dwelling ($/unit) $47.49 $49.86 $52.35 $54.44 $56.62 Standard Commercial billed monthly ($/ccf) $6.59 $6.92 $7.27 $7.56 $7.86 Standard Commercial calculated annually ($/# HE) 2 $64.17 $67.38 $70.75 $73.58 $76.52 Commercial Food Preparation billed monthly ($/ccf) $13.20 $13.86 $14.55 $15.13 $15.74 Commercial Food Preparation calculated annually ($/# HE) $128.36 $134.78 $141.52 $147.18 $153.07
SEWER RATE SCHEDULE
Current
Rates
Proposed Rates
HE = Household Equivalent
Packet Pg. 1075 Attachment: ^2023 Prop 218 Notice (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Waste and Utilities) Exhibit B
Solid Waste Overview
The City of Redding collects refuse and recycling, produces recycled product, transports to the landfill, and buries waste for over 30,000 residential and commercial customers. In terms of tonnage of material handled, the Solid Waste Utility handled the following volumes in Fiscal Year 2022-2023.
Activity Weight 2022-2023
Waste collected 67,171
Self-haul waste 24,702
Household Hazardous 283
Recyclables 12,918
Green waste 17,125
Other waste-sweeping 1,131
Total Tons 123,330
The City also operates the Richard W. Curry West Central Landfill (West Central Landfill) for Shasta County and buried a total of 164,053 tons of waste from both jurisdictions. To help meet diversion requirements, the City operates a Household Hazardous Waste Facility, compost operation, vehicle tire recycling, mixed recyclables collection operation, green-waste collection operation, recycling drop-off center, reuse facility, used motor oil and filter recycling program, and mattress recycling program; pulls recyclables off the floor of the Transfer Station; and operates an appliance program for residents. The Solid Waste Utility is experiencing increased operating costs associated with state regulations related to: (1) stormwater pollution prevention, (2) commercial and multi-family recycling, (3) air quality regulations related to diesel emissions, and (4) mandatory organics recycling and diversion.
Existing Rates
Because it serves a wide variety of customers, the Utility has 19 different service rates for different types and sizes of containers and the number of pickups per week. Built into these service rates are the costs of operation of the particular service and the shared cost of operation of other services, such as street sweeping, litter abatement and shopping cart removal, street maintenance (as a result of heavy truck use), storm drain waste disposal, and charges from other agencies or departments.
These costs of operation vary by size of container, type of container, and frequency of collections (in terms of the volume of material handled, the residential and nonresidential sectors are about equal). To keep rates as low as possible and provide beneficial programs, the e-waste diversion and household hazardous waste programs receive funds from a supplemental charge to users of the West Central Landfill.
Also included within the Solid Waste Utility rate is a Benton Landfill monitoring charge. This is a state requirement mandating funds to monitor and maintain the closed and inactive City owned landfill. The monitoring surcharges that affect all customers are not proposed to be changed.
Proposed Rates
The attached 10-Year Financial Plan (Figure SW-1) summarizes the current Solid Waste Utility budget and projects what the expenditures and revenues will be over the next 10 years. The Plan Packet Pg. 1076 Attachment: ^2023 Solid Waste System Overview and Proposed Rates (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid also shows the recommended increases necessary for the next four years and possible increases for the remaining six years of the 10-year projection. The public hearing will only address the rates for the first four years of the 10-Year Financial Plan.
The following table shows the existing rate and what is proposed for a typical single-family home:
Cost Increases and Programs
Tipping-fee (landfill charge) increases, truck and equipment costs, fuel costs to operate vehicles and equipment, planned transfer station facility expansion and maintenance projects, charge for street maintenance, customer service costs, labor and contract costs, health and maintenance costs, increased recycling programs and monitoring, and other charges have all increased for the Utility.
The net effect is that the Utility increase rates over the next four years to cover projected cost increases, and prevent a rapid reduction of the reserve and its depletion. The proposed rates will allow the reserve to be maintained at a level that declines sharply in the beginning but then meets or exceeds 90 days cash on hand for the remainder of the Plan. The effects of Assembly Bill 1826 (a bill that is a mandate to divert organics), Assembly Bill 341 (a bill to increase diversion from 50 percent to 75 percent by increasing the focus on commercial and multi-family dwellings) and Senate Bill 1383 (a bill to reduce disposal of organics in landfills including source separated food waste and increase edible food recovery) have resulted in upward cost pressure. Additionally, a new commercial fee is proposed in order to address the costs associated with fully implementing a new program that meets the regulatory requirements of collecting source separated food waste and diverting it form landfills.
FY 2023/24 FY 2024/25 FY 2025/26 FY 2026/27 FY 2027/28
Annual Rate increases as shown in Financial Plan: 15.00% 8.00% 8.00% 6.00% 4.00% Residential Wheeled Cart Monthly Rate 1
45-Gal Container $25.30 $25.90 $27.97 $30.21 $32.02 $33.30 64-Gal Container $26.45 $28.34 $30.61 $33.06 $35.04 $36.44 96-Gal Container $28.30 $32.59 $35.20 $38.02 $40.30 $41.91 Additional Green Waste Container $4.00 $4.60 $4.97 $5.37 $5.69 $5.91 Landfill Monitoring
SOLID WASTE RATE SCHEDULE Current
Rates (22/23)
Proposed Rates
($0.22/month - no increases)
Summary of 2023/24 Commercial CONTAINERS (Scheduled & Unscheduled):
1 2 3 4 5 6
Commercial Bin 1.0 $92.20 $183.56 $274.91 $366.27 $457.63 $548.99 Adjustments for Foodwaste Collection
Adjusted 1 CY Rates for Foodwaste Collection: $187.74 $374.22 $560.71 $747.19 $933.67 $1,120.15 % Increase over Non-Foodwaste 103.6% 103.9% 104.0% 104.0% 104.0% 104.0% Front Load Compactor 2.0 $208.17 $414.66 $621.15 $827.64 $1,034.13 $1,240.62 Adjustments for Foodwaste Collection
Adjusted 2 CY Rates for Foodwaste Collection: $314.10 $625.95 $937.81 $1,249.67 $1,561.52 $1,873.38 % Increase over Non-Foodwaste 50.9% 51.0% 51.0% 51.0% 51.0% 51.0% Container Type 1
Size
(CY)
Monthly Rates for 2 CY Foodwaste by No. of Pickups Per Week Summary of 2023/24 48- and 65-gal. Carts for Foodwaste:
Foodwaste 48-Gal. Cart $25.90 $29.91 $59.82 $89.72 $119.63 $149.54 $179.45 Foodwaste 65-Gal. Cart $28.34 $33.49 $66.98 $100.46 $133.95 $167.44 $200.93 Monthly Rates for 48- and 65-Gal. Foodwaste Carts
by No. of Pickups Per Week
Container Type 1 1 2 3 4 6
Proposed
Resid. Rate
5 Packet Pg. 1077 Attachment: ^2023 Solid Waste System Overview and Proposed Rates (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid The Utility expects to expand some current programs and investigate the addition of new programs during the next several years. However, the Utility will need to increase public education, continue to improve route efficiency, add equipment and resources to meet mandatory diversion requirements, and monitor staffing levels in order to facilitate daily routes and collections. The Utility uses revenues from the sale of recyclables to offset a portion of the cost of collection and diversion of recyclables and organics from the landfill. The State has continued to increase emphasis on recycling and mandate the implementation of organics diversion programs as part of the plan to reduce greenhouse gas emissions.
Attachments:
Figure SW-1 Proposed Ten-Year Financial Plan with recommended rates Packet Pg. 1078 Attachment: ^2023 Solid Waste System Overview and Proposed Rates (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Figure SW
-1
Budget
FY 2022/23 FY 2023/24 FY 2024/25 FY 2025/26 FY 2026/27 FY 2027/28 FY 2028/29 FY 2029/30 FY 2030/31 FY 2031/32 FY 2032/33 Sources of Solid Waste Funds
Rate Revenues:
Residential Rate Revenue 9,942,670 $ 10,011,595 $ 10,081,039 $ 10,148,617 $ 10,216,299 $ 10,282,633 $ 10,348,034 $ 10,412,088 $ 10,475,313 $ 10,537,087 $ 10,598,239 $ Commercial Rate Revenue 7,691,470 7,744,789 7,798,510 7,850,787 7,903,144 7,954,459 8,005,052 8,054,603 8,103,513 8,151,300 8,198,606 Roll-Off Rate Revenue 2,633,490 2,651,746 2,670,139 2,688,039 2,705,965 2,723,535 2,740,858 2,757,824 2,774,570 2,790,932 2,807,129 Non-Rate Revenues:
Transfer Station Gate Fees 2,385,000 2,761,764 3,003,394 3,265,409 3,484,417 3,647,323 3,817,342 3,994,610 4,179,621 4,330,397 4,486,194 Recycling Materials Revenues 992,901 999,784 1,006,719 1,013,468 1,020,227 1,026,851 1,033,382 1,039,779 1,046,092 1,052,261 1,058,368 Misc. Other Revenues2 163,600 182,010 193,892 206,754 217,538 225,608 234,018 242,775 251,903 259,373 267,084 Total Sources of Funds 23,809,131 $ 24,351,689 $ 24,753,693 $ 25,173,073 $ 25,547,590 $ 25,860,409 $ 26,178,687 $ 26,501,679 $ 26,831,013 $ 27,121,350 $ 27,415,620 $ Uses of Solid Waste Funds
Operating Expenses:
Solid Waste Administration 3,536,040 $ 3,657,090 $ 3,504,070 $ 3,623,001 $ 3,746,262 $ 3,874,052 $ 4,006,513 $ 4,143,816 $ 4,286,081 $ 4,433,548 $ 4,586,410 $ Residential Collection Expenses 3,509,660 3,992,580 4,088,820 4,220,440 4,356,330 4,496,650 4,641,560 4,791,240 4,945,850 5,105,560 5,270,580 Commercial Collection Expenses 3,388,110 3,684,650 4,047,680 4,180,860 4,318,430 4,460,570 4,607,420 4,759,190 4,916,010 5,078,090 5,245,600 Roll-Off Collection Expenses 1,528,340 1,645,300 1,721,680 1,703,400 1,761,580 1,821,790 1,884,060 1,948,520 2,015,200 2,084,220 2,155,670 Resource Recovery Expenses 5,928,560 7,711,910 8,003,440 8,258,820 8,590,070 8,935,300 9,295,100 9,670,150 10,061,100 10,468,680 10,893,630 Transfer Station Expenses 4,149,480 4,452,820 4,703,820 4,251,956 4,375,517 4,503,758 4,636,839 4,774,930 4,940,410 5,111,780 5,289,270 Hazardous Household Waste Expenses 751,240 814,100 909,000 836,480 869,710 904,360 940,410 977,940 1,017,040 1,057,770 1,100,110 Street Sweeping Expenses 1,387,470 1,498,310 1,782,480 1,759,870 1,841,400 1,929,600 1,946,540 1,977,470 1,912,420 1,945,420 1,979,540 Subtotal: Operating Expenses 24,178,900 $ 27,456,760 $ 28,760,990 $ 28,834,827 $ 29,859,299 $ 30,926,080 $ 31,958,442 $ 33,043,256 $ 34,094,111 $ 35,285,068 $ 36,520,810 $ Other Expenditures:
Future Debt Service - - - - 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 Future Expansion Projects - - - - - - 3,000,000 3,000,000 Rate-Funded Capital Expenses 3 1,658,350 - - - - - - - - - - Subtotal: Other Expenditures 1,658,350 $ - $ - $ - $ 2,000,000 $ 2,000,000 $ 2,000,000 $ 2,000,000 $ 2,000,000 $ 5,000,000 $ 5,000,000 $ Total Uses of Solid Waste Funds 25,837,250 $ 27,456,760 $ 28,760,990 $ 28,834,827 $ 31,859,299 $ 32,926,080 $ 33,958,442 $ 35,043,256 $ 36,094,111 $ 40,285,068 $ 41,520,810 $ plus: Revenue from Rate Increases - 1,530,610 4,973,025 7,061,865 8,785,023 10,034,172 11,345,671 12,721,517 14,164,851 15,320,214 16,519,517 Annual Surplus/(Deficit) After Rate Increases ($2,028,119) ($1,574,462) $965,728 $3,400,111 $2,473,315 $2,968,501 $3,565,915 $4,179,940 $4,901,753 $2,156,495 $2,414,327 Net Revenue Req't. (Total Uses less Non-Rate Revenue) 11,970,789 $ 23,513,202 $ 24,556,985 $ 24,349,197 $ 27,137,117 $ 28,026,298 $ 28,873,700 $ 29,766,092 $ 30,616,494 $ 34,643,037 $ 35,709,164 $ Total Rate Revenue After Rate Increases 20,267,630 $ 21,938,741 $ 25,522,713 $ 27,749,308 $ 29,610,432 $ 30,994,799 $ 32,439,615 $ 33,946,032 $ 35,518,247 $ 36,799,532 $ 38,123,491 $ Projected Annual Rate Increase 4 0.00% 15.00% 8.00% 8.00% 6.00% 4.00% 4.00% 4.00% 4.00% 3.00% 3.00%Cumulative Increase from Annual Rate Increases 0.00% 15.00% 24.20% 34.14% 42.18% 47.87% 53.79% 59.94% 66.34% 71.33% 76.47% RATE REVENUE REQUIREMENTS SUMMARY 1
Projected
Packet Pg. 1079 Attachment: ^2023 Solid Waste System Overview and Proposed Rates (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Exhibit C
Wastewater Utility Overview
The Wastewater Utility funds and operates two regional wastewater treatment plants. It also manages over 442 miles of sewer collection line and 18 lift stations serving approximately 39,380 connections. The utility’s rates do not fund maintenance of lateral lines from the sewer line to a building. The wastewater treatment plants process the wastewater and discharge to the Sacramento River. Of the wastewater collected and treated by the utility, about 70 percent is from residential customers and 30 percent is from nonresidential or commercial customers.
Peak hydraulic loads for the Wastewater Utility are just the opposite of those of the Water Utility due to the intrusion of storm water into the sewer system. The terms for this are inflow and infiltration (I&I) and there is an ongoing effort of the utility to reduce the flow due to this. For illustrative purposes, in the summer, peak dry weather flows to the two treatment plants are about 10 million gallons per day (MGD) in a normal year. In the winter, peak wet weather flows can reach 50 MGD or a five-fold increase. In order to prevent overflows into the river, the utility must be able to process these flows.
Like the other utilities, the Wastewater Utility has been affected by cost increases for continued environmental and regulatory mandates, materials and chemicals, fuel, salaries, health and retirement costs, and capital construction. These pressures are projected to continue into the foreseeable future.
One of the key challenges for the wastewater system is I&I. As the physical integrity of a sewer system deteriorates over time, I&I increases. The resulting hydraulic loads reduce available capacity, increase treatment costs, and increase the likelihood of sanitary sewer overflows (SSO’s).
Some of the City’s sewer lines are more than 100 years old. The Capital Improvement Plan for the next ten years includes a significant pipe replacement program, pipe and manhole rehabilitation projects, and storm drain improvements.
Another significant challenge for the wastewater utility is the regulatory driven requirements dealing with the diversion of organics from landfill disposal. Currently, biosolids from both treatment plants are disposed of at the West Central Landfill. California Senate Bill 1383 has strict requirements regarding the disposal of organic material, which is requiring the Solid Waste utility to find a diversion program for food waste. These additions have driven the adoption of new technologies and other biosolid management practices. One such project is the new Pyrolysis process at the Clear Creek plant, which is currently under construction. Moving forward with the reception of food waste at the wastewater plant will require the expansion of the Pyrolysis system to accept additional biosolids loading.
The Clear Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant was built in 1966 and expanded in 1979 to treat a peak wet weather flow of 16.2 MGD. In 2014, an $83 million rehabilitation and expansion project was completed that increased the peak wet weather capacity to 40 MGD. The Stillwater Wastewater Treatment Plant was put into operation in 1991 to treat a peak flow of 8.7 MGD. A $13 million rehabilitation and expansion project was also completed in 2014 that increased the peak wet weather capacity to 14.4 MGD. The majority of the funding for the plant rehabilitations and expansions was from low-interest loans from the State. Both projects were funded by a combination of connection fees paid by new development and monthly rates.
The table below shows planned capital projects of more than $500,000 planned in the next five years for the Wastewater Utility along with the projected cost and the source of funding. “Rates” Packet Pg. 1080 Attachment: ^2023 Wastewater System Overview and Proposed Rates (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid represent the portion of funding from monthly sewer rates. “Fees” are revenue from the connection fees paid by new development.
Wastewater Utility Capital Improvements 2024-2030
Capital Projects Cost Funding Source
Inflow and Infiltration Reduction $10,260,823 Rates 100% West Side Interceptor Phase III $10,000,000 Fees 100%
6-8" Line Repair/Replacement $24,250,881 Rates 100%
Lift Station Improvements $1,812,000 Rates 100%
Miscellaneous Treatment Plant Improvements $2,725,000 Rates 100% Magnolia Sewer Phase II $7,000,000 Rates 100%
Lake Redding Interceptor I $4,975,000 Rates 91% and Fees 9% Biosolids Pyrolysis $19,000,000 Rates 100%
Mercury Drive Sewer $1,450,000 Rates 100%
Clear Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant $4,079,146 Rates 100% Stillwater Wastewater Treatment Plant $2,719,524 Rates 100% Sludge Lagoons & Drying Beds $8,500,000 Rates 100%
Buenaventura Sewer $5,200,000 Rates 91% and Fees 9%
Sulphur Creek $2,931,430 Fees 100%
Clear Creek Pond Upgrades $3,413,095 Rates 75% and Fees 25% Rates fund a significant portion of the costs associated with maintaining the sanitary sewer system.
Whether or not the City will be able to accomplish all of these projects depends on the number of new connections, rates, and the actual construction costs. If an identified capital improvement cannot be funded, it will be deferred until funding is available and will then compete with other new needs.
Proposed Rates
Wastewater rates are predicated on the expense to maintain and expand the system needed to collect, transport, and treat wastewater. The flow produced by a typical single-family residence is expressed as a “household equivalent” (HE) and is the basis for rate charges. For example, a single-family household is expressed as one HE, and one HE is equivalent to 240 gallons per day of wastewater. An apartment is slightly less, and commercial, industrial, and public uses are calculated based on the number of household equivalents they generate each day. Industrial users have not only the volume of discharge calculated, but the strength of that discharge as well. Some commercial customers also have a rate that reflects the strength of discharge. The strength of the wastewater is measured as the amount of solids and organics in the wastewater. For example, typical food preparation facilities (restaurants) will discharge higher strength wastewater than a retail store.
Packet Pg. 1081 Attachment: ^2023 Wastewater System Overview and Proposed Rates (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid The following table shows the recommended rate increases for all customer classes:
Comparison of Existing to Proposed Rates
HE=Household Equivalent
The attached Ten-Year Financial Plan, Figure WW-1, summarizes the current Wastewater Utility budget and future expenditures and revenues with the recommended increases. The public hearing only addresses the rates for the first four years of the Ten-Year Financial Plan.
It is the recommendation of the Wastewater Utility that the proposed rate increases are approved to fund the ongoing maintenance and upkeep of the sanitary sewer system for the benefit of citizens of the City of Redding.
Attachments:
Figure WW-1 Proposed Ten-Year Financial Plan with recommended rates 2024 2025 2026 2027
Proposed Annual Rate increases : 5.00% 5.00% 4.00% 4.00% Monthly Service Charges:
Single Family Dwelling ($/residence) $64.17 $67.38 $70.75 $73.58 $76.52 Multi Family Dwelling ($/unit) $47.49 $49.86 $52.35 $54.44 $56.62 Standard Commercial billed monthly ($/ccf) $6.59 $6.92 $7.27 $7.56 $7.86 Standard Commercial calculated annually ($/# HE) $64.17 $67.38 $70.75 $73.58 $76.52 Commercial Food Preparation billed monthly ($/ccf) $13.20 $13.86 $14.55 $15.13 $15.74 Commercial Food Preparation calculated annually ($/# HE) $128.36 $134.78 $141.52 $147.18 $153.07
SEWER RATE SCHEDULE
Current
Rates
Proposed Rates
Packet Pg. 1082 Attachment: ^2023 Wastewater System Overview and Proposed Rates (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Figure WW-1
Budget Budget
FY 2022/23 FY 2023/24 FY 2024/25 FY 2025/26 FY 2026/27 FY 2027/28 FY 2028/29 FY 2029/30 FY 2030/31 FY 2031/32 FY 2032/33 FY 2033/34 Sources of Wastewater Funds
Rate Revenue Under Prevailing Rates 34,060,526 $ 34,060,526 $ 34,060,526 $ 34,060,526 $ 34,060,526 $ 34,060,526 $ 34,060,526 $ 34,060,526 $ 34,060,526 $ 34,060,526 $ 34,060,526 $ 34,060,526 $ Non-Rate Revenues 78,537 78,357 81,842 85,499 89,335 93,359 97,582 102,012 106,660 111,538 116,657 122,029 Interest Earnings (in O&M, Capital and Debt reserves)2 479,699 - - - - - - - - - - - Total Sources of Funds 34,618,762 $ 34,138,883 $ 34,142,368 $ 34,146,025 $ 34,149,861 $ 34,153,885 $ 34,158,108 $ 34,162,538 $ 34,167,186 $ 34,172,064 $ 34,177,183 $ 34,182,555 $ Uses of Wastewater Funds
Operating Expenses (Divisions less Interdepart. Charges):
WW - Industrial Pretreatment (Division 870) 835,347 $ 938,850 $ 988,253 $ 1,037,665 $ 1,089,548 $ 1,144,026 $ 1,201,227 $ 1,261,288 $ 1,324,353 $ 1,390,571 $ 1,460,099 $ 1,533,104 $ WW - System-Administration (Division 871) 586,049 $ 593,790 $ 618,836 $ 649,778 $ 682,267 $ 716,380 $ 752,199 $ 789,809 $ 829,299 $ 870,764 $ 914,303 $ 960,018 $ WW - Stillwater Treatment Plant (Division 872) 2,366,627 $ 2,478,850 $ 2,575,743 $ 2,704,530 $ 2,839,756 $ 2,981,744 $ 3,130,831 $ 3,287,373 $ 3,451,741 $ 3,624,328 $ 3,805,545 $ 3,995,822 $ WW - Collection Systems (Division 874) 2,559,357 $ 2,740,780 $ 2,858,444 $ 3,001,366 $ 3,151,435 $ 3,309,006 $ 3,474,457 $ 3,648,179 $ 3,830,588 $ 4,022,118 $ 4,223,224 $ 4,434,385 $ WW - Clear Creek Treatment Plant (Division 875) 3,706,410 $ 3,764,390 $ 3,831,825 $ 3,986,916 $ 4,148,681 $ 4,317,423 $ 4,493,457 $ 4,677,114 $ 4,868,740 $ 5,068,698 $ 5,277,367 $ 5,495,146 $ Interdepartmental Charges 6,048,612 $ 6,852,280 $ 7,194,894 $ 7,554,639 $ 7,932,371 $ 8,328,989 $ 8,745,439 $ 9,182,711 $ 9,641,846 $ 10,123,938 $ 10,630,135 $ 11,161,642 $ Subtotal: Operating Expenses 16,102,402 $ 17,368,940 $ 18,067,994 $ 18,934,893 $ 19,844,058 $ 20,797,568 $ 21,797,609 $ 22,846,474 $ 23,946,568 $ 25,100,417 $ 26,310,673 $ 27,580,117 $ Other Expenditures:
Existing Debt Service (funded by rates)3 10,173,269 $ 7,290,393 $ 6,171,887 $ 6,172,887 $ 6,174,637 $ 6,171,637 $ 6,173,637 $ 5,899,897 $ 5,583,637 $ 3,239,750 $ 3,051,250 $ 2,490,250 $ New Debt Service (to be funded by rates) - - - - - - - - - - - - Rate-Funded Capital Expenses 22,745,832 13,422,336 8,397,640 13,932,691 9,603,251 11,779,649 11,345,220 13,418,858 17,658,450 21,262,825 24,357,673 20,147,007 Subtotal: Other Expenditures 32,919,101 $ 20,712,728 $ 14,569,527 $ 20,105,577 $ 15,777,888 $ 17,951,285 $ 17,518,857 $ 19,318,755 $ 23,242,087 $ 24,502,575 $ 27,408,923 $ 22,637,257 $ Total Uses of Wastewater Funds 49,021,504 $ 38,081,668 $ 32,637,521 $ 39,040,471 $ 35,621,945 $ 38,748,853 $ 39,316,466 $ 42,165,228 $ 47,188,655 $ 49,602,993 $ 53,719,596 $ 50,217,374 $ plus: Revenue from Rate Increases - 851,513 3,491,204 4,993,273 6,555,425 8,180,063 9,869,687 11,626,895 13,454,392 15,354,989 17,331,609 19,387,295 Annual Surplus/(Deficit) (14,402,742) $ (3,091,272) $ 4,996,051 $ 98,827 $ 5,083,341 $ 3,585,095 $ 4,711,328 $ 3,624,205 $ 432,924 $ (75,939) $ (2,210,804) $ 3,352,476 $ Net Revenue Req't. (Total Uses less Non-Rate Revenue) 48,463,268 $ 38,003,311 $ 32,555,679 $ 38,954,972 $ 35,532,610 $ 38,655,494 $ 39,218,884 $ 42,063,216 $ 47,081,994 $ 49,491,454 $ 53,602,939 $ 50,095,345 $ Total Rate Revenue After Rate Increases 34,060,526 $ 34,912,039 $ 37,551,730 $ 39,053,799 $ 40,615,951 $ 42,240,589 $ 43,930,213 $ 45,687,421 $ 47,514,918 $ 49,415,515 $ 51,392,135 $ 53,447,821 $ Projected Annual Rate Increase 0.0% 5.00% 5.00% 4.00% 4.00% 4.00% 4.00% 4.00% 4.00% 4.00% 4.00% 4.00% Cumulative Increase from Annual Rate Increases 0.00% 5.00% 10.25% 14.66% 19.25% 24.02% 28.98% 34.14% 39.50% 45.08% 50.88% 56.92% Coverage After Rate Increase (0.42) 0.58 1.81 1.02 1.82 1.58 1.76 1.61 1.08 0.98 0.28 2.35
1. Revenue and expenses are per the City's Proforma (Source file: Redding_WW proforma Budget Version 2023 - FINAL VERSIONv.xlsx2. Refers to the City's budget for interest earnings in FY 2022/23. For all future years, interest earnings are calculated here based on the City's Pooled Cash Interest Rate. Source file: REDDING_ Pooled Cash Interest Rate Dec 2018.xlsx .3. Debt service that cannot be fully paid through the Impact Fee Reserve Fund has been added to Debt Service to be funded by rates.
RATE REVENUE REQUIREMENTS SUMMARY1 Projected
Packet Pg. 1083 Attachment: ^2023 Wastewater System Overview and Proposed Rates (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Exhibit D
Water Utility Overview
The City of Redding Water Utility provides water service to more than 88,000 people in what the United States Bureau of Reclamation (Reclamation) recognizes as the Redding Water Service Area. This approved service area includes nearly all of the incorporated area of the City of Redding and a small area of the County in northwest of Redding. It does not include portions of northeast Redding served by the Bella Vista Water District and the southwest served by Centerville Community Service District. The annual demand of nearly 25,000-acre feet of water is largely met from the 27,000 plus acre feet of historic and post Shasta Dam water contracts. This surface water comes from Whiskeytown Reservoir via the Spring Creek conduit and the Sacramento River via Pump Station No. 1 (PS-1) located along the south side of the Sacramento River Trail. In addition, the City utilizes and has the capacity to draw nearly 11,000 acre-feet of groundwater from 17 wells located in the Enterprise area and southwest portions of town.
Water System Infrastructure
The infrastructure required to meet the demands can be divided into two key areas including:
Treatment - The City’s water treatment infrastructure consists of the Foothill Water Treatment Plant, Buckeye Water Treatment Plant, 17 wells located in the Enterprise and Cascade areas and the supporting facilities. The Foothill Treatment Plant is the system’s workhorse treating 40 percent of the City’s water which is pumped from PS-1 located along the Sacramento River. The Buckeye Treatment Plant, which is located west of Keswick Lake along the Spring Creek Conduit, meets approximately 30 percent of the water demand for the City. The 17 Enterprise and Cascade wells meet the remaining 30 percent of Redding’s water demand.
Distribution - Following treatment, the City’s water is stored in 12 reservoirs throughout Redding and supplied to the utility’s customers through over 560 miles of water main and 30,500 service connections. In addition, there are 11 booster pumps located throughout the city to maintain water pressure within the various pressure zones.
The 2023 Water Master Plan presents a review of the City’s water system and provides planning direction for the system through 2045, including water demand forecasts, required water supply, and recommended capital improvements to needed to maintain and grow the system.
Water System Preservation Needs
Much of the existing water system infrastructure is dated and in need of preservation efforts to continue meeting Redding water demands. Key areas of need are summarized as follows:
• Treatment - following are key water treatment preservation-related facility’s needs:
• Foothill Water Treatment Plant - The Foothill Treatment Plant was initially constructed in 1920, went through a significant upgrade in 1979 that added additional capacity, and has had several smaller upgrades since to meet growing population and regulatory standards. In 2011, PACE Engineering prepared a Facilities Plan that provided a number of preservation related recommendations including a new control building and replacement of the supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) Packet Pg. 1084 Attachment: ^2023 Water System Overview and Proposed Rates (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Waste systems to better automate and ensure continued plant operation, electrical system upgrade, construction of a second clarifier to allow for adequate storage, replacement of the aging flocculator basins, and other various piping upgrades. The total cost of remaining preservation related improvements is estimated at $16 million by 2035. • Enterprise Wells - The Enterprise wells in particular have identified concerns with arsenic at two wells and iron/manganese at several other wells. It is recommended that wells with high arsenic levels remain offline as the resolution of the arsenic issues is substantial and water supply needs for the City can be met without these wells producing water. It is recommended, based on continued community interest in resolving the iron/manganese issue, that well head treatment at EW12, the highest producing well, be implemented to blend and dilute constituent levels to below their respective MCLs. It is also noted that the utility has made relatively significant operational changes with very positive results that have minimized the concerns including implementation of a more aggressive water main flushing program as well as “pushing” treated water from the Buckeye Treatment plant to east Redding allowing reduced water use from iron/manganese problematic wells.
• Pump Station No. 1 - PS-1 was constructed in 1937 on the south side of the Sacramento River Trail just upstream of the Diestelhorst Bridge. The intake is influenced dramatically by river elevation levels dictated by downstream Anderson Cottonwood Irrigation District’s diversion program. It has been a target of concern with the National Oceanic and Atmosphere Administration (NOAA) Fisheries due to potential pump impacts on salmon migration in the Sacramento River. Jacobs Engineering updated the feasibility study in 2022 and has begun the environmental clearance and engineering design process for a new pump station at a location upriver. Construction of a new pump station upstream is estimated at $40 million within the next 6 years. • Distribution - following are key preservation recommendations concerning water distribution related facilities:
• Storage – Additional storage is necessary under existing conditions in the Hill 900 and Buckeye Pressure Zones to meet standard storage criteria for the combination of Equalization, Fire Service, and Emergency Storage. New 2.0MG and 2.0MG storage facilities are recommended to address the current conditions and provide for ultimate build-out and replacement of aging facilities. Additional pump station upgradesto meet ultimate build-out demands in the Buckeye and Cascade Pressure Zones, and replacement of older reservoirs is also identified.
• Pipe Replacement - As noted above, the City has over 560 miles of water main with much of it cast iron or steel, typically 50 to 80 years old. In addition, the city has grown to where demands are being met in some of the pipes by increasing velocities which shorten the life of the pipe. Water pipe failures have become relatively common as highlighted by several failures of water lines in the last ten years. It is recommended to expand the City’s pipe replacement program to meet pipe age, material, and existing capacity issues at between $5 and $20 million per year over the next 10 years.
Water System Future Growth Needs
The City of Redding’s water demands will continue to increase as the population in Redding Packet Pg. 1085 Attachment: ^2023 Water System Overview and Proposed Rates (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Waste grows. Growth rates, developed by Itron Inc. for the Redding Electric Utility, project growth rates at 0.7 percent thru 2027. Other factors that may affect water demand include State water conservation mandates and California Green Building Code requirements. The master plan analysis reviewed projected needs in the Short Term (five-year outlook), a 10- and 20-year outlook, and Ultimate Build Out (50 to 70 years). Following are highlights of the projected water infrastructure projected needs:
• Treatment - No additional growth-related capacity needs are identified in the City’s treatment facilities over the next 10 years. It is expected that two additional wells will need to be added to the system, or two wells rehabilitated and reactivated, in the next 10 years to meet projected demands.
• Distribution - Additional water main capacity will be needed to distribute water to areas of Redding where growth is being considered and capacity is not available or old, high velocity mains need replacement and larger pipes are recommended to meet additional demands. Additional water main capacity to meet east Redding demands for Buckeye water is currently under construction with a new 24” water main in Lake Boulevard.
The table below shows planned capital projects of more than $1,000,000 for the Water Utility for the next five years, along with the projected cost and the source of funding. “Rates” represent the portion of funding from monthly water rates. “Fees” are revenue from the connection fees paid by new development:
Water Utility Capital Improvement Projects 2024-2030
Capital Projects Cost Funding Source
Water Main Replacement $36,000,000 Rates 100%
Pump Station No. 1 Relocation $40,000,000 Rates 100%
Foothill WTP Control Building & SCADA $5,000,000 Rates 100% Buckeye Reservoir Booster Pump Station $1,500,000 Rates 100% Cypress Booster Pump Station $5,000,000 Rates 100%
S. Bonnyview & Railroad Pump Station Upgrades $2,000,000 Rates 100% Ranchettes 12” Water Main $1,500,000 Rates 100%
Buckeye Reservoir - New 2MG $5,000,000 Rates 100%
Hill 900 Reservoir Rehab and New 2MG $6,000,000 Rates 100% New Enterprise Well $4,300,000 Rates 100%
Rates fund a significant portion of the costs associated with maintaining the water system. Whether or not the City will be able to accomplish all of these projects depends on the number of new connections, rates, and the actual construction costs. If an identified capital improvement cannot be funded, it will be deferred until funding is available and will then compete with other new needs.
Packet Pg. 1086 Attachment: ^2023 Water System Overview and Proposed Rates (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Waste Proposed Rates
Water rates are predicated on the expense to maintain and expand the system needed to treat, pump, transport, and distribute water. The proposed water rate schedule includes a fixed meter charge to cover the majority of the cost of delivering water to the customer, as well as a variable (commodity) charge based on the actual amount of water consumed. Water consumption is measured in units of one hundred cubic feet (ccf), which is equal to 748 gallons. The following table shows the recommended rate increases for all customer classes:
Comparison of Existing to Proposed Rates
A typical single-family residence, using 21 ccf per month, would be as follows:
Schedule Existing 2024 2025 2026 2027
Fixed Meter Charge +
21 ccf Commodity
Charge
$58.31 $67.39 $71.72 $76.39 $81.38
The attached Ten-Year Financial Plan, Figure W-1 summarizes the current Water Utility budget and future expenditures and revenues with the recommended increases. The public hearing only addresses the rates for the first four years of the Ten-Year Financial Plan. As discussed earlier in this report, the recommended rate increases affect both the service and the commodity charge.
It is the recommendation of the Water Utility that the proposed rate increases are approved to fund the ongoing maintenance and upkeep of the water system for the benefit of citizens of the City of Redding.
Attachments:
Figure W-1 Proposed Ten-Year Financial Plan with recommended rates Proposed - Rate Design (40% Fixed / 60% Variable)
2024 2025 2026 2027
12%/18%* 6.50% 6.50% 6.50%
Fixed Service Charge
5/8 inch $24.92 $27.91 $29.72 $31.66 $33.71
3/4 inch $33.30 $39.41 $41.97 $44.70 $47.61
1 inch $50.08 $62.42 $66.48 $70.80 $75.40
1.5 inch $92.01 $119.93 $127.73 $136.03 $144.87
2 inch $142.32 $188.95 $201.23 $214.31 $228.24
3 inch $276.50 $372.99 $397.24 $423.06 $450.56
4 inch $427.45 $580.04 $617.75 $657.90 $700.66
6 inch $846.76 $1,155.18 $1,230.27 $1,310.23 $1,395.40
8 inch $1,349.93 $1,845.35 $1,965.29 $2,093.04 $2,229.08 10 inch N/A $4,836.06 $5,150.41 $5,485.18 $5,841.72
Commodity Charges for All Water Consumed
Uniform Rate $1.59 $1.88 $2.00 $2.13 $2.27
* Single Family Residents (SFR) 5/8" Meters are 12% Increase, Commodity Charge is 18% Increase.
Larger Meter Fixed Charges Percent Increases Vary.
Monthly Fixed Service Charge - Standard Meters:
Current Recommended Rates
Rates
Projected Increase in Rate Revenue per Financial Plan:
Water Rate Schedule
Packet Pg. 1087 Attachment: ^2023 Water System Overview and Proposed Rates (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Waste Figure W-1
Actuals 2 Budget
FY 2022/23 FY 2023/24 FY 2024/25 FY 2025/26 FY 2026/27 FY 2027/28 FY 2028/29 FY 2029/30 FY 2030/31 FY 2031/32 FY 2032/33 FY 2033/34 Sources of Water Funds
Rate Revenue Under Prevailing Rates 28,527,660 $ 28,527,660 $ 28,527,660 $ 28,527,660 $ 28,527,660 $ 28,527,660 $ 28,527,660 $ 28,527,660 $ 28,527,660 $ 28,527,660 $ 28,527,660 $ 28,527,660 $ Non-Rate Revenue 462,610 413,460 422,222 433,290 444,674 456,374 468,402 480,766 493,479 506,548 519,988 533,805 Interest Earnings 3 - - 585,903 450,983 404,016 351,247 296,817 174,458 136,437 182,449 249,035 153,732 Total Sources of Funds 28,990,270 $ 28,941,120 $ 29,535,785 $ 29,411,933 $ 29,376,350 $ 29,335,281 $ 29,292,879 $ 29,182,885 $ 29,157,576 $ 29,216,657 $ 29,296,683 $ 29,215,197 $ Uses of Water Funds
Operating Expenses:
WTR - GENERAL & ADMIN (Division 861) 5,985,490 $ 2,960,880 $ 3,081,358 $ 3,206,830 $ 3,337,508 $ 3,473,610 $ 3,615,367 $ 3,763,018 $ 3,916,812 $ 4,077,009 $ 4,243,880 $ 4,417,708 $ WTR - PRODUCTION (Division 862) - 1,770,000 1,790,000 988,374 1,017,617 1,047,726 1,078,725 1,110,641 1,143,502 1,177,335 1,212,169 1,248,034 WATER TREATMENT (Division 863) 7,843,000 8,156,726 8,458,108 8,771,312 9,096,827 9,435,167 9,786,866 10,302,484 10,690,102 11,093,204 11,512,444 WTR - DISTRIBUTION (Division 864) 7,117,590 8,048,500 8,376,744 8,730,130 9,098,809 9,483,458 9,884,785 10,303,528 10,740,461 11,196,391 11,672,163 12,168,659 Subtotal: Operating Expenses 13,103,080 $ 20,622,380 $ 21,404,828 $ 21,383,442 $ 22,225,245 $ 23,101,621 $ 24,014,044 $ 24,964,054 $ 26,103,258 $ 27,140,836 $ 28,221,415 $ 29,346,845 $ Other Expenditures:
Existing Debt Service 733,200 $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ Future Debt Service (SRF Loan) - - - 2,016,471 2,016,471 2,016,471 2,016,471 2,016,471 2,016,471 2,016,471 2,016,471 2,016,471 Rate-Funded Capital Expenses 15,744,888 - 7,200,000 8,200,000 9,200,000 7,930,387 11,965,719 19,531,752 15,165,375 15,247,226 27,314,713 16,005,566 Subtotal: Other Expenditures 16,478,088 $ - $ 7,200,000 $ 10,216,471 $ 11,216,471 $ 9,946,858 $ 13,982,191 $ 21,548,223 $ 17,181,846 $ 17,263,697 $ 29,331,184 $ 18,022,038 $ Total Uses of Water Funds 29,581,168 $ 20,622,380 $ 28,604,828 $ 31,599,913 $ 33,441,716 $ 33,048,478 $ 37,996,234 $ 46,512,277 $ 43,285,105 $ 44,404,533 $ 57,552,600 $ 47,368,882 $ Increase/Decrease to Reserves (Before Rate Increases) 14,298,890 $ 8,318,740 $ 930,957 $ (2,187,980) $ (4,065,366) $ (3,713,197) $ (8,703,355) $ (17,329,392) $ (14,127,529) $ (15,187,876) $ (28,255,917) $ (18,153,685) $ Plus: Revenue from Rate Increases 4 - 927,149 3,842,823 5,974,339 8,259,402 10,155,065 12,157,021 14,270,269 16,501,150 18,854,765 21,338,781 23,958,097Increase/Decrease to Reserves (After Rate Increases) (590,898) $ 9,245,889 $ 4,773,780 $ 3,786,359 $ 4,194,036 $ 6,441,868 $ 3,453,665 $ (3,059,124) $ 2,373,622 $ 3,666,889 $ (6,917,136) $ 5,804,412 $ Net Revenue Req't. (Total Uses less Non-Rate Revenue) 29,118,558 $ 20,208,920 $ 27,596,703 $ 30,715,640 $ 32,593,026 $ 32,240,857 $ 37,231,015 $ 45,857,052 $ 42,655,189 $ 43,715,536 $ 56,783,577 $ 46,681,345 $ Total Rate Revenue After Rate Increases 28,527,660 $ 29,454,809 $ 32,370,483 $ 34,501,999 $ 36,787,062 $ 38,682,725 $ 40,684,681 $ 42,797,929 $ 45,028,810 $ 47,382,425 $ 49,866,441 $ 52,485,757 $ Projected Annual Rate Revenue Increase 0.00% 12%/18%* 6.50% 6.50% 6.50% 5.00% 5.00% 5.00% 5.00% 5.00% 5.00% 5.00% Cumulative Increase from Annual Revenue Increases 0.00% 12%/18% 13.42% 20.79% 28.65% 35.08% 41.83% 48.92% 56.37% 64.19% 72.40% 81.02% Debt Coverage Without Rate Increase 5 21.66 N/A N/A 3.98 3.54 3.09 2.61 2.09 1.51 1.02 0.53 (0.06)Debt Coverage With Rate Increase 5 21.66 N/A N/A 6.94 7.64 8.12 8.64 9.16 9.69 10.37 11.11 11.81 * Single Family Residents (SFR) 5/8" fixed meter charge is 12% and all variable rates are 18%. Larger meter fixed charges percent increases vary.
RATE REVENUE REQUIREMENTS SUMMARY 1 Projected Projected (4-Year Rate Period) Packet Pg. 1088 Attachment: ^2023 Water System Overview and Proposed Rates (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Waste Packet Pg. 1089 Attachment: ^Resolution 2019-93 Procedures for Protest Hearings (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Packet Pg. 1090 Attachment: ^Resolution 2019-93 Procedures for Protest Hearings (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Packet Pg. 1091 Attachment: ^Resolution 2019-93 Procedures for Protest Hearings (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Packet Pg. 1092 Attachment: ^Resolution 2019-93 Procedures for Protest Hearings (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Packet Pg. 1093 Attachment: ^Resolution 2019-93 Procedures for Protest Hearings (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Packet Pg. 1094 Attachment: ^Resolution 2019-93 Procedures for Protest Hearings (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Packet Pg. 1095 Attachment: ^Resolution 2019-93 Procedures for Protest Hearings (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid Packet Pg. 1096 Attachment: ^Resolution 2019-93 Procedures for Protest Hearings (9.11(e)--Set Public Hearing regarding four-year rate increases for Solid
CITY OF REDDING
REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL
Recommendation
Authorize and approve the following actions:
(1) Adopt uncodified Ordinance No. 2663 to amend the Retirement Contract (C-99) between the City of Redding (City) and California Public Employees Retirement System (CalPERS) to adopt Government Code Section 20516 (Employees Sharing Additional Cost) for classic local miscellaneous members in the IBEW–Power Production Unit; (2) Authorize the Mayor to sign the contract for the City upon receipt of the final document from CalPERS;
(3) Authorize the City Clerk to sign the Certification of Compliance with Government Code Section 20516 (CON 500); and
(4) Authorize the City Clerk to sign the Certification of Compliance with Government Code Section 7507 (CON 12A).
Fiscal Impact
There is no fiscal impact associated with enacting the Ordinance to amend the retirement contract with CalPERS to allow cost sharing of the employer portion of the retirement contribution. The ordinance reflects the City Council’s (Council) previous action.
Alternative Action
The Council could choose not to adopt the Ordinance and the CalPERS contract would not be changed. City staff met and conferred in good faith with the Brotherhood of Electrical Workers AFL-CIO (IBEW) – Power Production Unit on the implementation of this item. If the Ordinance is not enacted it would result in IBEW – Power Production unit employees continuing to contribute the agreed upon amount of retirement costs to the City as set forth in the Memorandum of Understanding, but those moneys would not be associated with their individual CalPERS accounts as agreed upon during negotiations.
MEETING DATE: September 5, 2023
ITEM NO. 9.15(a)
FROM:
***APPROVED BY***
[email protected] [email protected]
SUBJECT: 9.15(a)—Consider adoption of an uncodified Ordinance amending the City of Redding's contract with the California Public Employees Retirement System for classic local miscellaneous members in the International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers AFL-CIO (IBEW) – Power Production Unit.
Kari Kibler, Personnel
Director
Packet Pg. 1097
Report to Redding City Council August 30, 2023
Re: 9.15(a)--Adopt uncodified Ordinance No. 2663 Page 2 Background/Analysis
The proposed contract amendment implements the provisions of Government Code Section 20516 (Employees Sharing Additional Cost) and would require affected employees to pay 2.125 percent of the employer’s share of the CalPERS retirement contribution in addition to the full employee share. This change was agreed to through the collective bargaining process with the IBEW – Power Production unit.
Following the introduction of the ordinance at the August 15, 2023, Council meeting, a Secret Ballot Election was held on August 16, 2023, for the affected employees as required by Government Code 20474. As less than a majority of affected employees voted against the change; the amendment can continue forward.
The City has complied with the regulatory and procedural requirements to amend its contract with CalPERS and it is recommended that the Council now enact an ordinance authorizing the amendment to the contract.
Following the adoption of the ordinance is a 30-day waiting period, placing the effective date of the ordinance at October 5, 2023. CalPERS requires that a benefit change be effective at the beginning of a pay period after the ordinance process is completed. The first date affected employees would be impacted by the Contract Amendment is October 15, 2023.
Environmental Review
This is not a project defined under the California Environmental Quality Act, and no further action is required.
Council Priority/City Manager Goals
• Budget and Financial Management – “Achieve balanced and stable 10-year Financial Plans for all funds.”
Attachments
^Cost Sharing Ordinance No. 2663
^CON-12A Certification of Compliance with Govt Code Section 7507 - IBEW Power ^CON-500 Certification of Compliance with Govt Code Section 20516 - IBEW Power Amendment to CalPERS Contract - Exhibit (C-99)
CalPERS Resolution of Intention 2023-081
Packet Pg. 1098
ORDINANCE NO. 2663
AN UNCODIFIED ORDINANCE OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY
OF REDDING AUTHORIZING AN AMENDMENT TO THE CONTRACT
BETWEEN THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF REDDING AND THE
BOARD OF ADMINISTRATION OF THE CALIFORNIA PUBLIC
EMPLOYEES’ RETIREMENT SYSTEM
The City Council of the City of Redding does ordain as follows:
Section 1. That an amendment to the contract between the City Council of the City of Redding and the Board of Administration, California Public Employees’ Retirement System is hereby authorized, a copy of said amendment on file in the City Clerk’s Office, and by such reference made a part hereof as though herein set out in full.
Section 2. The Mayor of the City Council is hereby authorized, empowered, and directed to execute said amendment for and on behalf of said Agency.
Section 3. This Ordinance shall take effect 30 days after the date of its adoption, and prior to the expiration of 15 days from the passage thereof shall be published at least once in the Redding Record Searchlight, a newspaper of general circulation, published and circulated in the City of Redding, and thenceforth and thereafter the same shall be in full force and effect.
I HEREBY CERTIFY that this Ordinance was introduced and read at a regular meeting of the City Council of the City of Redding on the 15th day of August, 2023, and was read and adopted at a regular meeting of the City Council on the 5th day of September, 2023, by the following vote:
AYES: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
NOES: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
ABSENT: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
ABSTAIN: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
_________________________________
MICHAEL DACQUISTO, Mayor
ATTEST: FORM APPROVED:
_______________________________ _________________________________ SHARLENE TIPTON, City Clerk BARRY E. DeWALT, City Attorney Packet Pg. 1099 Attachment: ^Cost Sharing Ordinance No. 2663 (9.15(a)--Adopt uncodified Ordinance No. 2663) CalPERS-CON-12A Page 1 of 1
California Public Employees’ Retirement System www.calpers.ca.gov Financial Office | Pension Contracts & Prefunding Programs Division 888 CalPERS (or 888-225-7377) P.O. Box 942715, Sacramento, CA 94229-2715 TTY: (877) 249-7442 CalPERS ID: ____________
Certification of Compliance with Government Code Section 7507 I hereby certify that in accordance with Government Code section 7507, the future annual costs as determined by the California Public Employees’ Retirement System for the increase or change in retirement benefit(s) have been made public at a public meeting by the ____________________________________________________________________ of the (governing body)
_______________________________________________________________________________ (public agency)
on ____________, which is at least two weeks prior to the adoption of the Final (date)
Adoption of the retirement benefit increase or change will not be placed on the consent calendar. _______________________ _______________________________________ Date Clerk/Secretary
________________________________________
Title
Packet Pg. 1100 Attachment: ^CON-12A Certification of Compliance with Govt Code Section 7507 - IBEW Power (9.15(a)--Adopt uncodified Ordinance No. 2663) California Public Employees’ Retirement System
Financial Office | Pension Contracts and Prefunding Programs Division P.O. Box 942703, Sacramento, CA 94229-2703
888 CalPERS (or 888-225-7377) | TTY: (877) 249-7442 | www.calpers.ca.gov PERS-CON-500 (Rev. 1/22/19)
Certification of Compliance with
Government Code Section 20516
I hereby certify that in accordance with Government Code Section 20516 the City of Redding and its classic local miscellaneous employees have agreed in writing to the following:
Section 20516 (Employees Sharing Additional Cost) of 2.125% for classic local miscellaneous members in the International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers AFLCIO – Power Production Unit. _____________________________________
Signature
_____________________________________
Title
_____________________________________
Witness
______________________
Date
Packet Pg. 1101 Attachment: ^CON-500 Certification of Compliance with Govt Code Section 20516 - IBEW Power (9.15(a)--Adopt uncodified Ordinance No. 2663) Packet Pg. 1102
Attachment: Amendment to CalPERS Contract - Exhibit (C-99) (9.15(a)--Adopt uncodified Ordinance No. 2663) Packet Pg. 1103
Attachment: Amendment to CalPERS Contract - Exhibit (C-99) (9.15(a)--Adopt uncodified Ordinance No. 2663) Packet Pg. 1104
Attachment: Amendment to CalPERS Contract - Exhibit (C-99) (9.15(a)--Adopt uncodified Ordinance No. 2663) Packet Pg. 1105
Attachment: Amendment to CalPERS Contract - Exhibit (C-99) (9.15(a)--Adopt uncodified Ordinance No. 2663) Packet Pg. 1106
Attachment: Amendment to CalPERS Contract - Exhibit (C-99) (9.15(a)--Adopt uncodified Ordinance No. 2663) Packet Pg. 1107
Attachment: Amendment to CalPERS Contract - Exhibit (C-99) (9.15(a)--Adopt uncodified Ordinance No. 2663) Packet Pg. 1108
Attachment: Amendment to CalPERS Contract - Exhibit (C-99) (9.15(a)--Adopt uncodified Ordinance No. 2663) Packet Pg. 1109
Attachment: Amendment to CalPERS Contract - Exhibit (C-99) (9.15(a)--Adopt uncodified Ordinance No. 2663)
RESOLUTION OF INTENTION
TO APPROVE AN AMENDMENT TO CONTRACT
BETWEEN THE
BOARD OF ADMINISTRATION
CALIFORNIA PUBLIC EMPLOYEES' RETIREMENT SYSTEM
AND THE
CITY COUNCIL
CITY OF REDDING
WHEREAS, the Public Employees' Retirement Law permits the participation of public agencies and their employees in the Public Employees' Retirement System by the execution of a contract, and sets forth the procedure by which said public agencies may elect to subject themselves and their employees to amendments to said Law; and
WHEREAS, one of the steps in the procedures to amend this contract is the adoption by the governing body of the public agency of a resolution giving notice of its intention to approve an amendment to said contract, which resolution shall contain a summary of the change proposed in said contract; and
WHEREAS, the following is a statement of the proposed change:
To provide Section 20516 (Employees Sharing Additional Cost) of
2.125% for classic local miscellaneous members in the
International Brotherhood of Electrical Workers AFL-CIO – Power Production Unit.
NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED that the governing body of the above agency does hereby give notice of intention to approve an amendment to the contract between said public agency and the Board of Administration of the Public Employees' Retirement System, a copy of said amendment being attached hereto, as an "Exhibit" and by this reference made a part hereof.
By:_________________________________
Presiding Officer
_________________________________
Title
________________________________
Date adopted and approved
(Amendment)
CON-302 (Rev. 3/9/2016 rc)
Packet Pg. 1110 Attachment: CalPERS Resolution of Intention 2023-081 (9.15(a)--Adopt uncodified Ordinance No. 2663)
CITY OF REDDING
REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL
Recommendation
Approve and authorize the following:
(1) Adopt Resolution approving a 180-day wait period exception and single interim appointment of Deborah Ivey as Payroll and Benefits Technician for the City of Redding pursuant to Government Code sections 7522.56 and 21224, effective September 6, 2023, for up to 960 hours; and
(2) Authorize the City Manager to execute the necessary hiring documentation to allow retired Payroll and Benefits Technician, Deborah Ivey, to be rehired as an annuitant in the Finance Department to assist with special projects such as the implementation of the City-wide Enterprise Resource Planning and Human Capital Management systems.
Fiscal Impact
The estimated salary cost for allowing the Finance Department to hire the retired annuitant on a temporary basis to not exceed 960 hours total, in Fiscal Year 2023-24, would be up to approximately $45,000.
Alternative Action
The City Council could choose not to adopt the attached resolution, and a retired annuitant will not be hired to assist with the implementation of the City-wide Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) and Human Capital Management (HCM) systems.
Background/Analysis
Payroll and Benefits Technician, Deborah Ivey, retired from the City of Redding (City) on August 14, 2023, after 28 years of service. Ms. Ivey will be able to use her expertise and knowledge to provide extra help to the City while we are in the process of transitioning to a new MEETING DATE: September 5, 2023
ITEM NO. 9.15(b)
FROM:
***APPROVED BY***
[email protected] [email protected]
SUBJECT: 9.15(b)--Consider Resolution approving an exception to the California Public Employee's Retirement System 180-day wait period with regard to re-hiring Deborah Ivey as a retired annuitant.
Kari Kibler, Personnel
Director
Packet Pg. 1111
Report to Redding City Council August 28, 2023
Re: 9.15(b)--Consider Resolution Approving Re-hiring Deborah Ivey as a Retired AnnuitantPage 2 Payroll system. Specifically, Ms. Ivey will be assisting with the implementation of the ERP and HCM systems, which includes timekeeping, payroll and benefit calculations in the new Oracle system.
Ms. Ivey’s title will be Payroll and Benefits Technician during her employment as a retired annuitant. Although Ms. Ivey will have the title of Payroll and Benefits Technician, as a retired annuitant, she will not be assuming all of the roles and responsibilities of that position.
Environmental Review
This is not a project defined under the California Environmental Quality Act, and no further action is required.
Council Priority/City Manager Goals
This is a routine operational item.
Attachments
^CalPERS Reso 180 Day Exception-Ivey
^Deborah Ivey Retired Annuitant PAF
Packet Pg. 1112
Resolution No. 2023-________
September 5, 2023
RESOLUTION FOR EXCEPTION TO THE 180-DAY WAIT PERIOD
GC sections 7522.56 & 21224
WHEREAS, in compliance with Government Code section 7522.56 the Redding City Council must provide CalPERS this certification resolution when hiring a retiree before 180 days has passed since his or her retirement date; and
WHEREAS, Deborah Ivey retired from the City of Redding in the position of Payroll and Benefits Technician, effective August 14, 2023; and WHEREAS, section 7522.56 requires that post-retirement employment commence no earlier than 180 days after the retirement date, which is February 11, 2024, without this certification resolution; and
WHEREAS, section 7522.56 provides that this exception to the 180-day wait period shall not apply if the retiree accepts any retirement-related incentive; and WHEREAS, the Redding City Council, the City of Redding and Deborah Ivey certify that Deborah Ivey has not and will not receive a Golden Handshake or any other retirement-related incentive; and
WHEREAS, the Redding City Council hereby appoints Deborah Ivey as an extra help retired annuitant to assist with special projects such as the implementation of the City-wide Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) and Human Capital Management (HCM) systems under Government Code section 21224, effective September 6, 2023; and WHEREAS, the entire employment agreement, contract or appointment document between Deborah Ivey and the City of Redding has been reviewed by this body and is attached herein; and
WHEREAS, no matters, issues, terms or conditions related to this employment and appointment have been or will be placed on a consent calendar; and WHEREAS, the employment shall be limited to 960 hours per fiscal year; and WHEREAS, the compensation paid to retirees cannot be less than the minimum nor exceed the maximum monthly base salary paid to other employees performing comparable duties, divided by 173.333 to equal the hourly rate; and
Packet Pg. 1113 Attachment: ^CalPERS Reso 180 Day Exception-Ivey (9.15(b)--Consider Resolution Approving Re-hiring Deborah Ivey as a Retired Annuitant) WHEREAS, the maximum monthly base salary for this position is $5465.00 and the hourly equivalent is $31.53, and the minimum monthly base salary for this position is $4283.00 and the hourly equivalent is $24.71; and
WHEREAS, the hourly rate paid to Deborah Ivey will be $31.53; and WHEREAS, Deborah Ivey has not and will not receive any other benefit, incentive, compensation in lieu of benefit or other form of compensation in addition to this hourly pay rate; and
THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED THAT the Redding City Council hereby certifies the nature of the appointment of Deborah Ivey as described herein and detailed in the attached employment agreement/contract/appointment document and that this appointment is necessary to provide critically needed assistance with the implementation of the ERP and HCM systems. Ms. Ivey’s title will be Payroll and Benefits Technician during her employment as a retired annuitant. Although Ms.
Ivey will have the title of Payroll and Benefits Technician, she will not be assuming all the roles and responsibilities of that position.
I HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing resolution was introduced, read and adopted at a regular meeting of the City Council on the 5th day September, 2023, by the following vote:
AYES: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
NOES: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
ABSENT: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
ABSTAIN: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
________________________________
MICHAEL DACQUISTO, Mayor
ATTEST: FORM APPROVED:
___________________________ _________________________________ SHARLENE TIPTON, City Clerk BARRY E. DeWALT, City Attorney Packet Pg. 1114 Attachment: ^CalPERS Reso 180 Day Exception-Ivey (9.15(b)--Consider Resolution Approving Re-hiring Deborah Ivey as a Retired Annuitant) original: employee file copies: employee department director F-0015 - 3/99
CITY OF REDDING
Personnel Action Form
Department/Division # Employee # Effective Date Immediate Supervisor
Employee Name Last First MI
A. TYPE OF ACTION
G New Hire G Re-employment G Separation/Termination G Promotion G Reclassification G Pay-for-Performance G Step Increase G Status Change G Other B. ACTION (See instructions and sample codes on reverse side) Status
Code
Job Code
Number Step
Wage/Salary
Rate
Classification
Title
Dept.
No.
Division
Name
From:
To:
C. EXPLANATION OF ACTION
D. SUPERVISORS MUST CREATE AN IT HELP DESK TICKET FOR THE FOLLOWING PERSONNEL ACTIONS: (Reference pg. 2 for additional information regarding this action.)
G USER ONBOARDING (New Hire/Re-Hire, Position Change) G USER OFFBOARDING (Separation) G N/A E. ORDER OF ROUTING
Requested by: Date:
Supervisor
Requested by: Date:
Division Head
Requested by: Date:
Department Director
Recommended by: Date:
Personnel Director
Funds Available: Date:
Finance Officer
Approved: Date:
City Manager
Personnel Office Use Only
F. PROCESSING Eligibility
List
Pre-Bid Loyalty
Oath
Physical
Exam
Psychiatric
Exam
Background
Investigation
Last Step
Increase
Last PFP Hire
Date
Initials _________
FMLA EEO-4
Next Step Increase
Date Amount
Retro Pay
Processed
Vector
Solutions
Staff
Directory
Dept.
Notified
Date
Notified
Personnel Office Use Only
Analyst/Technician Review______
Position Control No. _
Packet Pg. 1115 Attachment: ^Deborah Ivey Retired Annuitant PAF (9.15(b)--Consider Resolution Approving Re-hiring Deborah Ivey as a Retired Annuitant) This form is to be initiated by the Department/Division and forwarded to the Personnel Department at [email protected] after signatures have been obtained. Please include any supporting documents as attachments in the email to expedite processing.
DEPARTMENT NUMBER: Refers to the three digit number assigned by Finance for each department and division.
EMPLOYEE NUMBER: Refers to the number assigned to each employee (refer to a PER 10 Job Classification and Status Report or telephone the Personnel Office).
EFFECTIVE DATE: On new hires or re-employs, the effective date must be the first day the employee actually reports for work. On separations/terminations, the effective date is the last day of employment. On promotions, reclassifications, pay increases, status changes, etc., the effective date must be the beginning of a payroll period.
IMMEDIATE SUPERVISOR: The supervisor that is responsible for approving time off, approving timecards, issuing performance evaluations, etc.
A. TYPE OF ACTION: Check the appropriate box indicating the type of action required. Use "Other" for actions not specifically listed, i.e. Transfer, Suspension, Return from Leave of Absence, Return from FMLA, etc.
B. ACTION: Status Code: 3 = Regular/Probationary positions; 7 = Seasonal positions (950 hours); 8A = Part-time positions (990 hours); 8B = Part-time positions (1560 hours) with PERS Benefits; and 9 = Part-time (on-call, seasonal 950 hours).
Job Code: Refers to the number assigned to each job classification (refer to salary schedules). Example 397 – Clerk
Wage/Salary Rate: Refer to current salary schedules found on the City of Redding website for appropriate rate. Do not use an hourly rate for a payfor-performance request, use a monthly salary rate, rounded to the nearest dollar.
Classification: Refers to the job title. Example: Clerk II C. EXPLANATION OF ACTION: Please be as specific as possible on the explanation of action. Indicate the reason for the action.
D. CREATE HELP DESK TICKET: Creating an IT Help Desk ticket is a required step in the onboarding and offboarding of employees. Employees cannot be assigned computer permissions and an electronic access key badge unless they are entered into the active directory via a help desk ticket. Changes to computer access and facility access for separating employees should be completed on the effective date of the separation.
E. ORDER OF ROUTING: The Personnel Action Form must be signed by the department director before submitting to the Personnel Office.
F. PROCESSING: This section is to be completed by the Personnel Office.
Packet Pg. 1116 Attachment: ^Deborah Ivey Retired Annuitant PAF (9.15(b)--Consider Resolution Approving Re-hiring Deborah Ivey as a Retired Annuitant)
CITY OF REDDING
REPORT TO THE CITY COUNCIL
Recommendation
Adopt Resolution approving amendments to the Executive Management Pay-For-Performance Salary Plan (Unrepresented) providing classification-specific salary range adjustments as a result of a compensation and compression study, including the City Manager classification, and authorizing immediate salary increases for the employees in those classifications, effective September 3, 2023.
Fiscal Impact
The estimated total cost resulting from the amendments to the unrepresented salary schedules is approximately $2.8 million per year once fully implemented. The primary portion of this cost, roughly $1.7 million per year, pertains directly to Redding Electric Utility (REU). An additional sum of approximately $220,000 per year is attributed to the REU Customer Services Division, which is then distributed among REU, Water, Wastewater, and Solid Waste funds. These increased costs have been factored into the Electric Utility's five-year plan.
The fiscal impact on the General Fund is approximately $400,000 to $475,000 per year. The remaining expenses are applicable to internal service funds and general government operations.
These costs are distributed across City of Redding (City) departments using the cost allocation plan and internal service fund allocations based on the usage of these services.
Alternative Action
The City Council (Council) could choose not to approve the resolution amending the Executive Management Pay-For-Performance Salary Plan for Unrepresented Employees, and provide additional direction to staff.
Background/Analysis
MEETING DATE: September 5, 2023
ITEM NO. 9.15(c)
FROM:
***APPROVED BY***
[email protected] [email protected]
SUBJECT: 9.15(c)--Consider Resolution approving amendments to Executive Management Pay-For-Performance Salary Plan for Unrepresented Employees.
Kari Kibler, Personnel
Director
Packet Pg. 1117
Report to Redding City Council August 29, 2023
Re: 9.15(c)--Consider Resolution approving amendments to Executive Management Pay-ForPerformanc Page 2 The Council has developed goals and objectives for the City Manager to focus on. One of the Objectives is “Government of the 21st Century” and one of the goals identified for that Objective is to “Develop a plan to improve the City’s effectiveness with a focus on organizational structure and succession planning.” There are, of course many layers to this goal, but the most important element is the City’s workforce. The City delivers critical services to the community and the ability to retain its existing excellent staff and hire new quality employees is paramount.
City Council Policy 206 reads, in part, “The City of Redding will establish and maintain a compensation policy which is intended to recruit and retain the better qualified employees”…..and…. “The City shall conduct periodic surveys of public and private sector employment in order to ensure that its compensation practices conform to the practices of a cross-section of public and private employers in the labor market from which the City recruits its workforce.”
REU’s 2026 Strategic Plan adopted by Council on August 17, 2021, includes Goal 9 “Enhance Employee Development, Attraction, and Retention,” which reads in part, “in order to attract and retain quality and dedicated team members, ongoing labor market analysis must occur to ensure the working environment of REU is one that attracts and maintains employees. This will include studies of pay and benefits and working conditions. These workforce initiatives are imperative to deliver the strategic plan successfully.”
In 2021, the City hired a consultant to study the City’s compensation plan, specifically salary and benefits, for all represented and unrepresented classifications and to also review how positions and classifications relate from a step and/or level perspective, and in succession planning, within the City. Since then, the City has used the information from the salary study to bring City classifications up to the market median and maintain competitive wages in order to attract and retain better qualified employees.
Recent contracts with Redding Independent Employees Organization (RIEO), International Association of Fire Fighters (IAFF), United Public Employees of California (UPEC) Technical and other units have resulted in wage increases for represented positions, which is now causing those positions to compress with unrepresented classifications. Staff recommend the Council adjust the salary ranges of the unrepresented classifications, effective September 3, 2023, and again in September 2024, in order to maintain proper position relationships and promote succession planning within the organization. The recommended increases range from approximately three percent to 31.6 percent depending on classification. The recommended wage increases are attached to this staff report, separated out by Electric and Non-Electric classifications.
Providing compensation to employees that is fair and is established by the labor market is a goal driven by Council Policy 206, reinforced by the Objectives established for the City Manager by the City Council and REU’s 2026 Strategic Plan adopted by City Council, and most importantly recognizes the value employees have to this organization.
Environmental Review
This is not a project defined under the California Environmental Quality Act, and no further action is required.
Packet Pg. 1118
Report to Redding City Council August 29, 2023
Re: 9.15(c)--Consider Resolution approving amendments to Executive Management Pay-ForPerformanc Page 3 Council Priority/City Manager Goals
• Government of the 21st Century – “Be relevant and proactive to the opportunities and challenges of today’s residents and workforce. Anticipate the future to make better decisions today.”
Attachments
^Resolution
^Exhibit - Salary Plan Executive Management PFP Effective September 3, 2023 ^Exhibit - Salary Plan for Executive Management PFP Effective September 1, 2024 ^Exhibit - Salary Plan Executive Management PFP - Current ^Table - Proposed Salary Increases (REU)
^Table - Proposed Wage Increases (non REU)
Packet Pg. 1119
RESOLUTION NO. 2023-___
A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF REDDING
ADOPTING AN AMENDMENT TO THE EXECUTIVE MANAGEMENT
PAY-FOR-PERFORMANCE SALARY PLAN EFFECTIVE SEPTEMBER
3, 2023
WHEREAS, staff has recommended that the Executive Management Pay-ForPerformance Salary Plan be amended, effective September 3, 2023; and WHEREAS, the City Council deems it to be in the best interest of the City to adopt such recommendation;
NOW, THEREFORE, IT IS HEREBY RESOLVED by the City Council that the Executive Management Pay-For-Performance Salary Plan be amended, as attached hereto, effective September 3, 2023.
I HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing resolution was introduced and adopted at a regular meeting of the City Council of the City of Redding on the 5th day of September, 2023, by the following vote:
AYES: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
NOES: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
ABSENT: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
ABSTAIN: COUNCIL MEMBERS:
___________________________________
MICHAEL DACQUISTO, Mayor
ATTEST: FORM APPROVED:
__________________________________ ___________________________________ SHARLENE TIPTON, City Clerk BARRY E. DeWALT, City Attorney Packet Pg. 1120 Attachment: ^Resolution (9.15(c)--Consider Resolution approving amendments to Executive Management Pay-For-Performanc) Job Code Title
96 City Clerk (Elected Official) $600
97 City Treasurer (Elected Official) $600
30 Director of Electric Utility $20,026 – $26,035
31 Assistant Director of Electric Utility $18,206 – $23,669 61 Electric Manager - Energy Management $16,551 – $21,517 84 Electric Manager - Engineering $16,220 – $21,087
83 Electric Manager - Operations $16,220 – $21,087
66 Compliance Officer $16,220 – $21,087
35 Chief of Police $15,894 – $20,664
94 Chief Information Officer $15,612 – $20,296
88 Electric Program Supervisor - Energy Management $15,046 – $19,561 76 Electric Manager - Power Production $14,807 – $19,250 62 Electric Program Supervisor - Transmission & Distribution $14,746 – $19,170 77 Electric Manager - Line $14,722 – $19,139
12 Assistant City Manager $14,631 – $19,022
40 Fire Chief $14,769 – $19,201
63 Electric Manager - Customer Services and Metering $14,193 – $18,451 69 Electric Manager - Financial $14,193 – $18,451
86 Electric Manager - Resources $14,192 – $18,451
67 Electric Manager - Technology $14,192 – $18,451
20 Director of Public Works $13,935 – $18,116
59 Electric Program Supervisor - Power Production $13,461 – $17,500 42 Deputy Fire Chief $12,726 – $16,544
52 Director of Community Services $12,268 – $15,950
43 Director of Development Services $12,268 – $15,950
87 Electrical Engineering Supervisor $12,267 – $15,948
78 Electric Program Supervisor - Line $12,267 – $15,948 41 Electric Program Supervisor - Meter Shop $12,267 – $15,948 80 Electric Program Supervisor - Substations $12,267 – $15,948 64 Director of Finance $12,201 – $15,862
18 Deputy City Manager $12,176 – $15,830
58 Electric Program Supervisor - Operational Technology $11,991 – $15,589 134 Assistant City Attorney II $11,776 – $15,310
81 Electric Manager $11,754 – $15,281
54 Cyber Security Officer $11,254 – $14,631
82 Electric Program Supervisor $11,195 – $14,554
276 Electric Program Supervisor - Compliance $11,195 – $14,554 274 Electric Program Supervisor - Customer Programs $11,195 – $14,554 275 Electric Program Supervisor - Customer Service $11,195 – $14,554 278 Electric Program Supervisor - Financial Services $11,195 – $14,554 89 Electric Program Supervisor - Service Planning $11,195 – $14,554 277 Electric Program Supervisor - Settlements $11,195 – $14,554 273 Electric Program Supervisor - Vegetation Management $11,195 – $14,554 260 Electric Utility Senior Resource Planner $11,195 – $14,554
CITY OF REDDING
EXECUTIVE MANAGEMENT PAY-FOR-PERFORMANCE SALARY PLAN
Effective: September 3, 2023
Monthly Salary Range
NO RANGE
NO RANGE
Packet Pg. 1121 Attachment: ^Exhibit - Salary Plan Executive Management PFP Effective September 3, 2023 (9.15(c)--Consider Resolution approving Job Code Title Monthly Salary Range
65 Personnel Director $11,194 – $14,552
106 Assistant Director of Public Works $11,107 – $14,440 112 Assistant City Engineer $10,912 – $14,186
192 Electric Utility Operational Technology Engineer $10,901 – $14,172 108 Electrical Engineer $10,882 – $14,147
155 Electric Utility Senior Project Engineer $10,882 – $14,147 68 Operations/Compliance Engineer $10,882 – $14,147
262 Power Plant Engineer II $10,882 – $14,147
135 Assistant City Attorney I $10,665 – $13,865
71 Assistant Director of Development Services/Building Official $10,656 – $13,853 138 Planning/Community Development Manager $10,364 – $13,473 93 Deputy Director of Public Works $10,180 – $13,235
60 Finance Officer $10,179 – $13,233
116 Electric Utility Resource Planner $10,177 – $13,231 110 Electric Utility Engineer $9,893 – $12,861
261 Power Plant Engineer I $9,893 – $12,861
50 Assistant Director - Community Services $9,790 – $12,727 182 Geographic Information Systems Manager $9,726 – $12,645 252 Municipal Utilities Manager $9,694 – $12,603
202 Transit Manager $9,454 – $12,475
103 Housing Manager $9,430 – $12,259
127 Building Official $9,261 – $12,039
72 Environmental Compliance Manager $9,148 – $11,893
95 Personnel Manager $9,006 – $11,708
90 Risk Manager $9,006 – $11,708
249 Field Foreman-Electrical Technician $8,927 – $11,606 151 Deputy City Attorney $8,925 – $11,603
75 Airports Manager $8,839 – $11,491
153 Deputy Building Official $8,555 – $11,122
195 Electric Utility Associate Resource Planner $8,480 – $11,025 105 Assistant Finance Officer $8,477 – $11,020
121 Electric Utility Engineering Associate $8,342 – $10,845 98 Administrator - Office of City Clerk $8,176 – $10,629 99 Administrator - Office of City Treasurer $8,176 – $10,629 131 Economic Development, Innovation and Equity Manager $8,048 – $10,463 92 Parks & Facilities Manager $7,745 – $10,068
51 Communication Manager $7,714 – $10,028
107 Energy Services Account Manager $7,653 – $9,949
136 Electric Utility Engineering Assistant II $7,584 – $9,859 130 Fleet Manager $7,506 – $9,759
56 Senior Personnel Analyst $7,489 – $9,736
Packet Pg. 1122 Attachment: ^Exhibit - Salary Plan Executive Management PFP Effective September 3, 2023 (9.15(c)--Consider Resolution approving Job Code Title
209 Assistant Airports Manager $7,368 – $9,579
166 Purchasing Officer $7,053 – $9,169
150 Electric Utility Engineering Assistant I $6,894 – $8,963 113 Electric Utility Field Foreman $5,362 – $8,851
175 Management Assistant to the City Manager $6,807 – $8,849 185 Police Services Manager $6,520 – $8,477
165 Parks Superintendent $6,444 – $8,378
169 Recreation Superintendent $6,444 – $8,378
245 Executive Assistant to the City Manager $5,780 – $7,514 109 Reprographics Manager $5,780 – $7,514
Monthly Salary Range
Packet Pg. 1123 Attachment: ^Exhibit - Salary Plan Executive Management PFP Effective September 3, 2023 (9.15(c)--Consider Resolution approving Job Code Title
96 City Clerk (Elected Official) $600
97 City Treasurer (Elected Official) $600
30 Director of Electric Utility $21,028 – $27,337
31 Assistant Director of Electric Utility $19,116 – $24,852 61 Electric Manager - Energy Management $17,378 – $22,593 84 Electric Manager - Engineering $17,031 – $22,141
83 Electric Manager - Operations $17,031 – $22,141
66 Compliance Officer $17,031 – $22,141
35 Chief of Police $16,769 – $21,801
94 Chief Information Officer $16,236 – $21,108
88 Electric Program Supervisor - Energy Management $15,798 – $20,539 76 Electric Manager - Power Production $15,549 – $20,214 62 Electric Program Supervisor - Transmission & Distribution $15,483 – $20,129 12 Assistant City Manager $15,363 – $19,973
77 Electric Manager - Line $15,310 – $19,904
40 Fire Chief $15,360 – $19,969
63 Electric Manager - Customer Services and Metering $14,760 – $19,189 69 Electric Manager - Financial $14,760 – $19,189
86 Electric Manager - Resources $14,760 – $19,189
67 Electric Manager - Technology $14,760 – $19,189
20 Director of Public Works $14,144 – $18,387
59 Electric Program Supervisor - Power Production $14,135 – $18,376 52 Director of Community Services $12,882 – $16,747
43 Director of Development Services $12,882 – $16,747
64 Director of Finance $12,811 – $16,655
18 Deputy City Manager $12,785 – $16,622
87 Electrical Engineering Supervisor $12,758 – $16,586
78 Electric Program Supervisor - Line $12,758 – $16,586 41 Electric Program Supervisor - Meter Shop $12,758 – $16,586 80 Electric Program Supervisor - Substations $12,758 – $16,586 42 Deputy Fire Chief $13,235 – $17,206
58 Electric Program Supervisor - Operational Technology $12,471 – $16,213 81 Electric Manager $12,225 – $15,893
134 Assistant City Attorney II $12,129 – $15,769
112 Assistant City Engineer $11,784 – $15,320
54 Cyber Security Officer $11,704 – $15,216
106 Assistant Director of Public Works $11,663 – $15,162 82 Electric Program Supervisor $11,643 – $15,136
276 Electric Program Supervisor - Compliance $11,643 – $15,136 274 Electric Program Supervisor - Customer Programs $11,643 – $15,136 275 Electric Program Supervisor - Customer Service $11,643 – $15,136 278 Electric Program Supervisor - Financial Services $11,643 – $15,136 89 Electric Program Supervisor - Service Planning $11,643 – $15,136 277 Electric Program Supervisor - Settlements $11,643 – $15,136 273 Electric Program Supervisor - Vegetation Management $11,643 – $15,136 260 Electric Utility Senior Resource Planner $11,643 – $15,136
CITY OF REDDING
EXECUTIVE MANAGEMENT PAY-FOR-PERFORMANCE SALARY PLAN
Effective: September 1, 2024
Monthly Salary Range
NO RANGE
NO RANGE
Packet Pg. 1124 Attachment: ^Exhibit - Salary Plan for Executive Management PFP Effective September 1, 2024 (9.15(c)--Consider Resolution approving Job Code Title Monthly Salary Range
65 Personnel Director $11,529 – $14,989
192 Electric Utility Operational Technology Engineer $11,337 – $14,739 108 Electrical Engineer $11,317 – $14,713
155 Electric Utility Senior Project Engineer $11,317 – $14,713 68 Operations/Compliance Engineer $11,317 – $14,713
262 Power Plant Engineer II $11,317 – $14,713
71 Assistant Director of Development Services/Building Official $11,189 – $14,546 135 Assistant City Attorney I $10,985 – $14,281
138 Planning/Community Development Manager $10,934 – $14,214 93 Deputy Director of Public Works $10,689 – $13,896
60 Finance Officer $10,688 – $13,895
116 Electric Utility Resource Planner $10,584 – $13,760 110 Electric Utility Engineer $10,288 – $13,375
261 Power Plant Engineer I $10,288 – $13,375
50 Assistant Director - Community Services $10,279 – $13,363 252 Municipal Utilities Manager $10,179 – $13,233
182 Geographic Information Systems Manager $10,115 – $13,150 103 Housing Manager $9,900 – $12,871
202 Transit Manager $9,454 – $12,849
127 Building Official $9,724 – $12,641
72 Environmental Compliance Manager $9,423 – $12,250
249 Field Foreman-Electrical Technician $9,375 – $12,187 95 Personnel Manager $9,276 – $12,059
90 Risk Manager $9,276 – $12,059
151 Deputy City Attorney $9,193 – $11,951
75 Airports Manager $9,104 – $11,836
105 Assistant Finance Officer $8,900 – $11,571
153 Deputy Building Official $8,898 – $11,567
195 Electric Utility Associate Resource Planner $8,819 – $11,466 121 Electric Utility Engineering Associate $8,676 – $11,279 98 Administrator - Office of City Clerk $8,584 – $11,160 99 Administrator - Office of City Treasurer $8,421 – $10,948 131 Economic Development, Innovation and Equity Manager $8,289 – $10,777 51 Communication Manager $8,138 – $10,580
92 Parks & Facilities Manager $7,976 – $10,370
107 Energy Services Account Manager $7,959 – $10,347
136 Electric Utility Engineering Assistant II $7,887 – $10,254 130 Fleet Manager $7,882 – $10,247
56 Senior Personnel Analyst $7,714 – $10,028
209 Assistant Airports Manager $7,589 – $9,866
166 Purchasing Officer $7,264 – $9,444 Packet Pg. 1125 Attachment: ^Exhibit - Salary Plan for Executive Management PFP Effective September 1, 2024 (9.15(c)--Consider Resolution approving Job Code Title
150 Electric Utility Engineering Assistant I $7,170 – $9,321 175 Management Assistant to the City Manager $7,147 – $9,291 113 Electric Utility Field Foreman $5,362 – $9,205
185 Police Services Manager $6,846 – $8,901
165 Parks Superintendent $6,735 – $8,755
169 Recreation Superintendent $6,735 – $8,755
245 Executive Assistant to the City Manager $6,069 – $7,890 109 Reprographics Manager $6,069 – $7,890
Monthly Salary Range
Packet Pg. 1126 Attachment: ^Exhibit - Salary Plan for Executive Management PFP Effective September 1, 2024 (9.15(c)--Consider Resolution approving Job Code Title
96 City Clerk (Elected Official) $600
97 City Treasurer (Elected Official) $600
30 Director of Electric Utility $17,779 – $23,114
31 Assistant Director of Electric Utility $16,163 – $21,012 35 Chief of Police $15,894 – $20,664
76 Electric Manager - Power Production $14,807 – $19,250 61 Electric Manager - Energy Management $14,665 – $19,065 84 Electric Manager - Engineering $14,665 – $19,065
83 Electric Manager - Operations $14,665 – $19,065
66 Compliance Officer $14,665 – $19,065
40 Fire Chief $14,067 – $18,287
12 Assistant City Manager $13,934 – $18,116
59 Electric Program Supervisor - Power Production $13,461 – $17,500 88 Electric Program Supervisor - Energy Management $13,299 – $17,290 62 Electric Program Supervisor - Transmission & Distribution $13,299 – $17,290 20 Director of Public Works $13,271 – $17,253
69 Electric Manager - Financial $12,341 – $16,043
94 Chief Information Officer $12,341 – $16,043
63 Electric Manager - Customer Services and Metering $12,240 – $15,913 77 Electric Manager - Line $12,240 – $15,913
86 Electric Manager - Resources $12,240 – $15,913
42 Deputy Fire Chief $12,120 – $15,756
43 Director of Development Services $12,028 – $15,637
52 Director of Community Services $12,028 – $15,637
134 Assistant City Attorney II $11,776 – $15,310
67 Electric Manager - Technology $11,726 – $15,245
87 Electrical Engineering Supervisor $11,483 – $14,929
64 Director of Finance $11,194 – $14,552
65 Personnel Director $11,194 – $14,552
18 Deputy City Manager $11,171 – $14,523
78 Electric Program Supervisor - Line $11,166 – $14,516 106 Assistant Director of Public Works $10,943 – $14,227 80 Electric Program Supervisor - Substations $10,901 – $14,172 41 Electric Program Supervisor - Meter Shop $10,901 – $14,172 89 Electric Program Supervisor - Service Planning $10,759 – $13,987 135 Assistant City Attorney I $10,665 – $13,865
81 Electric Manager $10,463 – $13,602
108 Electrical Engineer $10,454 – $13,591
68 Operations/Compliance Engineer $10,454 – $13,591
262 Power Plant Engineer II $10,454 – $13,591
112 Assistant City Engineer $10,343 – $13,446
CITY OF REDDING
EXECUTIVE MANAGEMENT PAY-FOR-PERFORMANCE SALARY PLAN
Effective: July 9, 2023
Monthly Salary Range
NO RANGE
NO RANGE
Packet Pg. 1127 Attachment: ^Exhibit - Salary Plan Executive Management PFP - Current (9.15(c)--Consider Resolution approving amendments to Executive Job Code Title Monthly Salary Range
82 Electric Program Supervisor $10,224 – $13,292
58 Electric Program Supervisor - Operational Technology $10,224 – $13,292 273 Electric Program Supervisor - Vegetation Management $10,224 – $13,292 274 Electric Program Supervisor - Customer Programs $10,224 – $13,292 275 Electric Program Supervisor - Customer Service $10,224 – $13,292 276 Electric Program Supervisor - Compliance $10,224 – $13,292 277 Electric Program Supervisor - Settlements $10,224 – $13,292 278 Electric Program Supervisor - Financial Services $10,224 – $13,292 260 Electric Utility Senior Resource Planner $10,224 – $13,292 155 Electric Utility Senior Project Engineer $10,120 – $13,156 71 Assistant Director of Development Services/Building Official $10,053 – $13,069 93 Deputy Director of Public Works $9,980 – $12,975
54 Cyber Security Officer $9,710 – $12,624
138 Planning /Community Development Manager $9,596 – $12,475 202 Transit Manager $9,454 – $12,475
50 Assistant Director - Community Services $9,505 – $12,356 252 Municipal Utilities Manager $9,505 – $12,356
192 Electric Utility Operational Technology Engineer $9,406 – $12,228 116 Electric Utility Resource Planner $9,406 – $12,228
60 Finance Officer $9,296 – $12,085
72 Environmental Compliance Manager $9,148 – $11,893
127 Building Official $9,124 – $11,861
110 Electric Utility Engineer $8,958 – $11,645
261 Power Plant Engineer I $8,957 – $11,645
151 Deputy City Attorney $8,925 – $11,603
75 Airports Manager $8,839 – $11,491
103 Housing Manager $8,611 – $11,195
153 Deputy Building Official $8,555 – $11,122
182 Geographic Information Systems Manager $8,392 – $10,910 249 Field Foreman-Electrical Technician $8,383 – $10,898 95 Personnel Manager $8,262 – $10,741
90 Risk Manager $8,262 – $10,740
98 Administrator - Office of City Clerk $8,176 – $10,629 99 Administrator - Office of City Treasurer $8,176 – $10,629 131 Economic Development, Innovation and Equity Manager $8,048 – $10,463 121 Electric Utility Engineering Associate $7,837 – $10,189 105 Assistant Finance Officer $7,777 – $10,110
92 Parks & Facilities Manager $7,745 – $10,068
51 Communication Manager $7,714 – $10,028
195 Electric Utility Associate Resource Planner $7,602 – $9,882 107 Energy Services Account Manager $7,503 – $9,754
56 Senior Personnel Analyst $7,489 – $9,736
Packet Pg. 1128 Attachment: ^Exhibit - Salary Plan Executive Management PFP - Current (9.15(c)--Consider Resolution approving amendments to Executive Job Code Title
209 Assistant Airports Manager $7,368 – $9,579
136 Electric Utility Engineering Assistant II $7,150 – $9,296 166 Purchasing Officer $7,053 – $9,169
113 Electric Utility Field Foreman $5,362 – $8,851
175 Management Assistant to the City Manager $6,706 – $8,718 150 Electric Utility Engineering Assistant I $6,493 – $8,441 165 Parks Superintendent $6,444 – $8,378
169 Recreation Superintendent $6,444 – $8,378
130 Fleet Manager $6,361 – $8,270
185 Police Services Manager $6,361 – $8,270
245 Executive Assistant to the City Manager $5,231 – $6,800 109 Reprographics Manager $5,231 – $6,800
Monthly Salary Range
Packet Pg. 1129 Attachment: ^Exhibit - Salary Plan Executive Management PFP - Current (9.15(c)--Consider Resolution approving amendments to Executive Classification
Current
Max Salary
(Monthly)
2023 Wage
Increase
Proposed
2023 Max
Salary
(Monthly)
2024 Wage
Increase
Proposed
2024 Max
Salary
(Monthly)
Aggregate
Increase Over
Two Years
Spread
Between
Subordinate Highest Paid Subordinate/Line of Progression 2024 Max Salary for
Subordinate
Director of Electric Utility 23,114 12.6% 26,035 5.0% 27,337 18.3% 10.0% Assistant Director of Electric Utility 24,852 Assistant Director of Electric Utility 21,012 12.6% 23,669 5.0% 24,852 18.3% 10.0% Electric Manager-Energy Management 22,593 Chief Information Officer 16,043 26.5% 20,296 4.0% 21,108 31.6% 10.0% Electric Manager-Technology 19,189 Electric Manager-Technology 15,245 21.0% 18,451 4.0% 19,189 25.9% 18.4% Electric Program Supervisor-Operational Technology 16,213 GIS Manager 10,910 15.9% 12,645 4.0% 13,150 20.5% 39.4% Senior Information Analyst 9,436 Electric Program Supervisor-Operational Technology 13,292 17.3% 15,589 4.0% 16,213 22.0% 10.0% Electric Utility Operational Technology Engineer 14,739 Electric Utility Operational Technology Engineer 12,228 15.9% 14,172 4.0% 14,739 20.5% Cybersecurity Officer 12,624 15.9% 14,631 4.0% 15,216 20.5% Electric Manager 13,602 12.3% 15,281 4.0% 15,893 16.8% 5.0% Electric Program Supervisor 15,136 Electric Manager-Power Plant Production 19,250 0.0% 19,250 5.0% 20,214 5.0% 10.0% Electric Program Supervisor-Power Production 18,376 Electric Program Supervisor-Power Production 17,500 0.0% 17,500 5.0% 18,376 5.0% 10.0% Working Foreman - Power Plant Operations 16,704 Power Plant Engineer II 13,591 4.1% 14,147 4.0% 14,713 8.3% 10.0% Power Plant Engineer I 13,375 Power Plant Engineer I 11,645 10.4% 12,861 4.0% 13,375 14.9% 18.6% Electric Utility Engineering Associate 11,279 Electric Manager-Energy Management 19,065 12.9% 21,517 5.0% 22,593 18.5% 10.0% Electric Program Supervisor-Energy Management 20,539 Electric Program Supervisor-Energy Management 17,290 13.1% 19,561 5.0% 20,539 18.8% 12.1% Electric Utility Senior System Operator - Power 18,317 Electric Program Supervisor-Settlements 13,292 9.5% 14,554 4.0% 15,136 13.9% 39.0% Electric Utility Analyst - Power Settlements 10,886 Electric Manager-Engineering 19,065 10.6% 21,087 5.0% 22,141 16.1% 33.5% Electrical Engineering Supervisor 16,586 Electric Manager-Operations 19,065 10.6% 21,087 5.0% 22,141 16.1% 10.0% Electric Program Supervisor-System Operator-T&D 20,129 Electric Program Supervisor-System Operator-T&D 17,290 10.9% 19,170 5.0% 20,129 16.4% 11.1% Electric Utility Senior System Operator - T&D (NERC) 18,123 Electric Program Supervisor-Substation Maintenance 14,172 12.5% 15,948 4.0% 16,586 17.0% 14.6% Senior Substation Electrical Technician (Cert) 14,476 Electric Program Supervisor-Service Planning 13,987 4.1% 14,554 4.0% 15,136 8.2% 22.7% Senior Electric Utility Distribution Planner/Inspector 12,334 Electrical Engineering Supervisor 14,929 6.8% 15,948 4.0% 16,586 11.1% 12.7% Electric Utility Senior Project Engineer 14,713 Electric Utility Senior Project Engineer 13,156 7.5% 14,147 4.0% 14,713 11.8% 10.0% Electric Utility Engineer 13,375 Electric Utility Operations/ Compliance Engineer 13,591 4.1% 14,147 4.0% 14,713 8.3% 10.0% Electric Utility Engineer 13,375 Electrical Engineer 13,591 4.1% 14,147 4.0% 14,713 8.3% 10.0% Electric Utility Engineer 13,375 Electric Utility Engineer 11,645 10.4% 12,861 4.0% 13,375 14.9% 18.6% Electric Utility Engineering Associate 11,279 Electric Utility Engineering Associate 10,189 6.4% 10,845 4.0% 11,279 10.7% 10.0% Electric Utility Engineering Assistant II 10,254 Electric Utility Engineering Assistant II 9,296 6.1% 9,859 4.0% 10,254 10.3% 10.0% Electric Utility Engineering Assistant I 9,321 Electric Utility Engineering Assistant I 8,441 6.2% 8,963 4.0% 9,321 10.4% Electric Manager-Line 15,913 20.3% 19,139 4.0% 19,904 25.1% 20.0% Electric Program Supervisor-Line 16,586 Electric Program Supervisor-Arborist 13,292 9.5% 14,554 4.0% 15,136 13.9% 70.3% Senior Utility Arborist 8,886 Electric Program Supervisor-Line 14,516 9.9% 15,948 4.0% 16,586 14.3% 14.6% Senior Line Technician (Cert) 14,476 Electric Manager-Resources 15,913 16.0% 18,451 4.0% 19,189 20.6% 26.8% Electric Utility Senior Resource Planner 15,136 Electric Utility Senior Resource Planner 13,292 9.5% 14,554 4.0% 15,136 13.9% 10.0% Electric Utility Resource Planner 13,760 Electric Utility Resource Planner 12,228 8.2% 13,231 4.0% 13,760 12.5% 20.0% Electric Utility Associate Resource Planner 11,466 Electric Utility Associate Resource Planner 9,882 11.6% 11,025 4.0% 11,466 16.0% Compliance Officer 19,065 10.6% 21,087 5.0% 22,141 16.1% 46.3% Electric Program Supervisor-Compliance 15,136 Electric Program Supervisor-Compliance 13,292 9.5% 14,554 4.0% 15,136 13.9% 39.0% Electric Utility Analyst - Compliance 10,886 Electric Utility Manager-Customer Service and Metering 15,913 16.0% 18,451 4.0% 19,189 20.6% 15.7% Electric Program Supervisor-Meter Shop 16,586 Electric Program Supervisor-Customer Programs 13,292 9.5% 14,554 4.0% 15,136 13.9% 37.7% Senior Demand Side Management Coordinator 10,989 Electric Program Supervisor-Customer Services 13,292 9.5% 14,554 4.0% 15,136 13.9% 41.7% Senior Project Coordinator - Technical 10,682 Electric Program Supervisor-Meter Shop 14,172 12.5% 15,948 4.0% 16,586 17.0% 14.6% Senior Meter Technician (Certification) 14,476 Energy Services Account Manager 9,754 2.0% 9,949 4.0% 10,347 6.1% Electric Manager-Financial 16,043 15.0% 18,451 4.0% 19,189 19.6% 26.8% Electric Program Supervisor-Financial 15,136 Electric Program Supervisor-Financial 13,292 9.5% 14,554 4.0% 15,136 13.9% 39.0% Electric Utility Analyst - Risk and Pricing 10,886 Electric Program Supervisor 13,292 9.5% 14,554 4.0% 15,136 13.9% 58.6% Electric Utility Analyst - General 9,543
CITY OF REDDING
Electric Salary Modification Recommendation
Effective September 3, 2023
Packet Pg. 1130 Attachment: ^Table - Proposed Salary Increases (REU) (9.15(c)--Consider Resolution approving amendments to Executive Management Pay- Classification
Current
Max Salary
(Monthly)
2023 Wage
Increase
Proposed
2023 Max
Salary
(Monthly)
2024 Wage
Increase
Proposed
2024 Max
Salary
Monthly
Aggregate
Increase Over
Two Years
Relationship
Compression
After 2024 Proposed Relationship
2024 Max Salary for
Subordinate
City Manager 23,623 13.00% 26,694 5.00% 28,029 0.00% 2.53% 2.5% above REU Director 27,337 Chief of Police 20,664 0.00% 20,664 5.50% 21,801 5.50% 25.15% Previous increase was 25% above Police Captain 17,420 City Attorney 20,917 0.00% 20,917 0.00% 20,917 0.00% N/A Salary by Contract 15,769 Assistant City Manager 18,116 5.00% 19,022 5.00% 19,973 10.00% 19.92% Approx. 20% above Director of Finance 16,655 Fire Chief 18,287 5.00% 19,201 4.00% 19,969 9.00% 16.06% Approx. 16% above Deputy Fire Chief 17,206 Director of Public Works 17,253 5.00% 18,116 1.50% 18,387 6.50% 9.79% Approx. 10% above Development Services Director (or set above Assistant Director if compaction) N/A
Deputy Fire Chief 15,756 5.00% 16,544 4.00% 17,206 9.00% 20.53% Approx. 15% above Battalion Chief 14,275 Director of Development Services 15,637 2.00% 15,950 5.00% 16,747 7.00% 15.13% Approx. 15% above Asst Director of Development Services (previously was 10% below PW Director) 14,546
Director of Community Services 15,637 2.00% 15,950 5.00% 16,747 7.00% 24.77% Equal to Director of Development Services N/A Director of Finance 14,552 9.00% 15,862 5.00% 16,655 14.00% 19.86% Approx. 20% above Finance Officer 13,895 Deputy City Manager 14,523 9.00% 15,830 5.00% 16,622 14.00% 20.16% Approx. 20% below Assistant City Manager N/A Assistant City Attorney II 15,310 0.00% 15,310 3.00% 15,769 3.00% 32.64% 20% below City Attorney 14,281 Assistant City Engineer 13,446 5.50% 14,186 8.00% 15,320 13.50% 15.06% Approx. 15% above Senior Civil Engineer 13,315 Assistant Director of Public Works 14,227 1.50% 14,440 5.00% 15,162 6.50% 14.58% Approx. 15% above Municipal Utilities Manager (may
create compaction) 13,233
Personnel Director 14,552 0.00% 14,552 3.00% 14,989 3.00% 24.29% Approx 20% above Personnel Manager 12,059 Assistant Director of Development
Services/Building Official 13,069 6.00% 13,853 5.00% 14,546 11.00% 15.07% Approx. 15% above Building Official 12,641 Assistant City Attorney I 13,865 0.00% 13,865 3.00% 14,281 3.00% 10.42% Approx. 10% below Assistant City Attorney II 11,951 Planning Manager/Community Development
Manager 12,475 8.00% 13,473 5.50% 14,214 13.50% 10.43% 10% above Housing Manager 12,871 Deputy Director of Public Works 12,975 2.00% 13,235 5.00% 13,896 7.00% 9.11% 5% above Munipal Utility Manager 13,233 Finance Officer 12,085 9.50% 13,233 5.00% 13,895 14.50% 20.08% Approx. 20% above Asst Finance Officer 11,571 Assistant Director - Community Services 12,356 3.00% 12,727 5.00% 13,363 8.00% 24.77% Approx. 20% below Director of Community Services N/A Municipal Utilities Manager 12,356 2.00% 12,603 5.00% 13,233 7.00% 20.46% Approx. 20% above Public Works Supervisor -Water 10,986 Housing Manager 11,195 9.50% 12,259 5.00% 12,871 14.50% 20.50% Approx. 20% above Senior Project Coordinator -
Community 10,682
Transit Manager 12,475 0.00% 12,475 3.00% 12,849 3.00% 25.30% Approx 25% above Senior Transportation Planner 10,255 Building Official 11,861 1.50% 12,039 5.00% 12,641 6.50% 20.32% Approx. 20% above Dev Services Supervisor 10,506 Environmental Compliance Manager 11,893 0.00% 11,893 3.00% 12,250 3.00% 27.38% Approx. 15% above Associate Environmental Specialist 9,617 Field Foreman-Electrical Technician 10,898 6.50% 11,606 5.00% 12,187 11.50% 15.33% Approx. 15% above Electrical Technician 10,567 Personnel Manager 10,741 9.00% 11,708 3.00% 12,059 12.00% N/A Approx. 20% above Senior Personnel Analyst 10,028 Risk Manager 10,740 9.00% 11,708 3.00% 12,059 12.00% 20.25% Banded with Personnel Manager N/A Deputy City Attorney 11,603 0.00% 11,603 3.00% 11,951 3.00% 19.49% Approx. 10% below Assistant City Attorney I N/A Airports Manager 11,491 0.00% 11,491 3.00% 11,836 3.00% 19.96% Approx. 20% above Assistant Airport Operations Manager 9,866 Assistant Finance Officer 10,110 9.00% 11,020 5.00% 11,571 14.00% 15.47% Approx. 15% above Senior Accountant 10,021 Deputy Building Official 11,122 0.00% 11,122 4.00% 11,567 4.00% 10.10% Approx. 10% above Development Services Supervisor 10,506 Administrator-Office of City Clerk 10,629 0.00% 10,629 5.00% 11,160 5.00% 15.08% Approx. 15% above Assistant City Clerk 9,698
CITY OF REDDING
Unrepresented (Non Electric) Salary Modification Recommendation Effective September 3, 2023
1 of2 Packet Pg. 1131 Attachment: ^Table - Proposed Wage Increases (non REU) (9.15(c)--Consider Resolution approving Administrator-Office of City Treasurer 10,629 0.00% 10,629 3.00% 10,948 3.00% 12.89% Approx. 10% above Deputy City Treasurer 9,698 Economic Development, Innovation and
Equity Manager 10,463 0.00% 10,463 3.00% 10,777 3.00% N/A Benchmark N/A Communication Manager 10,028 0.00% 10,028 5.50% 10,580 5.50% 20.29% Approx 20% above Senior Marketing Specialist 8,795 Parks & Facilities Manager 10,068 0.00% 10,068 3.00% 10,370 3.00% 18.45% Approx. 20% above Parks Superintendent 8,755 Fleet Manager 8,270 18.00% 9,759 5.00% 10,247 23.00% 15.18% Approx. 15% above Fleet Shop Supervisor 8,896 Senior Personnel Analyst 9,736 0.00% 9,736 3.00% 10,028 3.00% 10.83% Approx. 10% above Personnel Analyst II 9,048 Assistant Airports Manager 9,579 0.00% 9,579 3.00% 9,866 3.00% 41.78% Approx. 15% above Working Supervisor-Airport Operations and Maintenance 6,959
Purchasing Officer 9,169 0.00% 9,169 3.00% 9,444 3.00% 22.22% Approx. 15% above Senior Buyer 7,727 Management Assistant to the City Manager 8,718 1.50% 8,849 5.00% 9,291 6.50% 5.41% Approx. 5% above Management Analyst II 8,814 Police Services Manager 8,270 2.50% 8,477 5.00% 8,901 7.50% 20.00% Approx. 20% above Police Services Supervisor 7,417 Recreation Superintendent 8,378 0.00% 8,378 4.50% 8,755 4.50% 15.12% Approx. 15% above Recreation Supervisor II 7,605 Parks Superintendent 8,378 0.00% 8,378 4.50% 8,755 4.50% N/A Same as Recreation Superintendent N/A Executive Assistant to City Manager 6,800 10.50% 7,514 5.00% 7,890 15.50% 17.76% Approx. 15% below Management Assistant to the City
Manager N/A
Reprographics Manager 6,800 10.50% 7,514 5.00% 7,890 15.50% N/A Equal to Exec Asst of CM N/A 2 of2 Packet Pg. 1132 Attachment: ^Table - Proposed Wage Increases (non REU) (9.15(c)--Consider Resolution approving